Professional Documents
Culture Documents
1 What's New. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2 Asset Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.1 Environment, Health and Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Incident Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
2.2 Maintenance Operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Classifying Maintenance Plans. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Find Maintenance Plans. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Find Maintenance Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Mass Time Confirmations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Basic Cloud Printing in Asset Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2.3 Country/Region Specifics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
2.4 SAP Best Practices Content. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
Lean Incident Management Reporting (3FP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Integration with Asset Central Foundation (3YE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Preventive Maintenance (BJ2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
3 Finance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3.1 Name Changes for Finance Apps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
3.2 Deprecated Apps and Factsheets in Controlling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
3.3 Cost Management and Profitability Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Overhead Cost Accounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Templates Added to Schedule Overhead Accounting Jobs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Configuration for Overhead Cost Accounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Enter Manual Cost Allocations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Internal Orders No Longer Available. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
Project Settlement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Manage Direct Activity Allocation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Product Costing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Inventory Valuation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Adjust Inventory Balance Sheet Accounts - Delta Posting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Navigation to Journal Entries for Delta Postings in Inventory Balance Sheet Valuations. . . . . . . . .44
Job Template for Adjusting Inventory Balance Sheet Accounts with Delta Postings. . . . . . . . . . . .45
Lowest Value Determination at Company Code Level. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
Manage Material Valuations Supports Price Changes for Sales Order Stocks and Project
Stocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
IAM Objects in Cost Management and Profitability Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
5 Manufacturing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
5.1 Production Planning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Maintain PIRs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
API for Planned Orders (Create, Read, Update, Delete). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291
API for Buffer Profile. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
API for Buffer Sizing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Configuration for Material Requirements Planning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
API for Production Order - Create, Read, Update. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Schedule Production. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
IAM Objects in Production Planning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
7 R&D/Engineering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
7.1 Enterprise Portfolio and Project Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Project Financial Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
Project Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Enterprise Project - Create, Read, Update, Delete. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
IAM Objects in Enterprise Portfolio and Project Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360
7.2 Integrated Product Development for Discrete Industries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Syntax enhancements: Trigonometric functions for AVC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Enhanced Handling of Inconsistencies for AVC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Enhanced Trace Functionality for AVC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Extensibility of the Configuration Engine via BAdIs for AVC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Enterprise Search for Classification Class. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Enterprise Search for Classification Characteristic. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Enable Product Structure Variants in Change Record. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Manage Product Structures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Enable the Where-Used Function in Product Structures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
7.3 Integrated Product Development for Process Industries. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Contribution-based Formulation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Recipe Header Extensibility. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
7.4 Product Compliance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369
Foundation for Product Compliance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
Product Marketability and Chemical Compliance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Dangerous Goods Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
Safety Data Sheet Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
7.5 SAP Best Practices Content. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
8 Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
8.1 Cross Topics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .394
Configuration for Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
IAM Objects in Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
8.2 Master Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
Organizational Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
8.3 Service Contract Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
Manage Service Contracts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Price Adaptation for Service Contracts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Price Agreements in Service Contracts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Service Contract Determination. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Monitor Auto Renewal Logs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
SOAP APIs for Service Contracts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .403
8.4 Service Order Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Synchronize Organizational Units (Deprecated). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Quick Create for Service Orders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Quick Create for Service Confirmations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Set Service Confirmations to Final. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Overtime Categories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
Procurement Integration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
8.5 Analytics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
CDS Views for Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
Service Management Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Service Contract Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Service Order Analysis. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 410
Service Transaction Fulfillment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .411
8.6 SAP Best Practices Content. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Service Order Management and Monitoring (3D2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
9 Sales. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
9.1 Order and Contract Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Sales Master Data Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
Price Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Sales Quotation Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Sales Contract Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Sales Order Management and Processing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
Sales Billing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .435
Solution Billing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Incentive and Commission Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Claims, Returns, and Refund Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Sales Monitoring and Analytics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
IAM Objects in Order and Contract Management. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
9.2 SAP Best Practices Content. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .462
Sales Scheduling Agreements (3NR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Sell from Stock (BD9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Internal Commissions Settlement with SAP Sales Cloud (3TD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
SAP Digital Payments Add-on - Sales (1Z1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
B2B Order Fulfillment with SAP Commerce Cloud (2TY) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
Predictive Analytics Model Training - Sales (2YJ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Convergent Billing (1MC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Return Order Processing for Non-Stock Material (3TE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
9.3 Country/Region Specifics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
12 Integration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
12.1 SAP Best Practices Content. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566
Data Migration to SAP S/4HANA from Staging (2Q2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
Import Connection Setup with SAP Analytics Cloud (1YB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
Data Migration to SAP S/4HANA from File (BH5) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
Legal Content Management (1XV) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .569
Core HR with SAP SuccessFactors Employee Central (JB1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
Automated Provisioning via SAP Cloud Identity Access Governance (3AB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
Data Protection and Privacy (1J7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
What's New in SAP S/4HANA Cloud provides you with delta information on all new, changed or deleted
features of this product. The What's New Viewer provides the same information in an interactive format.
Note
The term “country” or "region" is used for convenience only and does not necessarily infer the existence of
a nation state.
With this feature, you can record and process incidents, safety observations, and near misses. After initial
recording, you can collect additional information about the people involved, attach related documents,
investigate why an incident occurred, and define tasks for prevention of further incidents. You can report data
to the relevant authorities to meet legal requirements. In addition, you can perform comprehensive incidents
and injuries/illnesses detailed analysis.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
This business function allows you to classify maintenance plans. The grouping of maintenance plans with
identical attributes into classes enables you, for example, to search more effectively for maintenance plans
with certain characteristic values.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
As a maintenance planner, you can use the default class type 80 to specify the classification of maintenance
plans in the three apps Manage Characteristics, Manage Classes, and Manage Class Assignments. In this class
type you can create your own classes and structure them in a hierarchy. For the classes, you then define
characteristics and possible characteristic values. For more information about the meaning and importance of
classes and characteristics and how to create them, see the documentation on the SAP Help Portal under
Classification System (CA-CL).
In the apps for creating and changing maintenance plans, you can use the new Classification section with the
two subsections Classes and Characteristic Values.
In the Maintenance Plan and Maintenance Item list app, the new Classification section is available under Define
New Query and Change Query. If you enter classification data here, the system assembles maintenance plans
of a given class with selected characteristic values in the results list.
Related Information
This application enables you to find and display maintenance plans. You can also view the properties of a
maintenance plan.
Technical Details
Type New
For more information about this application, see: Find Maintenance Plans
This application enables you to find and display maintenance items. You can also view properties of a
maintenance item.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
For more information about this application, see: Find Maintenance Items
You can upload time confirmations in the Find Maintenance Order and Operation app.
When you upload time confirmations, you are taken to the Create Time Confirmations app where you can view
the status of uploaded time confirmations. The time confirmations in the Ready tab are ready to be posted. The
time confirmations in the Errors tab can be posted only after you correct the errors and validate them once
again.
Type New
Application Component PM
Related Information
With this feature, you can view and print shop papers for maintenance orders.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
If you have the role Maintenance Planner, you can use the apps Change Maintenance Order and Manage
Orders and Notifications in Information Center to print shop papers along with attachments of the order. All the
If you have the role Maintenance Technician, you can view and print shop papers for a selected job using SAP
Cloud Print Manager. You can assign the job to a person.
You need to configure print queues for maintenance technicians. If the print queues are not set up, then all the
print jobs are dispatched to the DEFAULT queue.
You need to install SAP Cloud Print Manager for each client for printing of the shop papers.
Effects on Configuration
The system has default rules for printing shop papers for maintenance orders in the Output Parameter
Determination app. You can review the pre-configured rules and create new rules if required. For more
information, see Output Management.
Related Information
Use
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
This scope item describes the steps required to integrate SAP S/4HANA Cloud with asset central foundation,
which is based on SAP Cloud Platform.
Technical Details
Technical Name of Scope Item 3YE ( Integration with Asset Central Foundation )
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
● The process flow for preventive maintenance is segregated into preventive maintenance (time-based) and
preventive maintenance (performance-based).
● The process flow for preventive maintenance (time-based) is extended to include both single cycle and
strategy maintenance plan types.
● The process flow for preventive maintenance (performance-based) includes the maintenance plan types
supported namely single cycle, strategy, and multiple counter plans.
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
Several apps and factsheets in Cost Management and Profitabiltiy Analysis will be replaced soon. We
recommend that you switch to the successor app as soon as possible. For more information about the
deprecated apps and the successor apps, please see the links below.
Deprecated apps will be deleted two releases from now. They have been removed from the business catalog
and are no longer visible on the Fiori launchpad. If you need the apps, you can find them in the App Finder until
they are deleted.
Statistical Key Figure Manage Statistical Key Fig J54 (Overhead Cost Ac
ures (Version 2) [page 58]
counting)
Activity Type Manage Activity Types (Ver J54 (Overhead Cost Ac
sion 2) [page 55], Where-
counting)
Used List - Activity Types
[page 56]
Change FIFO Results FIFO Results BEJ (Inventory Valuation for Year-End
Closing)
Delta Runs for Balance Sheet Valuation Adjust Inventory Balance Sheet BEJ (Inventory Valuation for Year-End
Accounts – Delta Postings Closing)
Type Changed
Budget availability control helps you avoid budget exceedances for cost centers. When you post an expense,
the available budget is checked. If the budget consumption exceeds a defined limit, either a warning or an error
message appears. This system response is based on the settings that you have defined in the budget
availability control profile. The Cost Center Budget Report app provides you with information about budget,
actual costs, commitments, and available budget for your budget-carrying cost centers.
Type New
Additional Details
You can use the Cost Center Budget Report app to:
● View budget, plan data, actual costs, and commitments for budget-carrying cost centers. The information
displayed is based on filter criteria, such as company code and fiscal year.
● View costs and budget details for multiple budget-carrying cost centers with different company codes.
● Switch between a visual filter and a compact filter for available budget.
● Navigate to view the details of a cost center.
Effects on Configuration
Budget availability control can be used for cost centers only after you have created a Budget Availability Control
Profile for these cost centers.
Therefore, you must create a Budget Availability Control Profile and assign account groups to it. The
assignment of account groups defines:
Related Information
New templates Actual Overhead Calculation - Projects, Actual Overhead Calculation - Maintenance Orders, and
Actual Settlement - Maintenance Orders have been added to the Schedule Overhead Accounting Jobs app. In
addition, the apps Process Unposted Time Confirmations, Transfer Issues, Set Status to Closed Orders -
Collective, and Run Overhead Calculation Orders - Actual (Collective) have been moved from the SAP Fiori
Launchpad to the Schedule Overhead Accounting Jobs app.
Technical Details
Type Changed
With this release, new configuration steps for making settings related to Overhead Accounting have been added
to Configure Your Solution in the Manage Your Solution app. In addition, changes have been made to some
previously delivered configuration items or configuration steps.
Technical Details
Type Changed
New/
changed
Type of Configura configura How to find What you Leading Solution Solution Ca
change tion for ... tion object it can do scope item Area pability
New fields in Contract- Assign Activ Find this con You can as 3D2 (Service Controlling Cost Center
SSCUI Based Reve ity Type to figuration un Order Man Accounting
sign Activity
nue Recogni Service Prod der agement and
Types to the
tion uct Controlling Monitoring),
Material 3M5 (Event-
Cost Groups of the Based Reve
Center
Service Prod nue Recogni
Accounting ucts (Materi tion - Service
Actual Documents -
als), or to the
Postings US GAAP)
Service Prod
Additional 3MO (Service
ucts directly. Contract
Transaction-
Related You can as Manage
ment)
Postings sign a differ-
ent Activity
Type to an in
dividual Ma
terial Group
or the Service
Product.
This Activity
Type will be
used as the
default for all
Material
Groups and
Service Prod
ucts not
listed.
New fields in Contract- Assign G/L Find this con You can as 3D2 (Service Controlling Cost Center
SSCUI Based Reve Account to figuration un Order Man Accounting
sign G/L ac
nue Recogni Expense der agement and
counts to the
tion Product Controlling Monitoring),
Material 3M5 (Event-
Cost Groups of the Based Reve
Center
Expense nue Recogni
Accounting Products tion - Service
Actual Documents -
(Materials),
Postings US GAAP)
or to the Ex
Additional 3MO (Service
pense Prod Contract
Transaction-
ucts directly. Manage
Related
ment)
Postings You can as
sign a differ-
ent G/L ac
count to an
individual
Material
Group or Ex
pense Prod
uct.
New SSCUI Budget Man Maintain Find this con You can cre J54 (Over Controlling Cost Center
head Cost Accounting
agement Budget figuration ate multiple
Accounting)
Availability step under budget avail
Profile for Finance ability control
Cost Centers Overhead profiles and
Management profiles to
cost centers,
Budget
which are
Managemen
budget rele
t vant.
Then, you
can specify
the following:
● The
budget
currency
type that
shall be
used for
budget
availabil
ity con
trol.
● The ac
count
groups.
● The tol
erance
limits for
budget
usage
and the
appro
priate
system
response
when
these
limits are
reached.
For ex
ample,
warn
ings, er
rors, or
notifica-
tions.
New field in Budget Man Maintain Find this con You can spec 1NT (Project Controlling Overhead
SSCUI Financial Projects
agement Budget figuration ify the budger
Control)
Availability step under currency type
Profile for Finance that shall be
Projects Overhead used for
Effects on Configuration
Make your entries in Configure Your Solution, which is part of the Manage Your Solution app. In the Realize
phase, make changes to predelivered configuration settings or create new settings if needed. It may be
possible to create new settings by copying existing settings and adapting them. Note that to ensure data
consistency, the changes that you can make to predelivered configuration settings may be limited. In some, but
not all cases, you can delete new records that you have added.
For more information about the settings that are to be made in each configuration step, read the system
documentation. You access this documentation from within the configuration step using the Configuration Help
button.
The Enter Manual Cost Allocations app was previously removed from the Fiori launchpad.
However, it has been re-added to the App Finder to enable customers to reallocate cost objects.
You can add it back to the Fiori Launchpad through the App Finder.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Internal orders are no longer available. This function has been replaced by projects. To create and analyze
projects, please use the Project Control app.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Related Information
It is now possible to settle projects to other projects by defining a WBS element as the settlement receiver.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
● Settlement to WBS elements within the same project structure is not possible.
● Settlement to T&M projects is not possible.
With this feature you can view, create, and reverse direct activity allocations.
Type New
Related Information
With this release, new configuration steps for making settings related to Product Costing have been added to
Configure Your Solution in the Manage Your Solution app. In addition, changes have been made to some
previously delivered configuration items or configuration steps.
Technical Details
New/changed
Configuration configuration ob Leading scope
Type of change for ... ject How to find it What you can do item
New fields in Product Cost Plan Maintain Find this configu- You can specify BEI (Period-End
SSCUI ning Summarization ration under the structure of Closing - Plant)
Hierarchies Controlling your summariza
Product Cost tion hierarchy. You
can also specify
Controlling
which criteria are
Information
used for the sum
System Cost marization of
Object Controlling costs and quanti
Settings for ties of objects in
Summarized the definition of
Analysis/Order the summarization
hierarchy so that
Selection
you can run the
Analyze Summari
zation Hierarchy
report based on
the defined sum
marization hierar
chy structure.
Effects on Configuration
Make your entries in Configure Your Solution, which is part of the Manage Your Solution app. In the Realize
phase, make changes to predelivered configuration settings or create new settings if needed. It may be
possible to create new settings by copying existing settings and adapting them. Note that to ensure data
consistency, the changes that you can make to predelivered configuration settings may be limited. In some, but
not all cases, you can delete new records that you have added.
For more information about the settings that are to be made in each configuration step, read the system
documentation. You access this documentation from within the configuration step using the Configuration Help
button.
Related Information
With this feature you can now also enable event-based WIP reporting for process orders of Order Type YBM2, in
addition to production orders of Order Type YBM1.
Order Types YBM1 (production order) and YBM2 (process order) are currently supported, in make-to-stock
scenarios without co- or by-products.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
This feature is a non-standard scope item, and if you use this scope item many of the traditional steps (as
described in scope BEI) of WIP calculation, and overhead calculation are no longer required.
The Fiori apps Real-Time Work in Process, Inspect WIP/Variance Posting and Schedule Product Costing Jobs are
used with this process.
1. Source Assignment Definition: Allows you to define the sources of production costs and Delivery cost. This
can be done by specifying Cost Elements.
2. Define Assignment Rules: In this step, you define the rules for account assignment for WIP posting.
3. Combine Source Elements and Posting Rules: You can combine the source assignments and the
assignment rules defined in the previous step with the posting rules and map to company code. This allows
you to specify which of the line items is the input for the posting rule.
4. Set Result Analysis Key RSEBW and Event Based Costing Sheet
The Real-Time WIP report will display Make-to-Stock production and process orders (Order Types YBM1 and
YMB2) under the following conditions:
Prerequisites
1. Change Result Analysis Key assignment for the selected Plant and Order Type
You need to change the Results Analysis Key assignment for the selected Plants and Order Types YBM1
and YMB2 from MBMF01 - WIP Actual Cost to RSEBW - Event Based WIP.
You do this using Manage Your Solution Configure Your Solution SSCUI ID 102431 Define Order-Type-
Dependent Parameters Order Type YBM1 / YMB2 .
2. Change the Costing Sheet to Event-Based Costing Sheet for the selected Plant and Valuation Variant
You need to change the Costing Sheet to Event-Based Costing Sheet using Manage Your Solution
Configure Your Solution SSCUI ID 102608 Product Cost Planning - Define Valuation Variants per Plant
Overhead Costing Sheet Overhead on Finished and Semi-finished Materials
Note
Event-Based Posting is not currrently supported for co- and by-products, and so a non-event-based key
should be assigned to these types of products.
With this app you can now also see real-time work in process data for process orders of order type YBM2.
Order types YBM1 (production order) and YBM2 (process order) are currently supported, in make-to-stock
scenarios without co- or by-products. The app uses event-based posting to show values for any specified key
date, both as a total for the selected cost objects and at the level of individual orders.
Please note that scope item 3F0 (Real-Time Production Cost Posting) is required for this app.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Effects on Configuration
Scope item 3F0 (Real-Time Production Cost Posting) must be implemented. Order types YBM1 and YBM2
must have the Results Analysis Key RSEBW - Event Based WIP and the Event-Based Costing Sheet
assigned.
For details of configuration steps see: Real-Time Work in Process Posting [page 40]
Related Information
With this app you can run reports to review if any errors need to be resolved, or if any manual additional
postings are required for real-time WIP. You can manually post additional costs to ensure the order balance is
zero and the order can be closed.
Technical Details
Type New
With this application you can schedule product costing jobs for the following applications:
Technical Details
Type New
The new Adjust Inventory Balance Sheet Accounts - Delta Posting app enables you to adjust your inventory
balance sheet accounts with delta postings after determining the lowest value of your materials. The
adjustment can be made to a specific ledger.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
The Adjust Inventory Balance Sheet Accounts - Delta Posting app replaces the Delta Runs for Balance Sheet
Valuation app.
Note
Delta Runs for Balance Sheet Valuation is deprecated. It will be removed from the business catalog in SAP
S/4HANA Cloud 1911.
Related Information
You can now navigate to journal entries for delta postings in the Inventory Balance Sheet Valuations app.
Technical Details
Type New
A job template corresponding to the Adjust Inventory Balance Sheet Accounts - Delta Posting app has been
added to the Schedule Inventory Accounting Jobs app.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
For background processing, it is recommended to use the job template instead of executing the Adjust
Inventory Balance Sheet Accounts - Delta Posting app in the background.
Related Information
In inventory balance sheet valuation, the lowest value can now be determined at the company code level in
addition to the plant level.
Type Changed
Additional Details
Related Information
In the Manage Material Valuations app you can now change prices for sales order stocks and project stocks.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Related Information
Changes to the Identity and Access Management (IAM) objects delivered for Cost Management and
Profitability Analysis require you to recheck your business roles and the business catalogs assigned to them.
Ensure that the correct business catalogs are assigned to the roles that you have and that the restrictions
included in the business catalogs are set correctly to allow your users to use their business apps as needed.
Inform your end users of changes to the business group on the SAP Fiori launchpad.
Technical Details
Type Changed
CO-OM
The following changes were made to the default business groups shown on the SAP Fiori launchpad for the
following business role templates:
Periodic Activities for Inventory The following apps have been removed BEJ (Inventory Valuation for Year-End
Accounting from the business group: Closing)
Periodic Activities for Overhead Cost The following apps have been removed
Controlling from the business group:
The restriction 'Hierarchy Type/ID for Accounting' has been replaced with a new restriction called 'Hierarchy
Type/ID for Overhead Accounting'. If you maintained the old restriction type before, please maintain the new
restriction.
A new business catalog, SAP_FIN_BC_OH_MD_CCA_PC, has been added to the Hierarchy Type/ID for Overhead
Accounting restriction.
The Hierarchy Type/ID for Overhead Accounting restriction can be found in the following business catalogs in
the SAP_BR_OVERHEAD_ACCOUNTANT business role template:
To allow business users who have the same minimum authorizations as the Divisional Accountant
(SAP_BR_DIVISION_ACCOUNTANT) business role template, to perform allocations for profit centers, the
following changes have been made to the business role template:
Profit Center Accounting - Profit Center Master Data The following apps were added:
(SAP_FIN_BC_OH_MD_PCA_PC)
● Change Log – Profit Centers
● Manage Allocations
Profit Center Accounting - General Posting Activities This is a new business catalog. It contains the apps for gen
(SAP_FIN_BC_OH_GPA_PCA_PC) eral posting in profit center accounting and the Run
Allocations app.
Profit Center Accounting - Profit Center Display This business catalog is deleted. It is replaced by the Profit
(SAP_FIN_BC_OH_FACT_PCA_PC)
Center Accounting - Profit Center Master Data
(SAP_FIN_BC_OH_MD_PCA_PC) business catalog.
Note that these changes are relevant for the 2QL scope item.
Several apps and factsheets in Cost Management and Profitabiltiy Analysis will be replaced soon. We
recommend that you switch to the successor app as soon as possible. For more information about the
deprecated apps and the successor apps, please see the links below.
Deprecated apps will be deleted two releases from now. They have been removed from the business catalog
and are no longer visible on the Fiori launchpad. If you need the apps, you can find them in the App Finder until
they are deleted.
Statistical Key Figure Manage Statistical Key Fig J54 (Overhead Cost Ac
ures (Version 2) [page 58]
counting)
Activity Type Manage Activity Types (Ver J54 (Overhead Cost Ac
sion 2) [page 55], Where-
counting)
Used List - Activity Types
[page 56]
Deprecated Apps
Change FIFO Results FIFO Results BEJ (Inventory Valuation for Year-End
Closing)
Delta Runs for Balance Sheet Valuation Adjust Inventory Balance Sheet BEJ (Inventory Valuation for Year-End
Accounts – Delta Postings Closing)
Type Changed
With SAP S/4HANA Cloud 1905, the set of apps that you can use to create and change the master data needed
for managing your costs and analyzing profitability has changed: New apps are available and existing apps have
new features and functions to better track the maintenance process.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item J54 (Overhead Cost Accounting), J58 (Accounting and Fi
nancial Close), 2QL (Universal Allocation)
Type of master data Changes with this release Link to detailed What's New topic
activity type New app: The Manage Activity Types Manage Activity Types (Version 2)
(Version 2) app provides your business [page 55]
users with a better, more comprehen
sive user experience when dealing with
your activity types
New app: View a log of the changes Change Log - Activity Types [page 55]
made to your activity types
New app: Trace the impact of your ac Where-Used List - Activity Types [page
tivity types by seeing where they are 56]
used
profit center New app: View a log of the changes Change Log - Profit Centers [page 52]
made to your profit centers, for exam
ple, by a particular user
Role changes: Allow your divisional ac See the Divisional Accounting section
inIAM Objects in Cost Management and
countant to make accruals-relevant
Profitability Analysis [page 47]
changes to your profit centers
Final heads-up: Make sure that your Deprecation of Manage Profit Centers
business users are using the Manage [page 54]
Profit Centers (Version 2) app to ensure
that they have the full features deliv
ered for profit center maintenance
statistical key figure New app: The Manage Statistical Key Manage Statistical Key Figures (Version
Figures (Version 2) app provides your 2) [page 58]
business users with a better, more com
prehensive user experience when work
ing with your statistical key figures
Use the Change Log - Profit Centers app to see changes made to profit center master data. You can see what
was changed, by whom, and when, and you can filter for changes made to particular profit centers, or by a
particular user.
Type New
Additional Details
Depending on their authorizations, users can use this app as a standalone tile on the SAP Fiori launchpad or
access it from within the Manage Profit Centers (Version 2) app.
The new app looks like this (image is available in English only):
This app is delivered with the General Ledger Accountant (SAP_BR_GL_ACCOUNTANT) and Divisional
Accountant (SAP_BR_DIVISION_ACCOUNTANT) business role templates. Adjust your business roles as
needed.
The Manage Profit Centers app was replaced by Manage Profit Centers (Version 2) in the previous release. This
app will be removed from the system in SAP S/4HANA Cloud 1908.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Information
Please note that (Version 2) will be removed from the successor app's name in SAP S/4HANA Cloud 1908.
Required Actions
To use the successor app, your business users with the corresponding authorization can choose the Manage
Profit Centers (Version 2) on the SAP Fiori Launchpad.
Related Information
You can use Manage Activity Types (Version 2) to display activity types master data and search for activity
types by their ID, name, unit, or allocation cost element. You can also explore which other objects are using
each activity type by navigating to the Where-Used List – Activity Types app. Manage Activity Types (Version 2)
can be used in conjunction with an older version of this app, Manage Activity Types, that allows you to create
new and manage existing activity types.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
With this app you can see details of changes made to activity type master data. You can see what was changed,
by who, and when, and you can filter for changes made to particular activity types, or by a particular user.
Technical Details
Type New
This app is delivered with the Cost Accountant - Overhead (SAP_BR_OVERHEAD_ACCOUNTANT) business role
template. Adjust your business roles as needed.
This skill allows you to use SAP CoPilot to view changes made to activity type master data. You can simply say
or type your query to see a list of changes to whichever activity type you specify.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
With this app you can find all mentions of a specific activity type in cost centers (in line items and in cost rate
maintenance), receiving orders (in line items), and receiving WBS elements (in line items). You can specify one
or more activity types and view all objects where these activity types are mentioned. To explore additional
details, you can click the object links and navigate to other SAP Fiori apps related to these objects.
Type New
Additional Details
The new app looks like this (image is available in English only):
This app is delivered with the Cost Accountant - Overhead (SAP_BR_OVERHEAD_ACCOUNTANT) business role
template. Adjust your business roles as needed.
This app is a new version of the Manage Statistical Key Figures app. You can use Manage Statistical Key Figures
(Version 2) to display and manage statistical key figures master data. You can create new statistical key figures
as well as copy, edit, and delete existing ones.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
The new app looks like this (image is available in English only):
With this release, new configuration steps for making settings related to General Ledger Accounting have been
added to Configure Your Solution in the Manage Your Solution app. In addition, changes have been made to
some previously delivered configuration items or configuration steps.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
New/changed
Configuration configuration ob Leading scope
Type of change for ... ject How to find it What you can do item
Renamed configu- Chart of Accounts Define G/L Finance Change the IDs J58 (Accounting
ration step Account Mappings and descriptions and Financial
General Ledger
has been renamed of the delivered Close)
Chart of
to Renumber G/L G/L accounts.
Accounts. Accounts
Changed configu- Chart of Accounts Renumber G/L Ac Finance ● Select the Not J58 (Accounting
ration step counts
General Ledger Used field for and Financial
Close)
Chart of G/L accounts
Accounts that you don't
need
● Release
Mapping:
Administrator
selection field
and workflow
has been
added.
● The time
frame for re
numbering
has changed:
You can now
renumber ac
counts right
up to the time
when you
make the first
posting in
your produc
tion system.
New configuration Accruals Manage Define Machine Finance Define the thresh 2VB (Purchase Or
step ment Learning Reliability der Accruals), 3NF
General Ledger old for determin
Threshold (Machine Learning
Purchase Order ing reliable pur
for Accruals Man
Accruals chase order ac agement)
cruals so that they
can be mass re
viewed.
New configuration Financial State Define Financial Finance Create and main J58 (Accounting
step ment Versions Statement and Financial
General Ledger tain your FSVs for
Versions in Global Close)
Chart of use in Manage
Accounting
Hierarchies Accounts Global Accounting
Hierarchies.
New configuration Analyze Exptected Define Analytical Finance Create and main J58 (Accounting
step Credit Loss Key Figures tain settings for
General Ledger and Financial
Allowancesapp. key figures. You
Ledgers and Close)
configure how the
Valuation numbers will be
calculated for ev
ery column and
layout, which col
umns will be
shown and calcu
lated in the
Analyze Exptected
Credit Loss
Allowances app.
New configuration Apps that deal ● Define Aging Finance Create and main J58 (Accounting
steps with impairment or tain settings that
Increments General Ledger and Financial
value adjustment can be used gener
● Assign Ledgers and Close)
ally for analyzing
Impairment Valuation exptected credit
Aging to
loss allowances.
Accounting
Principle
New configuration Document Split Define Document Finance Define additional J58 (Accounting
step ting Splitting CO-related charac
General Ledger and Financial
Characteristics for teristics for docu
Document Close)
Controlling ment splitting in
Splitting follow-up proc
esses. These char
acteristics are
then transferred to
the specified line
items if the ac
count to which the
postings are to be
made supports
those characteris
tics.
Renamed configu- Alternative Fiscal Create Ledger for Finance If you need differ- J58 (Accounting
ration step Year Variant Deviating Fiscal
General Settings ent fiscal year var and Financial
Year Variant has
Fiscal Year iants for group Close)
been renamed to
Create Ledger for close and local
Alternative Fiscal close due to legal
Year Variant reasons, you can
create an addi
tional parallel
(non-representa
tive) ledger that is
grouped together
with one of the
ledgers delivered
by SAP.
Effects on Configuration
Make your entries in Configure Your Solution, which is part of the Manage Your Solution app. In the Realize
phase, make changes to predelivered configuration settings or create new settings if needed. It may be
possible to create new settings by copying existing settings and adapting them. Note that to ensure data
consistency, the changes that you can make to predelivered configuration settings may be limited. In some, but
not all cases, you can delete new records that you have added.
For more information about the settings that are to be made in each configuration step, read the system
documentation. You access this documentation from within the configuration step using the Configuration Help
button.
Related Information
Changes to the Identity and Access Management (IAM) objects delivered for General Ledger Accounting
require you to recheck your business roles and the business catalogs assigned to them. Ensure that the
restrictions included in the business catalogs are set correctly to allow your users to use their business apps as
needed.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Use the Business Role Templates app to check the following business role templates or business catalogs and
their restriction types:
Note
You can also see which business catalogs have changed in the Business Catalogs app. Read the description
displayed for each business catalog in the system for more information about the authorizations controlled
by the catalog and its restriction types.
General Ledger business role template New business catalog The Purchase Order ● J58 (Accounting
Accountant added Accruals - Master Data
and Financial
(SAP_BR_GL_ACCOUN SAP_FIN_BC_POAC_M
Close)
TANT) DA_PC business cata
log was added to this ● 1GA (Accounting
business role template. and Financial
This business catalog Close - Group
contains the Display Ledger IFRS)
Purchase Order
● 2VB (Purchase Or
Accruals app.
der Accruals)
General Ledger business role template New business catalog The General Ledger - ● J58 (Accounting
Accountant added Journal Entry
and Financial
(SAP_BR_GL_ACCOUN Templates
Close)
TANT) SAP_FIN_BC_GL_JE_
TEMP_PC business cat ● 1GA (Accounting
alog was added to this and Financial
business role template. Close - Group
This business catalog Ledger IFRS)
contains the Manage
Journal Entry
Templates app.
General Ledger - business catalog App(s) renamed The following apps in ● J58 (Accounting
Reporting this business catalog
and Financial
(SAP_FIN_BC_GL_RE have new names:
Close)
PORTING_PC)
● Old app name:
● 1GA (Accounting
Display Cash
and Financial
Journal
Close - Group
New name: Cash
Ledger IFRS)
Journal
● Old app name:
Display Financial
Statement
New name:
Balance Sheet/
Income Statement
● Old app name:
Financial
Statement - Grid-
Based
New name:
Balance Sheet/
Income Statement
- Multidimensional
General Ledger - business catalog Restriction types The following restric ● J58 (Accounting
Reporting changed
tion type was added to and Financial
(SAP_FIN_BC_GL_RE
this business catalog: Close)
PORTING_PC)
● Responsible Cost ● 1GA (Accounting
● Authorization
Groups for
Product
(BEGRU_MAT)
● Authorization
Groups for
Product Group
(BEGRU_MATKL)
● Authorization
Groups for
Product Type
(BEGRU_MTART)
General Ledger - business catalog App(s) renamed The following apps in ● J58 (Accounting
Closing this business catalog
and Financial
(SAP_FIN_BC_GL_CL have new names:
Close)
OSING_PC)
● Old app name:
● 1GA (Accounting
Batch Input
and Financial
Folders in My Area
Close - Group
New Name: Batch
Ledger IFRS)
Input Sessions in
My Area
● Old app name: My
Batch Input
Folders
New Name: My
Batch Input
Sessions
General Ledger - Verify business catalog App(s) renamed The following apps in ● J58 (Accounting
Journal Entries this business catalog
and Financial
(SAP_FIN_BC_GL_PA have new names:
Close)
RKDCPST_PC)
● Old app name:
● 1GA (Accounting
Batch Input
and Financial
Folders in My Area
Close - Group
New Name: Batch
Ledger IFRS)
Input Sessions in
My Area
● Old app name: My
Batch Input
Folders
New Name: My
Batch Input
Sessions
General Ledger - Verify business catalog New restriction type(s) The following restric ● J58 (Accounting
Journal Entries tion types were added
and Financial
(SAP_FIN_BC_GL_PA to this business cata
Close)
RKDCPST_PC) log:
● 1GA (Accounting
● Profit Center
and Financial
(PRCTR)
Close - Group
● Responsible Cost
Ledger IFRS)
Center
(PS_FKSTL)
● Project Type
(PS_PRART)
● Number of the
responsible
person (project
manager)
(PS_VERNR)
General Ledger - Tax business catalog App(s) renamed The following apps in ● J58 (Accounting
Declaration this business catalog
and Financial
(SAP_FIN_BC_GL_TX have new names:
Close)
_DCL_PC)
● Old app name:
● 1GA (Accounting
Batch Input
and Financial
Folders in My Area
Close - Group
New Name: Batch
Ledger IFRS)
Input Sessions in
My Area
● Old app name: My
Batch Input
Folders
New Name: My
Batch Input
Sessions
General Ledger - Tax business catalog Restriction type(s) re The Segment for ● J58 (Accounting
Declaration moved Segmental Reporting/
and Financial
(SAP_FIN_BC_GL_TX Record Type
Close)
_DCL_PC) (SEGMENT_GLRRCTY
restriction type was re ● 1GA (Accounting
moved from this cata and Financial
log. Close - Group
Ledger IFRS)
Advanced Financial business catalog App added The Change Log - 2V8 (Advanced Finan
Closing - cial Closing)
Financial Closing app
Administration
was added to this busi
(SAP_FIN_BC_FCCO_
ADMIN_PC) ness catalog.
Advanced Financial business catalog App added The Change Log - 2V8 (Advanced Finan
Closing - Processing cial Closing)
Financial Closing app
(SAP_FIN_BC_FCCO_
was added to this busi
PROCESS_PC)
ness catalog.
General Ledger - business catalog App added The Display Document ● J58 (Accounting
Analytics
Flow app was added to and Financial
(SAP_FIN_BC_GL_AN
this business catalog. Close)
ALYTICS_PC)
● 1GA (Accounting
and Financial
Close - Group
Ledger IFRS)
General Ledger - business catalog Restriction type(s) The following restric ● J58 (Accounting
Analytics
changed tion types were added and Financial
(SAP_FIN_BC_GL_AN
to this business cata Close)
ALYTICS_PC)
log: ● 1GA (Accounting
● Asset Class/
Company Code
(ANLKL_BUKRS)
● Sales Document
Type (AUART)
● Order Category/
Maintenance
Planning Plant
(AUFART_IWERK
)
● Order Category
(AUTYP)
● Authorization
Groups for Posting
in Adjustment
Periods
(BEGRU_BKPF_BU
P )
● Authorization
Groups for
Product Group
(BEGRU_MATKL)
● Authorization
Groups for
Product Type
(BEGRU_MTART )
● Purchasing
Document Type
(BSART )
● Company Code
(BUKRS )
● Company Code/
House Bank/
Payment Method
(BUKRS_HBKID_H
KTID_PAYMETH)
● Valuation Area
(BWKEY )
● Purchasing Group
(EKGRP)
● Purchasing
Organization
(EKORG )
● Cost Center/Cost
Element
(KOSTL_KSTAR)
● MRP Controller
(PP_MRP_CTRLR
)
● Controlling Area/
Responsible Cost
Center
(PS_FKOKR_FKST
L )
● Internal Orders
(RESPAREA_IO_A
UFART_AUTH_KST
AR)
● Sales Area
(SALES_AREA )
General Ledger - business catalog App added The Manage Team ● J58 (Accounting
Process Control Responsibilities -
and Financial
(SAP_FIN_BC_GL_CO General Journal Entries
Close)
NTROL_PC) Verification was added
to this business cata ● 1GA (Accounting
log. and Financial
Close - Group
Ledger IFRS)
General Ledger - business catalog New restriction type(s) The Restriction Type ● J58 (Accounting
Process Control for RSM
and Financial
(SAP_FIN_BC_GL_CO (IAM_RT_RSM_TEAM)
Close)
NTROL_PC) restriction type was
added to this business ● 1GA (Accounting
catalog. and Financial
Close - Group
Ledger IFRS)
Accruals Management business catalog New restriction type(s) The following restric ● J58 (Accounting
- Reporting tion types were added
and Financial
(SAP_FIN_BC_ACCR_ to this business cata
Close)
REP_PC) log:
● 1GA (Accounting
● Purchasing
and Financial
Document Type
Close - Group
(BSART)
Ledger IFRS)
● Purchasing Group
● 2VB (Purchase Or
(EKGRP)
der Accruals)
● Purchasing
Organization
(EKORG)
General Settings - business catalog New restriction type(s) The Currency ● J58 (Accounting
Currencies Exchange Rate
and Financial
(SAP_FIN_BC_CA_CU (KURST_FCURR_TCUR
Close)
RR_PC) R) restriction type was
added to this business ● 1GA (Accounting
catalog. and Financial
Close - Group
Ledger IFRS)
External Audit - Tax business catalog New restriction type(s) The following restric ● J58 (Accounting
Audit tion types were added
and Financial
(SAP_FIN_BC_GL_AU to this business cata
Close)
DIT_PC ) log:
● 1GA (Accounting
● Company Code/
and Financial
Return Type for
Close - Group
Authorities
Ledger IFRS)
(BUKRS_DCLTYP
)
● Company Code/
Ledger/Record
Type/Version
(BUKRS_GLRLDNR
_GLRRCTY_GLRVE
RS )
● Company Code/
Costing Variant
(BUKRS_KLVAR )
● Company Code/
Cost Center
(BUKRS_KOSTL )
● Company Code/
Profit Center /
Cost Element
(BUKRS_PRCTR_K
STAR )
● Company Code/
Plant
(BUKRS_WERKS )
General Ledger - business catalog Restriction type(s) The following restric ● J58 (Accounting
Journal Entry changed
tion types were added and Financial
Processing
to this business cata Close)
(SAP_FIN_BC_GL_JE
_PROC_PC) log: ● 1GA (Accounting
OLICY_BUKRS)
● Chart of Accounts
(KTOPL)
● Company Code
(BUKRS)
● Account Type
(KOART)
● Cost Center/Cost
Element
(KOSTL_KSTAR )
● Segment for
Segmental
Reporting/Record
Type
(SEGMENT_GLRRC
TY )
General Ledger - business catalog New restriction type(s) The following restric ● J58 (Accounting
Master Data tion types were added
and Financial
Maintenance to this business cata
Close)
(SAP_FIN_BC_GL_MD log:
_MAINT_PC) ● 1GA (Accounting
● Sales Document
and Financial
Type (AUART)
Close - Group
● Profit Center
Ledger IFRS)
(PRCTR)
● Sales Area
(SALES_AREA)
General Ledger - business catalog New restriction type(s) The following restric ● J58 (Accounting
Submit Journal Entries tion types were added
and Financial
for Verification to this business cata
Close)
(SAP_FIN_BC_GL_PA log:
RKDCPRE_PC) ● 1GA (Accounting
● Financial
and Financial
Management Area
Close - Group
(FM_FIKRS)
Ledger IFRS)
● Profit Center
(PRCTR)
● Responsible Cost
Center
(PS_FKSTL)
● Project Type
(PS_PRART)
● Number of the
responsible
person (project
manager)
(PS_VERNR)
Finance - Accounting business catalog Restriction type(s) re The following restric ● J58 (Accounting
Document Display moved
tion types were re and Financial
(SAP_FIN_BC_DSPL_
moved from this busi Close)
ACDOC_PC )
ness catalog: ● 1GA (Accounting
Journal Entries
(BEGRU_BKPF_BE
D )
● Authorization
Group for
Supplier-Related
Journal Entries
(BEGRU_BKPF_BE
K)
● Company Code
(BUKRS )
● Segment for
Segmental
Reporting/Record
Type
(SEGMENT_GLRRC
TY )
General Ledger business catalog Restriction type(s) re The following restric ● J58 (Accounting
Accounting - Planning moved
tion types were re and Financial
(SAP_FIN_BC_GL_PL
moved from this busi Close)
N_PC)
ness catalog: ● 1GA (Accounting
ERARCHY )
● Profit Center
Hierarchies
(PROFITCENTER_
HIERARCHY)
Current Settings business group Default apps changed The Manage Team ● J58 (Accounting
Responsibilities -
and Financial
General Journal Entries
Close)
Verification app is dis
played by default as ● 1GA (Accounting
part of this business and Financial
group on the Fiori Close - Group
launchpad for the Ledger IFRS)
General Ledger
Accountant
(SAP_BR_GL_ACCOUN
TANT) business role
template. The Define
Responsibilities app
was moved from this
business group to the
App Finder.
Analytics for General business group Access to app changed Access to the Display ● J58 (Accounting
Ledger Journal Entries - in T-
and Financial
Account View app in
Close)
the default version of
this business group ● 1GA (Accounting
was changed from a and Financial
tile to a link. Close - Group
Ledger IFRS)
Related Information
In the Edit Options for Journal Entries app, the Payment Reference as Search Criterion option is now available.
Selecting this option allows you to search for line items to be cleared that have a payment reference (KIDNO). In
the Clear Incoming Payments and Post Incoming Payments app, you can then search for items with payment
reference.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
This app enables you to define a journal entry template for postings based on your needs, which means you
can select fields and values in a template for specific posting use. Then the template can be used in the Post
General Journal Entries app. After you create a journal entry template, you can also choose to share it publicly
and the access level. The templates can help save time when you enter journal entries.
Type New
With accruals management in financial accounting, you can have data automatically converted from purchase
order items into accruals, and then you can calculate, check, and post the accruals. As of SAP S/4HANA Cloud
1905, some changes in accruals management have been made to help you accelerate financial closing and
reduce finance cost and effort. Here are some key new features:
● Learn from decisions taken in the past and apply learned knowledge to the new business situation
● Predict whether proposed purchase order accruals can be accepted for posting
● Automatically review the purchase order accruals according to the confidence level
● Display comprehensive information of purchase order accruals
Related Information
This feature enables you to use the machine learning service provided by SAP for recommending reliable
accruals in the Review Purchase Order Accruals - For Cost Accountant app. After you enable the machine
learning service for this app, the system can suggest purchase order accruals that are reliable for mass review.
You can also define the threshold for determining reliable accruals in a configuration step.
Type New
Scope Item 2VB (Purchase Order Accruals), 3NF (Machine Learning for
Accruals Management)
Additional Details
The machine learning service aims to learn from decisions taken in the past and historical business data, to
apply the learned knowledge to the new business situation, and to recommend reliable accruals. To use the
intelligent accruals management, you must activate scope items 2VB (Purchase Order Accruals) and 3NF
(Machine Learning for Accruals Management). Then, you can have the following features available from the SAP
Fiori launchpad:
To enable the system to return reasonable results, a model must be trained based on sufficient data on a
regular basis. You can start using the machine learning service only after you have been using the manual
review process for purchase order accruals for several fiscal periods. SAP recommends that the minimum
amount of data for training contains 10,000 purchase order items in fiscal periods within two years.
To train the model and enable system to predict, you can use the following scheduling job templates in the
Schedule Accruals Jobs app:
● Accruals Prediction Model on Historical Data Use historical data to train the model.
● Infer Accruals from Prediction Model Predict whether accrual amounts should be adjusted. Before running
this scheduling job, you need proposed accrual amounts by running the Accrual Engine for POs – Propose
Period Amounts job first.
By default, the threshold of confidence level is defined as 50%. Accruals with confidence level equal to or
higher than 50% are identified as reliable accruals. You can adjust the threshold so that the machine learning
service can suggest reliable accruals that you have defined. To do so, you go to the Manage Your solution app
under Configure your Solution, and search for the Define Machine Learning Reliability Threshold configuration
step.
The following screenshot shows the confidence level of purchase order accruals, which is a feature of intelligent
accruals management (image is available in English only). The confidence level doesn't show by default in the
app, but you can display it by selecting the field in Settings.
Related Information
This feature enables you to have a comprehensive overview of purchase order accruals. In the Display Purchase
Order Accruals app, you can view all key information about purchase order accruals from being transferred to
being posted at the end of periods. The accruals information includes accrual lifecycle status, accrual amounts,
review history, and so on.
Type New
The following screenshots show an overview of accruals that are transferred from purchase orders (image is
available in English only):
The universal allocation features, which enable you to allocate and distribute overhead, have been enhanced. It
is now possible to use actual data as well as plan data for all of your allocation types. In addition, allocation is
now supported for profit centers as well as cost centers.
Type Changed
Features
You can benefit from the following new features for allocations:
● In addition to allocations for plan data, you can now perform allocations for actual data
● In addition to allocations for cost centers, you can now perform allocations for profit centers
Related Information
This feature enables you to allocate and distribute overhead for profit centers. Overhead amounts and
quantities can be allocated or distributed from one or more profit centers to other profit centers.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
You can now use the familiar allocation functions not only for cost centers but also for profit centers.
To work with this new feature, open the Manage Allocations app. In the Allocation Context field, select Profit
Center.
The new feature has been added to the initial screen of the Manage Allocations app and looks like this (image is
available in English only):
To allow your users to use these functions, assign the Profit Center Accounting - General Posting
Activities (SAP_FIN_BC_OH_GPA_PCA_PC) business catalog to the roles that you have based on the Divisional
Accountant (SAP_BR_DIVISION_ACCOUNTANT) business role template. For more information, see IAM Objects
in Cost Management and Profitability Analysis [page 47]
This feature enables you to allocate and distribute overhead using actual data.
Type New
Additional Details
You can now use the familiar allocation functions not only for plan data but also for actual data.
To work with this new feature, open the Manage Allocations app. In the Actual/Plan field, select Actual.
The new feature has been added to the initial screen of the Manage Allocations app and looks like this (image is
available in English only):
This feature enables you to perform allocations for actual data, allocate between profit centers, and download a
template to use when importing CSV files.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Related Information
Manage Allocations
This feature enables you to select a journal entry type when you perform a live run for an actual cycle.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item
Related Information
Run Allocations
With this release, the External Sales and Use Tax Solution features new fields in the outbound communication
services and additional tools to help you create and manage custom fields in your tax reporting.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
Additionally, you can use the new Map Extensibility Fields app to map custom fields to the external tax
interface. You create these custom fields using Custom Fields and Logic. Mapping the custom fields in your
SAP system and in the system of your tax partner ensures that the data in these fields are included in your tax
maintenance and calculation.
You can use this app to configure G/L account assignments in the quality system. In the quality system, you
can verify and view all data that has been transported from the quality system. You cannot make changes in
your production system. New processes and transaction keys in the financial accounting area have been newly
added.
Technical Details
Type New
Available As Of
Example
SAP S/4HANA Cloud 1905
Additional Details
See the following new processes and transaction keys with descriptions:
This app enables you to authorize processors who are required to verify submitted G/L journal entries. The app
is dedicated for the use of verifying general journal entries.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
Before SAP S/4 HANA 1905, the Manage Teams and Responsibilities app is used for defining group of users not
only for verifying G/L journal entries, also for other purposes.
If you have configured in the Manage Teams and Responsibilities app and specified the Type field with FGLVG,
the data about teams is also automatically available in the Manage Teams and Responsibilities - General Journal
Entry Verification app. You don't need to copy data from the old app to the new one.
Related Information
The Define Responsibilities app is no longer supported and will be removed from the system as of SAP S/
4HANA Cloud 1911. It is no longer available by default on the SAP Fiori launchpad. If you need this app, you can
find it in the App Finder until it is deprecated.
We recommend that you switch to the new successor app as soon as possible. For more information about the
successor app, see the related links below.
For more information about the deprecated app and its replacement, see the table below:
Type Changed
IAM Changes (Roles or Catalogs) The business template role for Define Responsibilities:
SAP_BR_BUSINESS_PROCESS_SPEC
Required Actions
To use the successor app, choose the Manage Teams and Responsibilities - General Journal Entry Verification
app from the SAP Fiori Launchpad. No additional action is required.
Related Information
CDS (Core Data Services) views have now been enabled and released for SAP Business Warehouse/4HANA
extraction.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
Related Information
CDS Views
CDS Views for Finance
Extracting CDS Views to SAP BW/4HANA
If you use the Reconcile GR/IR Accounts app to clarify and resolve issues for purchase order items with goods
receipts and invoice receipts where amounts and quantities do not match, you can now copy and adapt
situation templates to automatically inform a user about specific purchase order items that need processing or
to automatically make a user aware of a specific action, as for example to write off delivery costs, that should
be performed.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 2V7 (Monitoring of Goods and Invoice Receipts), 2ZS (Ma
chine Learning for Monitoring of Goods and Invoice Re
ceipts)
Additional Details
You can use situation handling to bring important issues to the users' attention. Users are directed to situations
and provided with contextual information and actions, all in one place.
The reconciliation scenario for goods receipts (GR) and invoice receipts (IR), for example, deals with purchase
orders which have differences in quantities and amounts between the posted deliveries and invoices. When
amounts and quantities in goods receipts and invoice receipts match, the system can automatically clear the
GR/IR accounts. As, latest at period end, differences need to be resolved, business users, such as G/L
accountants, can work with the Reconcile GR/IR Accounts app to clarify and resolve any discrepancies for such
kind of purchase orders. The situation handling framework enables you to prepare proactively for changing
situations and manage their effect on purchase orders with not matching amounts or quantities in goods
receipts and invoice receipts. You copy standard situation templates for different scenarios and adapt them, so
that custom notifications are displayed based on the criteria that suit your needs. The notifications can be
displayed directly after logging on to the app, and the notifications can also be displayed directly on the
launchpad, for example, if a requisitioner logs on to it. Situation handling helps make sure that the correct
action is taken to resolve different situations as quickly as possible.
With the delivered situation template FIN_GRIRPROCESSORCHANGED you can inform a processor that he or
she has been entered as processor for a certain purchasing document item that needs to be clarified.
To copy a standard situation template, you must have a user with the same authorizations as the Configuration
Expert - Business Process Configuration (SAP_BR_BPC_EXPERT) business role template. You perform the
following steps to copy the standard template for the GR/IR reconciliation scenario and adapt it to your needs:
1. Log on to the SAP Fiori launchpad and open the Manage Situation Type app.
2. Search for the FIN_GRIRPROCESSORCHANGED template.
3. Select the template and then choose the Copy button to copy the template to a new situation type.
4. In the new situation type, define the settings according to your needs and save and enable the situation
type.
Related Information
The following CDS views are now available for the fiscal year:
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
With this feature you can display all documents that are part of a business transaction.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
In release SAP S/4HANA Cloud 1902, new self-service configuration steps (SSCUIs) for Asset Accounting were
added to the Configure Your Solution app. With this release, you could only display Asset Accounting using the
SSCUIs delivered for the standard Cloud configuration.
As of release SAP S/4HANA Cloud 1905, you can also make your own settings for Asset Accounting.
Type Changed
Additional Details
All configuration steps (SSCUIs) are optional. This means that you can use the standard Cloud configuration
delivered without making your own settings. However if you wish, you can use the following SSCUIs to make
your own settings.
All the configuration steps listed below can be found in the Configure Solution app, under Finance Asset
Accounting Configure Asset Accounting .
Configuration step
Define Account Determination You can define the key and the descrip All scope items of Asset Accounting
tion for your own account determina (see list above)
tion in Asset Accounting. The account
determination links an asset master re
cord with the G/L accounts being
posted to.
Assign General Ledger Accounts For Asset Accounting transactions, you All scope items of Asset Accounting
can specify which accounts in General (see list above)
Ledger Accounting should be posted to
(asset balance accounts, clearing ac
counts, or offsetting accounts, etc.).
Define Asset Class You can define your own asset classes All scope items of Asset Accounting
for Asset Accounting. (see list above)
Specify Valuation Views for Asset Class You can specify the default values for All scope items of Asset Accounting
the asset class for each accounting (see list above)
principle and valuation view.
Specify Amounts You can specify your own maximum All scope items of Asset Accounting
amounts for low-value assets (LVA). (see list above)
None.
Additional Information
The following new fields are now available in the asset master data:
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
Field "Location"
A location first has to be configured before it can be added to a fixed asset. To do this, use the corresponding
configuration step (SSCUI) from logistics.
● Create Asset
● Display Asset
● Change Asset
Note
Note that the standard depreciation keys provided cannot be changed. Consequently, it may not be
possible to use this new function in each accounting principle in some circumstances.
None.
Effects on Configuration
None.
Additional Information
For more information, see the field help for the Location field and the Asset Shutdown indicator.
The job template Year-End Closing Asset Accounting is being replaced with release SAP S/4HANA Cloud 1905.
Technical Details
Type Deleted
Additional Details
The job template Year-End Closing Asset Accounting is being replaced as follows:
Previous app/
From the Schedule Asset Accounting SAP S/4HANA Cloud 1905 App Perform/Undo Year-End Closing
Jobs app:
None.
Additional Information
For more information, see the following What's-New information: Perform/Undo Year-End Closing [page 103].
The app Undo Year-End Closing has been renamed to Perform/Undo Year-End Closing and has been enhanced
accordingly:
You can now use the app to close a fiscal year at ledger level or depreciation area level.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
The function for closing the fiscal year replaces the job template Year-End Closing for Asset Accounting.
None.
Effects on Configuration
None.
Additional Information
For more information about the app Perform/Undo Year-End Closing, see the configuration help. You can call
this in the app using the Configuration Help button.
For the replaced job template Year-End Closing for Asset Accounting, see the What's-New Information
Replacement of Job Template "Year-End Closing Asset Accounting” [page 102].
For compatibility reasons, there are currently still some classic reports (reporting apps) available in the role of
Accountant. Over the next few releases, these classic reports will be gradually removed from the role. These will
be replaced by reporting apps with a standardized user interface and a standardized reporting technology.
Due to the restructuring of configuration tables in release SAP S/4HANA 1902 cloud and other new functional
features in Asset Accounting, the behavior of classic reports may be different in some circumstances. However,
this does not affect the key figures displayed.
Type Changed
Additional Details
The existing master data and transaction data are now displayed differently in the new analytical apps than in
the classic reports.
Effects on Configuration
None.
The following feature is now available in the Asset Transactions app and the Depreciation Lists app: When
navigating away from these apps, for example jumping to another app, and returning to the same app, you
For example, let’s say you had set filter criteria to define data to display in a table, then navigated away from the
app. When you navigate back into the app, you return to find the same table with the same filter criteria and the
same data displayed.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Related Information
Asset Transactions
Depreciation Lists
In the Asset Balances app and the Asset History Sheet app, the Journal Entry dimension is now available. When
displaying a report for posted values, you can now display a list of asset transactions with the corresponding
journal entries for each asset.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Related Information
Asset Balances
Asset History Sheet
In the prior release, selections were maintained using the Define Selections self-service configuration UI
(SSCUI). Starting from the 1905 release, you can define selections using the Define Selections Fiori app with
enhanced functionalities and more user-friendly interfaces. All selections you defined in prior releases have
been migrated to this app during your system upgrade. The SSCUI is therefore deprecated.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
A selection groups a range of consolidation master data, typically the financial statement (FS) items, by using
various filter criteria. You can use value ranges, attributes, or hierarchy nodes for individual master data to
define selections.
The defined selections can then be reused in consolidation-related settings, such as validation rules,
reclassification methods, currency translation (CT) methods, and breakdown categories. The app also provides
the feature to check the where-used list for each selection.
Selections
Define Selections
The Import Consolidation Master Data app is introduced for you to import consolidation-related master data
entries for master data type Consolidation Group Structure and Consolidation Unit into the consolidation
system.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
With this new app, you can download a template file or a file with existing master data, enter or change the
master data, and upload the completed file back to the app. You can then import the validated master data into
the database.
To import other master data types, such as Account Number, Chart of Accounts, Cost Center, Financial
Statement Item, Functional Area, Profit Center, Segment for Segmental Reporting, and Transaction Type, you
should continue using the Import Master Data for Consolidation Fields app.
Note
The consolidation group structure import functionality is only available for customers with the New Group
Reporting Logic activated in the Check Global System Settings SSCUI. This logic is activated by default for
customers with an initial release SAP S/4HANA Cloud 1902 or higher. The import functionality for all other
master data types is applicable to all customers.
You can maintain hierarchies for the relevant master data types so that you can customize your report layout or
use the hierarchies in the selection definition and the rule definition. The following additional master data types
are now enabled::
Technical Details
Type Changed
Related Information
Define Hierarchies
The job scheduling app now supports more tasks than in the prior release, where only the data validation tasks
were supported. The app is therefore renamed from Schedule Validation Jobs to Schedule Jobs for
Consolidation Tasks.
Type Changed
Additional Details
You can schedule an immediate job or recurring jobs for the following tasks, which are also available in Data
Monitor or Consolidation Monitor:
● Balance carryforward
● Calculation of net income
● Currency translation
● Preparation for consolidation group changes
● Reclassification
● Validation of universal journals
● Validation of reported data
● Validation of standardized data
● Validation of consolidated data
Related Information
With this release, the Task Logs app is enhanced in the following aspects:
● Log items are grouped into log IDs, each of which represents a user action.
● More information is displayed on the log list page, including consolidation unit/group, task name, and task
status.
● Last Log is made available as a filter criterion, which enables you to display only the logs for the most
recently executed tasks.
Type Changed
Additional Details
Related Information
Task Logs
With this release changes were made in the data monitor and consolidation monitor to streamline the
consolidation process and offer more functionalities.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
Related Information
Changes to the Identity and Access Management (IAM) objects delivered for Group Reporting require you to
recheck your business roles and the business catalogs assigned to them. Ensure that the correct business
catalogs are assigned to the roles that you have and that the restrictions included in the business catalogs are
set correctly to allow your users to use their business apps as needed. Inform your end users of changes to the
business group on the SAP Fiori launchpad.
Technical Details
Type Changed
The following changes were made to the default business groups shown on the SAP Fiori launchpad for the
Consolidation Specialist (SAP_BR_CONSLDTN_SPECIALIST) business role template.
Consolidation Master Data and An app was moved from the The Define Selections app was moved
Consolidation Settings Consolidation Settings business group because the defined selections now can
to Consolidation Master Data be used across the Group Reporting
area and act more like master data.
Consolidation Master Data App added The Import Consolidation Master Data
app was added to provide additional
functions for importing master data.
The app Import Master Data for
Consolidation Fields was moved to the
App Finder.
Consolidation Master Data Apps that are duplicated by the follow The following apps were removed:
ing apps were removed:
● Where-Used List of Consolidation
● Consolidation Units - Display Groups and Units
● Consolidation Groups - Display ● Consolidation Groups List
● Consolidation Group Hierarchy - ● Display Master Data of
Display Consolidation Units
Consolidation Settings Multiple job scheduling apps merged The following apps were merged into
the Schedule Jobs for Consolidation
Tasks app:
Consolidation Master Data App added The Display Hierarchy Upload Jobs app
was added to provide detailed logs
about the hierarchy upload jobs that are
triggered when users upload a spread
sheet that exceeds 250 KB in the
Manage Global Accounting Hierarchies
app.
The following changes were made to business catalogs that are delivered for the Consolidation Specialist
(SAP_BR_CONSLDTN_SPECIALIST) business role template.
Use the Business Role Templates app to check the following business catalogs and their restrictions:
You can also see which business catalogs have changed in the Business Catalogs app. Read the description
displayed for each business catalog in the system for more information about the authorizations controlled
by the catalog and its restrictions.
Consolidation - Data Preparation Restriction type changed The obsolete restriction type
Controlling Area/Responsible Cost
(SAP_FIN_BC_CCON_PRDTPRE_PC),
Center (PS_FKOKR_FKSTL) was re
Consolidation - Process
placed by Responsible Cost Center
(SAP_FIN_BC_CCON_PROCESS_PC), (PS_FKSTL).
and Consolidation - Group Reporting
Data Collection
(SAP_FIN_BC_CCON_GRDC_PC)
Consolidation - Local Reports Restriction type removed The restriction type Reporting in
(SAP_FIN_BC_CCON_LC_REPORT_PC) Consolidation
(DIMEN_CONGR_BUNIT_RVERS) was re
moved.
Consolidation - Master Data Restriction type removed The following restriction types were re
Organizational Unit Management
moved:
(SAP_FIN_BC_CCON_MDORG_PC)
● Chart of Accounts (KTOPL)
● Assigning FS item Mappings to
Version and Period
(ITCLG_KTOPL )
Consolidation - Master Data Apps added The following new apps were added to
Organizational Unit Management
provide additional functions:
(SAP_FIN_BC_CCON_MDORG_PC)
● Import Consolidation Master Data
● Display Hierarchy Upload Jobs
Consolidation - Master Data Apps removed The following redundant apps were re
Organizational Unit Management moved:
(SAP_FIN_BC_CCON_MDORG_PC)
● Where-Used List of Consolidation
Groups and Units
● Consolidation Groups List
● Display Master Data of
Consolidation Units
Related Information
With this release, new configuration steps for making settings related to Revenue and Cost Accounting have
been added to Configure Your Solution in the Manage Your Solution app. In addition, changes have been made
to some previously delivered configuration items or configuration steps.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
New/changed
Configuration configuration What you can Solution Capa
Type of change for ... object How to find it do Solution Area bility
New configura- Revenue and Service Cost Finance Make settings Accounting and Revenue and
tion item Cost Account Management Revenue and for managing Financial Close Cost Account
ing Cost service costs ing
Accounting
New SSCUI Revenue and Assign G/L Ac Finance Assign a differ- Accounting and Revenue and
Cost Account counts to Ex Revenue and ent G/L ac Financial Close Cost Account
ing pense Product Cost count to an in ing
Accounting dividual mate
Service Cost rial group or a
Management expense prod
uct
New SSCUI Revenue and Assign Activity Finance Assign a differ- Accounting and Revenue and
Cost Account Type to Service Revenue and ent activity type Financial Close Cost Account
ing Product Cost to an individual ing
Accounting material group
Service Cost or service prod
Management uct
Effects on Configuration
Make your entries in Configure Your SolutionAssign a different G/L account to an individual material group or,
which is part of the Manage Your Solution app. In the Realize phase, make changes to predelivered
configuration settings or create new settings if needed. It may be possible to create new settings by copying
existing settings and adapting them. Note that to ensure data consistency, the changes that you can make to
predelivered configuration settings may be limited. In some, but not all cases, you can delete new records that
you have added.
For more information about the settings that are to be made in each configuration step, read the system
documentation. You access this documentation from within the configuration step using the Configuration Help
button.
Related Information
You can use this application to search for revenue contracts first, which are then used to start most of the
management tasks related to revenue contracts and performance obligations. Select the revenue contract to
then see an overview of the whole contract and the list of performance obligations. You can also display details
of the performance obligations if required.
Technical Details
Type New
(Revenue Accounting)
Related Information
This new Fiori application ‘Revenue Schedule’ provides you with an overview of the revenue recognition and
fulfillment progress status.
You can use this application to search for revenue contracts first. Select one of the revenue contracts to then
see an overview of the whole contract. You will also be able to see how the revenue is scheduled, recognized
revenue, posted revenue and open revenue in accounting periods, broken down by performance obligation.
Technical Details
Type New
(Revenue Accounting)
Related Information
You can now schedule the following application jobs with multiple accounting principles:
● Transfer Revenue
● Calculate Contract Liabilities and Contract Assets
● Start Revenue Posting Run
● Reverse Revenue Postings
● Repost Revenue Postings
Technical Details
Type New
You can use the new deferral methods Recognition in First Period (F) or Recognition in Last Period (L) to
calculate the fulfillment of time-based performance obligations (POBs).
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
Time-Based Fulfillment
This app shows the changes made to closing tasks, task lists, templates. You can see what was changed, by
whom, and when. You can filter by Type of Change (Delete, Insert, or Change). And you can filter for changes
made to a particular template, task list, or closing task or by a particular user.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
In the Process Closing Tasks app, you can now start a test run for closing tasks of the type Job. The test run
feature is only available for tasks with the Test Run Possible: Yes attribute. The result of the test run enables you
to check whether your closing task can be successfully performed. The log of the test run helps you to identify
and solve any errors that may have occurred.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
To start the test run immediately, expand the Schedule action of the task and choose Execute Test Run.
In the Details page of the task, under Status Change, you can see the status for each test run. To see the
corresponding result object, such as application log or job log, choose one of the test runs. In the pop-over, you
can see all available logs.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
● Optional Reporting
Tax authorities in some countries allow you to submit your compliance reports at different reporting levels.
In advanced compliance reporting, you can now achieve this by configuring optional organizational units
for your report category.
For example, in Philippines, you submit your VAT returns at the state level (decentralized reporting).
However, if required, you can centralize your operations, and submit VAT returns at the country level. To
achieve this scenario in advanced compliance reporting, both company code and business place are
assigned as organizational units to the report category. The business place is set as optional organizational
unit, so that you can create reports at both company code and business place level (for decentralized
reporting), or at the company code level (for centralized reporting).
● Query Sequencing
While creating a document using query, you select a query from the list of queries available in the system.
After you select the query, you choose the columns to be displayed in the document. You can now change
the order of the selected columns. The columns will appear in the set order in the mapping screen and in
the generated document.
With this release, new configuration steps for making settings related to advanced compliance reporting have
been added to Configure Your Solution in the Manage Your Solution app. In addition, changes have been made
to some previously delivered configuration items or configuration steps.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
New/changed
Configuration configuration ob Leading scope
Type of change for ... ject How to find it What you can do item
Configuration step Advanced Compli Setting Up Your Find this configu- Make the connec IJ2 (Advance Com
ration under tion between the
moved to a differ- ance Reporting Compliance Re pliance Reporting)
Finance reporting entities
ent configuration ports
Statutory for which you
item should submit
Reporting Basic
compliance re
Settings ports and the re
port definitions,
categories, and ac
tivities relevant to
the compliance re
porting scenario
Make your entries in Configure Your Solution, which is part of the Manage Your Solution app. In the Realize
phase, make changes to predelivered configuration settings or create new settings if needed. It may be
possible to create new settings by copying existing settings and adapting them. Note that to ensure data
consistency, the changes that you can make to predelivered configuration settings may be limited. In some, but
not all cases, you can delete new records that you have added.
For more information about the settings that are to be made in each configuration step, read the system
documentation. You access this documentation from within the configuration step using the Configuration Help
button.
Related Information
With this release, new configuration steps (SSCUIs) for making settings related to Cash and Liquidity
Management have been added to Configure Your Solution in the Manage Your Solution app. In addition, changes
have been made to some previously delivered configuration items or configuration steps.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
New/changed
Configuration configuration ob Leading scope
Type of change for ... ject How to find it What you can do item
New feature in Cash operations Define Account Find this configu- Define the clearing J59 (Accounts Re
SSCUI Determination ration under accounts for out ceivable), J60 (Ac
Operations .
New feature in Cash operations Define Clearing Find this configu- Define the clearing J78 (Advanced
SSCUI Accts for Receiving ration under accounts for in Cash Operations)
Bank for Acct. Finance Cash coming bank
Transfer and Liquidity transfers. You can
now delete entries
Management
created in this
Cash
SSCUI.
Operations .
Effects on Configuration
Make your entries in Configure Your Solution, which is part of the Manage Your Solution app. In the Realize
phase, make changes to predelivered configuration settings or create new settings if needed. It may be
possible to create new settings by copying existing settings and adapting them. Note that to ensure data
consistency, the changes that you can make to predelivered configuration settings may be limited. In some, but
not all cases, you can delete new records that you have added.
For more information about the settings that are to be made in each configuration step, read the system
documentation. You access this documentation from within the configuration step using the Configuration Help
button.
Related Information
Changes to the Identity and Access Management (IAM) objects delivered for Cash and Liquidity Management
require you to recheck your business roles and the business catalogs assigned to them. Ensure that the
restrictions included in the business catalogs are set correctly to allow your users to use their business apps as
needed.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Use the Business Role Templates app to check the following business role templates or business catalogs and
their restriction types:
Note
You can also see which business catalogs have changed in the Business Catalogs app. Read the description
displayed for each business catalog in the system for more information about the authorizations controlled
by the catalog and its restriction types.
Cash Management - business catalog Some apps were The following apps BFB (Basic Cash Oper
Cash Operations Basic added. were added to this ations)
(SAP_FIN_BC_CM_OP business catalog:
S_BASIC_PC)
● Connector
Monitor
● Transfer BIC Data
● Bank Account
Balance
Basic Cash Operations business group Some apps were The following apps BFB (Basic Cash Oper
added. were added to this ations)
business group:
● Connector
Monitor
● Transfer BIC Data
● Bank Account
Balance
Cash Management - business catalog Some apps were The following apps J78 (Basic Cash Oper
Cash Operations added. were added to this ations)
(SAP_FIN_BC_CM_CA business catalog:
SH_OPS_PC)
● Bank Account
Balance
● Adjust Assigned
Liquidity Items
Cash Operations business group Some apps were The following apps J78 (Basic Cash Oper
added. were added to this ations)
business group:
● Bank Account
Balance
● Adjust Assigned
Liquidity Items
Cash Management - business catalog Business catalog re This business catalog BFA (Basic Bank Ac
Configuration moved from the basic is no longer visible to
count Management)
(SAP_FIN_BC_CM_CO scope. customers who are us
NF_PC) ing the basic cash J78 (Basic Cash Oper
management capabil ations)
ity as it is not relevant
to the basic capability.
F_CLM_BAM restriction type The restriction type The restriction type BFA (Basic Bank Ac
was replaced. F_CLM_BAM has been count Management)
replaced by FCLM_BAM
J77 (Advanced Bank
in the following busi
Account Management)
ness catalogs:
● Cash
Management -
Bank Accounts
Management
Basic
(SAP_FIN_BC_CM
_BAM_BASIC_PC)
● Cash
Management -
Bank Accounts
Management
(SAP_FIN_BC_CM
_BAM_PC)
Related Information
With this feature you can upload files with bank directories, compare them with existing bank data, and save
the new and changed data in the bank master table using a global bank directory.
Technical Details
Type New
If you use the dual control mode to manage bank accounts, you can now configure a situation type to inform a
specific group of users about when bank account revisions are pending activation for a certain number of days.
Technical Details
Type New
Effects on Configuration
To use this feature, configure the settings that are described in Using Situation Handling in the Dual Control
Mode.
You can now use the Bank Statement Monitor - Intraday app to monitor the overall import status of intraday
bank statements on a specified date and examine the import details for each appointment time slot based on
the bank statement date and time.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
● The distinction between accounts that have a recurring schedule for intraday bank statements and the
accounts that receive intraday bank statements only when transactions occur is not longer considered.
Instead, a monitoring rule is required for all bank accounts that are set to be monitored for intraday bank
statements.
Consequently, if you have opted to monitor a bank account, you must assign at least one monitoring rule to
the bank account either at bank level or at bank account level. For more information about how to assign
the monitoring rules to bank accounts, see Configuration Settings.
● A new Alert Setting dialog box has been added to the (Me Area).
You set the alert setting to define when unfulfilled appointments are shown in red instead of orange. In this
field, specify the number of consecutive unfulfilled appointments to trigger an alert status. You can enter a
positive integer that ranges from 1 to 1440.
● The definition and meaning of the overall import status has been changed. The status Error has been
changed to Alert. The table below explains the changes:
Success The number of imported intraday On the chart, all appointments before
bank statements has reached the ex the current system time are marked in
pected number. green.
Warning This status is only valid for bank ac On the chart, at least one appoint
counts whose intraday bank state ment before the current system time
ments are sent only when transac is marked in orange but none of them
tions occur. is marked in red.
Error (1902) The number of imported intraday On the chart, at least one appoint
bank statements is different from the ment before the current system time
Alert (1905)
expected number. is marked in red. Whether appoint
ments are marked in red depends on
your alert setting.
Effects on Configuration
As now the import status is evaluated by the bank statement date and time, it is important to ensure the time
zone setting of your monitoring rules. Please review your monitoring rules to make sure you set the right time
zone for the rules as per the time zone of the banks or bank accounts the rules are assigned to. Otherwise, the
system may fail to make a right judgement whether intraday bank statements are imported in time due to
incorrect time zone settings.
Related Information
In addition to the Import Bank Services Billing Files app that enables you to manually import bank services
billing files, you can now automatically import the files using SAP Multi-Bank Connectivity.
Type Changed
Additional Details
You can view the automatically imported bank services billing files in the Connector Monitor app and analyze
the bank fee data using the Monitor Bank Fees app.
For more information on SAP Multi-Bank Connectivity, visit https://help.sap.com and search for SAP Multi-
Bank Connectivity.
With the new service provider bank, you can now define cash pools that are operated by banks in the Manage
Cash Pools app. Now for a multi-level cash pool hierarchy, you can assign only cash pools of this type as child
cash pools.
Technical Details
Type Changed
For cash pools whose service provider is bank, you must define the Pool Usage as Both Directions.
You cannot perform cash concentration for cash pools of this type using the Manage Cash Concentration app,
as they are operated by banks.
Related Information
You can now perform cash concentration for multi-level cash pools. In addition to the system proposed transfer
amount, you can also view simulation details in child cash pools to understand how balances are calculated in a
multi-level cash pool.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
For information about how to define a multi-level cash pool, see Defining Cash Pool Hierarchies.
For information about how to perform cash concentration and the logic of cash concentration simulation, see
Performing Cash Concentration.
With this app, you can adjust liquidity items, which indicates the source and use of cash flows in your
company, by leveraging machine learning capabilities. You can compare the actual liquidity items that are
assigned and the predicted liquidity items that are automatically proposed by the predictive models. By
accepting the system proposal, the assigned liquidity items are then adjusted and replaced by the proposed
liquidity items.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
With this app, you can now have a quick visual overview of the bank account balance for a selected period of
time. It illustrates the bank account balance by available balance, which is the amount of opening balance, cash
flows, overdue cash flows and overdraft limits in display currency and bank account currency for bank
accounts. You can also customize your analysis with several filtering options in chart or table views.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
This feature enables you to connect your Treasury and Risk Management component in an SAP S/4HANA
Cloud system to your central Financial Accounting component in an SAP S/4HANA system. Treasury and Risk
Management manages the financial transactions and generates postings in SAP S/4HANA Cloud and then
transfers the postings to the Financial Accounting component in an SAP S/4HANA system. The accounting
documents are transferred from SAP S/4HANA Cloud to SAP S/4HANA using IDocs.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Effects on Configuration
To set up the Treasury Workstation - Accounting Integration, you first have to configure the necessary cross-
system company codes used to identify company codes on each system in a distributed environment. Make
See Also
For more information about Treasury Workstation Integration to Accounting in SAP S/4HANA, see http://
help.sap.com/s4_ce_trm under Integration Scenarios.
This feature enables you to manage issued bonds as well as investments in bonds. The process covers master
data management, trading, and processing of security transactions (including the placement and redemption
of issued bonds), as well as paying and posting in Financial Accounting. In addition, various functions for
managing security positions and for period-end closing are available. Treasury Reporting provides you with a
range of apps for analyzing your debts and investments in bonds.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
● The new product type 04A Bonds is available. You use this product type when you create security classes
for your bonds.
Bonds with fixed or variable interest as well as zero-coupon bonds are supported.
● A specific securities account type for the issuance of bonds is available: Consequently, you must create
securities accounts with this type to enable the bond issuance process.
● The bonds are embedded in the general securities process.
Effects on Configuration
Predefined content is delivered with the scope items mentioned. In addition, some new configuration steps
that are available in the Configure Your Solution app are especially relevant for bond management:
See Also
For more information about the Bond Management process, see the product assistance at http://
help.sap.com/s4hana_ce_1905.500 under Finance Treasury Management Treasury and Risk
Management Debt and Investment Management Securities Bonds .
Note
You can also reach the product assistance of Treasury and Risk Management using the new quick link
http://help.sap.com/s4_ce_trm to jump straight to the latest version in SAP S/4HANA Cloud.
With this app, you analyze the changes of important Treasury position values such as the book value or the
amortized acquisition value over one or multiple periods at a glance. You can compare the position values of a
valuation area at the different dates on a high aggregation level or break down the position values into
dimensions like company codes, currencies, valuation classes, and account assignment references. The
breakdown on a more detailed level provides you more insight about the reconciliation between the Treasury
subledger and the general ledger. The app calculates the position values, such as the book value, in the display
currency and shows them in a chart view and a table view. The chart view provides you with different chart
types, such as Bar Chart and Column Chart. You can use predefined views or change the displayed measures
and dimensions. For a further analysis, you can navigate to the Display Treasury Position Values app.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 1WV (Debt and Investment Management), 1X1 (Foreign Cur
rency Risk Management)
Additional Details
The app shows the calculated position values in a chart view and a table view. You can switch between the
different view types using the following buttons:
● Standard
This view displays the Book Value in DC of the selected positions, for all relevant dates.
● Book Value By Components
The book value is a composite position component, which is calculated from different original position
components. This view shows the values of the position components contributing to the book value of the
analyzed Treasury positions for all relevant dates.
● Amortized Costs By Components
The amortized costs is a composite position component, which is calculated from different original
position components. This view shows the values of the position components contributing to the
amortized costs of the selected Treasury positions at all relevant dates.
● Amortized Acquisition Value By Components
The amortized acquisition value is a composite position component, which is calculated from different
original position components. This view shows the values of the position components contributing to the
amortized acquisition value of the analyzed Treasury positions for all relevant dates.
Note
You can manually change the displayed position values (measures), and the characteristics (dimensions)
by which you want to aggregate the values.
● View By
Using this button, you can choose more characteristics to split the calculated values accordingly.
Examples:
○ Accounting Code
○ Product Type
● Using the Settings button, you can choose extra characteristics of the positions (of type Dimension)
from the list and also more position values in display currency (of type Measure).
● Using Toggle Legend Visibility, you can display or hide the legend, which explains the displayed
position values.
The app is assigned to the business catalog TRM - Position Management (SAP_FIN_BC_TRM_POS_MGT_PC),
which is assigned to the Treasury Accountant and Treasury Specialist - Back Office roles. Users with these roles
find the app on the SAP Fiori Launchpad in the Treasury Reporting group.
See Also
For more information about the Treasury Position History app, see the product assistance on http://
help.sap.com/s4hana_ce_1905.500 under Finance Treasury Management Treasury and Risk
Management Debt and Investment Management / Foreign Exchange Risk Management Treasury Reporting
Treasury Positions .
Note
You can also reach the product assistance of Treasury and Risk Management using the new quick link
http://help.sap.com/s4_ce_trm to jump straight to the latest version in SAP S/4HANA Cloud.
Related Information
This feature enables you to overwrite target quotas that you have previously defined in your hedging area using
the Hedge Management Cockpit app. You can overwrite target quotas for a specific hedging area per target
quota type and on the level of the differentiation criteria.
Type New
Additional Details
The validity of the target quotas that were overwritten is infinite, starting with the system date and the
snapshot that were used. The target quotas that were overwritten can be reset by taking a new snapshot using
the Take Snapshot app.
The Hedge Management Cockpit app has been enhanced with the new button Overwrite Target Quota. When
you choose this button, a dropdown menu opens from which you can then select One Entry or Multiple Entries.
The Take Snapshot app has been enhanced with the Reset Target Quota indicator.
See Also
For more information about overwriting target quotas, see http://help.sap.com/s4_ce_trm under Hedge
Management.
With this feature, you get new hedging scenarios that enable you to perform hedge accounting for cash flow
hedges according to U.S. GAAP. You can apply the automated designation process for these scenarios, which
automatically designates hedging instruments into a hedging relationship when the financial transaction is
saved. The classification and reclassification process of designated hedging relationships as well as the
dedesignation process are supported.
Type New
Scope Item Hedge Accounting for FX Forward - Local GAAP (3X1), Hedge
Accounting for FX Option - Local GAAP (3X2), Hedge Ac
counting for FX Forward - Group Ledger US GAAP (3X3),
Hedge Accounting for FX Option - Group Ledger US GAAP
(3X4)
Additional Details
The following new hedging scenarios are available for exposures arising from planned forecasts to which new
hedge accounting calculation rules are assigned:
● 942 CFH: FX Risk with Spot, Fwd + Fwd Points Amort. (U.S. GAAP) with hedge accounting rule 642 Des.
Comp.: Spot / Non-Des. Comp.: Fwd + Fwd Points Amort. using FX forwards as hedging instruments
With the hedge accounting rule 642 Des. Comp.: Spot / Non-Des. Comp.: Fwd + Fwd Points Amort., the
following occurs:
○ A change in the amount of the actual value of the spot component (NPV_SPOT) is posted to the
hedging reserve.
○ A change in the amount of the actual value of the forward component (NPV_FORWARD) and the
amortization amount of the element ELEM_FORWARD are used to calculate the cost of hedging reserve.
Example:
With a cash flow hedge, you hedge the risk of fluctuations in a cash flow of the type Planned Forecast.
Effects on Configuration
Predefined content is delivered with the scope items mentioned. In addition, a new configuration step is
available for hedge accounting:
● The new configuration step Define Hedge Accounting Calculation Types has been added to Configure Your
Solution in the Manage Your Solution app under Finance Treasury and Risk Management Hedge
Management and Hedge Accounting . You can define your own hedge accounting calculation types or
change the settings of existing hedge accounting calculation types. After you have defined your new hedge
accounting calculation types, you must assign them to the relevant hedging profiles in the configuration
step Define Hedging Profiles.
For more information about the hedge accounting calculation type, see the product assistance at http://
help.sap.com/s4_ce_trm under Foreign Exchange Risk Management Hedge Management Hedge
Management and Accounting of Net Open Exposures Hedge Acccounting for Exposure Items Release
Traded Cur From Financial Calculate With Undiscounted Consider Sign Simple According to
rency Transaction out CVA/DVA of Nominals Evaluation
Type
● For U.S. GAAP accounting, you can use the US0 Valuation Area - US GAAP for accounting principle USAP or
003 Valuation Area - US GAAP (Group Ledger) for accounting principle USGP.
● The following new hedging profiles are available:
Description Spot, Fwd., Amort., w/o 1st Intrinsic,Time, Amort., w/o Collar; Intri.,Time,Amort.,w/
Day Result 1st Day Res. o1stDayRes.
Hedging Relationship 942 CFH: FX-Risk with Spot, 943 CFH: FX Risk with 943 CFH: FX Risk with
Scenario Fwd + Fwd Points Amort. Intrinsic, Time + Premium Intrinsic, Time + Premium
Amort. Amort.
Prospective Effectiveness SLR Linear Regression SLR Linear Regression SLR Linear Regression
Test Method (P-HA)
Hedge Accounting S000 FX Forward: Spot/ S000 FX Forward: Spot/ S000 FX Forward: Spot/
Calculation Type Forward; FX Option: Forward; FX Option: Forward; FX Option:
Intrinsic/Time Intrinsic/Time Intrinsic/Time
Skip Designation of FX x x x
Transaction
Documentation Optional x x x
To use the new scenarios, you must set up hedging classifications and then assign them to the relevant hedging
areas. Using the Define Hedging Profiles configuration step under Configure Your Solution in the Manage Your
Solution app under Finance Treasury and Risk Management Hedge Management and Hedge
Accounting , you can change the settings of predefined hedging profiles to suit your needs.
For more information about the settings relevant for Hedge Accounting for Exposure Items, see the product
assistance at http://help.sap.com/s4hana_ce_1905.500 under Finance Treasury Management Treasury
and Risk Management Hedge Management and Accounting Hedge Management Hedge Management and
Accounting of Net Open Exposures (FX Risks) Hedge Accounting for Exposure Items Settings for Hedge
Accounting for Exposure Items .
See Also
For more information about the Hedge Accounting for Exposure Items process, see the product assistance at
http://help.sap.com/s4hana_ce_1905.500 under Finance Treasury Management Treasury and Risk
Management Foreign Exchange Risk Management Hedge Management Hedge Management and
Accounting of Net Open Exposures (FX Risks) Hedge Accounting for Exposure Items .
Note
You can also reach the product assistance of Treasury and Risk Management using the new quick link
http://help.sap.com/s4_ce_trm to jump straight to the latest version in SAP S/4HANA Cloud.
Related Information
With this feature, the dedesignation process of the Hedge Accounting for Exposure Items process is enhanced.
It is now possible to designate the underlying FX spot/forward transaction of an FX option used as hedging
instrument with the full nominal amount into the existing hedging relationship.
Type Changed
Additional Details
You execute an FX option using the Process FX Options - Collective Processing app. Depending on several
conditions, the underlying FX transaction will be designated into a new hedging relationship, an existing
hedging relationship, or not designated at all.
No hedging classification Hedging classification that is relevant to The FX transaction is designated into a
hedge accounting new hedging relationship.
During the FX option exercise process, you must enter the hedging classification of the FX option on the
Administration tab of the underlying spot transaction.
Note
If the hedging classification is not filled, the FX spot/forward is not designated into the hedging
relationship.
To finalize the process, you must release the business transactions using the Release Hedging Business
Transactions app. The system calculates the hedge accounting key figures at the exercise date and assigns a
With the dedesignation transfer, the position component values are transferred from the exercised FX option.
With the designation transfer, the position component values are transferred to the underlying FX spot/forward
transaction. The following update types are used for these transfers:
Effects on Configuration
You must assign a hedging profile (relevant for FX forwards) in the Profile Underlying field within the hedging
profile of the existing hedging relationship (in the Define Hedging Profiles configuration step). The assigned
hedging profile is required in order to find the hedge accounting rule for the spot transaction.
See also
For more information about the exercise of an FX option used as a hedging instrument, see the product
assistance of Treasury and Risk Management on http://help.sap.com/s4hana_ce_1905.500 under Finance
Treasury Management Treasury and Risk Management Foreign Exchange Risk Management Hedge
Management Hedge Management and Accounting of Net Open Exposures Hedge Acccounting for Exposure
Items Contract Close Exercise of FX Option .
Note
You can also reach the product assistance of Treasury and Risk Management using the new quick link
http://help.sap.com/s4_ce_trm to jump straight to the latest version in SAP S/4HANA Cloud.
Related Information
With this feature, several CDS (Core Data Services) views have been released. The views make it possible to
read system data, configuration data, master data, and transactional data relevant for financial transactions/
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 1WV (Debt and Investment Management), 1X1 (Foreign Cur
rency Risk Management)
Additional Details
For more information about the CDS views available, see the product assistance at http://help.sap.com/
s4hana_ce_1905.500 under Generic Information The Virtual Data Model in SAP S/4HANA Cloud CDS
Views CDS Views for Finance CDS Views for Treasury Management CDS Views for Treasury and Risk
Management .
With this release, new configuration steps for making settings related to Treasury and Risk Management have
been added to Configure Your Solution in the Manage Your Solution app. In addition, changes have been made
to some previously delivered configuration items or configuration steps.
Technical Details
Type Changed
New/
changed
Type of Configura configura How to find What you Leading Solution Solution Ca
change tion for ... tion object it can do scope item Area pability
New Treasury Ac Assign Up Find this con Define which IWV (Debt Treasury Debt and In
counting date Types figuration un revenue flows and Invest Management vestment
for Accrual/ der you want to ment Man Management
Deferral Finance accrue/defer agement)
Risk crual/deferral
Management procedure
and method
Settings for
you want to
Update
use.
Types
New Integration Assign Plan Find this con To update IWV (Debt Treasury Debt and In
with Cash ning Levels figuration un Cash Man and Invest Management vestment
Management der agement, you ment Man Management
New Market Data Define Data Find this con Define data 1S4 (Auto Treasury Debt and In
feed Sources for figuration un sources that matic Market Management vestment
Datafeed der can be ac Rates Man Management
Market
Data
New Class data Define Ex Find this con Define the ex 3WY (Bond Treasury Debt and In
and market changes figuration un changes Manage Management vestment
data for der where you ment) Management
bonds Finance buy your se
New Class data for Define Sec Find this con Define addi 3WY (Bond Treasury Debt and In
bonds ondary In figuration un tional indexes Manage Management vestment
dexes der for securities ment) Management
New Automatically Define Tax Find this con Specify the 3WY (Bond Treasury Debt and In
generated tax Rates figuration un tax rates for Manage Management vestment
flows for in der various flows ment) Management
coming and Finance in the securi
outgoing in Treasury and ties area.
terest flows. Risk The system
Management uses the
Settings for amount in the
Update original flow
(or incoming
Types
flow) and the
tax rate that
has been de
fined here in
order to auto
matically
generate a
flow record
for the taxes
(outgoing
flow).
New Fields on the Define Values Find this con You can de 1WV (Debt Treasury Debt and In
Administratio for Assign figuration un fine values for and Invest Management vestment
n tab in finan- ment Field der the ment Man Management
cial transac Finance Assignment agement),
Financial Risk
tion data Treasury and field on the 1X1(Foreign
Management
Risk Administratio Currency
New Fields on the Define Values Find this con You can de 1WV (Debt Treasury Debt and In
Administratio for Charac figuration un fine values for and Invest Management vestment
n tab in finan- teristics Field der the ment Man Management
cial transac Finance Characteristic agement),
Financial Risk
tion data Treasury and s field on the 1X1(Foreign
Management
Risk Administratio Currency
New Fields on the Define Values Find this con You can de 1WV (Debt Treasury Debt and In
Administratio for Internal figuration un fine values for and Invest Management vestment
n tab in finan- Reference der the Reference ment Man Management
cial transac Field Finance field on the agement),
Financial Risk
tion data Treasury and Administratio 1X1(Foreign
Management
Risk n tab in finan- Currency
New Calculation of Define Hedge Find this con You can de 3X1 (Hedge Treasury Financial Risk
hedge ac
Accounting figuration un fine your own Accounting Management Management
counting key
Calculation der hedge ac for FX For
figure
Type Finance counting cal ward - Local
Moved to an Net present Define and Find this con 1WV (Debt Treasury Debt and In
other config- value calcula Set Up Evalu figuration un and Invest Management vestment
uration item tion ation Types der ment Man Management
Finance agement),
Financial Risk
Treasury and 1X1 (Foreign
Management
Risk Currency
Moved to an Risk Manage Define Port Find this con 1WV (Debt Treasury Debt and In
figuration un
other config- ment folio Hierar and Invest Management vestment
der
uration item chies ment Man Management
Finance
agement),
Treasury and Financial Risk
1X1 (Foreign
Risk Management
Management Currency
Risk Manage
Risk
Managemen ment)
Moved to an Hedge Ac Define Hedg Find this con 3X1 (Hedge Treasury Financial Risk
figuration un
other config- counting for ing Classifi- Accounting Management Management
der
uration item Exposure cations for FX For
Finance
Items ward - Local
Treasury and
GAAP), 3X2
Risk
Management (Hedge Ac
counting for
Hedge
Management FX Option -
and Hedge Local GAAP),
Accounting 3X3 (Hedge
Accounting
for FX For
ward - Group
Ledger US
GAAP), 3X4
(Hedge Ac
counting for
FX Option -
Group Ledger
US GAAP),
2RW (Hedge
Accounting
for FX Option
- Group
Ledger IFRS),
2UF (Hedge
Accounting
for FX Swap -
Group Ledger
IFRS), 1XD
(Hedge Ac
counting for
FX Forward -
Group Ledger
IFRS)
Moved to an Hedge Ac Define Hedg Find this con 3X1 (Hedge Treasury Financial Risk
figuration un
other config- counting for ing Profiles Accounting Management Management
der
uration item Exposure for FX For
Finance
Items ward - Local
Treasury and
GAAP), 3X2
Risk
Management (Hedge Ac
counting for
Hedge
Management FX Option -
and Hedge Local GAAP),
Accounting 3X3 (Hedge
Accounting
for FX For
ward - Group
Ledger US
GAAP), 3X4
(Hedge Ac
counting for
FX Option -
Group Ledger
US GAAP),
2RW (Hedge
Accounting
for FX Option
- Group
Ledger IFRS),
2UF (Hedge
Accounting
for FX Swap -
Group Ledger
IFRS), 1XD
(Hedge Ac
counting for
FX Forward -
Group Ledger
IFRS)
Moved to an Market Data Define Refer Find this con 1XN (Market Treasury Debt and In
figuration un
other config- ence Interest Rates Man Management vestment
der
uration item Rates agement - Management
Finance
Manually via
Treasury and Financial Risk
Upload)
Risk Management
Management
Market
Data
Moved to an Correspond Define Busi Finance 1WV (Debt Treasury Debt and In
other config- ence ness Partner Treasury and and Invest Management vestment
uration item Group Risk ment Man Management
Management
agement),
Financial Risk
1X1 (Foreign
Corresponde Management
Currency
nce Risk Manage
ment)
Moved to an Correspond Assign Attrib 1WV (Debt Treasury Debt and In
other config- ence utes for Busi and Invest Management vestment
uration item ness Partner ment Man Management
Group agement),
Financial Risk
1X1 (Foreign
Management
Currency
Risk Manage
ment)
Removed This configu- Define Yield This configu- The yield 1XN (Market Treasury Debt and In
ration step Curve Types ration step curve type Rates Man Management vestment
has been re was available 0001 is still agement - Management
moved due to under predefined in Manually via
Financial Risk
technical rea Finance your system. Upload)
Management
sons. Treasury and 1WV (Debt
Risk and Invest
Management ment Man
General agement),
1X1 (Foreign
Settings
Currency
Risk Manage
ment)
Effects on Configuration
Make your entries in Configure Your Solution, which is part of the Manage Your Solution app. In the Realize
phase, make changes to predelivered configuration settings or create new settings if needed. It may be
possible to create new settings by copying existing settings and adapting them. Note that to ensure data
consistency, the changes that you can make to predelivered configuration settings may be limited. In some but
not all cases, you can delete new records that you have added.
For more information about the settings that need to be made in each configuration step, see the system
documentation. You access this documentation from within the configuration step by choosing the
Configuration Help button.
You now can delete your own entries in all configuration steps - with the exception of Define Hedge
Accounting Calculation Type. The deletion of predefined settings is not possible.
Related Information
Changes to the Identity and Access Management (IAM) objects delivered for Treasury and Risk Management
require you to recheck your business roles and the business catalogs assigned to them. Ensure that the correct
business catalogs are assigned to the roles that you have and that the restrictions included in the business
catalogs are set correctly to allow your users to use their business apps as needed. Inform your end users of
changes to the business group on the SAP Fiori launchpad.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Use the Business Role Templates app to check the following business role templates or business catalogs and
their restriction types:
Note
You can also see which business catalogs have changed in the Business Catalogs app. Read the description
displayed for each business catalog in the system for more information about the authorizations controlled
by the catalog and its restriction types.
TRM - Market Data - FX Overview business cata New Market Data The business cata ● 1WV (Debt and
(SAP_FIN_BC_MKTD_FXR_OVP_PC)
log Overview app as log is assigned to Investment
signed to this busi the Treasury Risk Management)
ness catalog Manager role. ● 1X1 (Foreign
Currency Risk
Management)
TRM - Position Management business cata New Treasury The business cata ● 1WV (Debt and
(SAP_FIN_BC_TRM_POS_MGT_PC)
log Position History app log is assigned to Investment
assigned to this the Treasury Management)
business catalog Accountant and ● 1X1 (Foreign
Treasury Specialist - Currency Risk
Back Office roles. Management)
Note
The new product type 04A Bonds is available, check whether you need to adapt restrictions made for the
restrictions types containing the product type:
Several apps will be deprecated with SAP S/4HANA Cloud 1908. We recommend that you switch to the
successor app as soon as possible. For more information about the deprecated apps and the successor apps,
please see the table below. They have been removed from the business catalog and are no longer visible on the
SAP Fiori launchpad. If you need the apps, you can find them in the App Finder until they are deleted.
Type Changed
Scope Item 1WV (Debt and Investment Management), 1X1 (Foreign Cur
rency Risk Management)
Treasury Position Analysis - Accounting Treasury Position Analysis 1WV (Debt and Investment Manage
View ment), 1X1 (Foreign Currency Risk Man
Note agement)
The app is available as a Web Dynpro
The Web Dynpro application type is
application and in a Design Studio ver
set as one of the defaults on the
sion. Both versions will be deprecated.
SAP Fiori Launchpad for this app.
However, it is also available in a De
Treasury Position Analysis - OTC Trans
sign Studio version that you can
actions add to your Launchpad using the
App Finder.
The app is available as a Web Dynpro
application and in a Design Studio ver
sion. Both versions will be deprecated.
Changes to the Identity and Access Management (IAM) objects delivered for Receivables Management require
you to recheck your business roles and the business catalogs assigned to them. Ensure that the restriction
types included in the business catalogs are set correctly to allow your users to use their business apps as
needed.
Technical Details
Type New/Changed
FI-GL
FIN-FSCM-COL
Use the Business Role Templates app to check the following business role templates or business catalogs and
their restriction types:
Note
You can also see which business catalogs have changed in the Business Catalogs app. Read the description
displayed for each business catalog in the system for more information about the authorizations controlled
by the catalog and its restriction types.
Accounts Receivable business role template New business catalog The Accounts Collections and
Accountant added Receivable - Mass Dispute
(SAP_BR_AR_ACCOUN Activities for Management (BFC)
TANT) Collections
Management
(SAP_FIN_BC_AR_CO
L_MASS_PC) business
catalog was added to
this business role tem
plate. This business
catalog contains the
Schedule Collections
Management Jobs app.
Accounts Receivable - business catalog New restriction type(s) The following restric Accounts
Clearing tion types were added: Receivable (J59)
(SAP_FIN_BC_AR_CL
● Order Category/
EARING_PC)
Plant
(AUFART_WERKS)
● Authorization
Groups for
Product
(BEGRU_MAT)
● Authorization
Groups for
Product Group
(BEGRU_MATKL)
● Authorization
Groups for
Product Type
(BEGRU_MTART)
● Purchasing
Document Type
(BSART)
● Purchasing Group
(EKGRP)
● Purchasing
Organization
(EKORG)
● Storage Location/
Plant
(LGORT_WERKS)
● MRP Controller
(PP_MRP_CTRLR)
● Profit Center
(PRCTR)
● Responsible Cost
Center
(PS_FKSTL)
● Project Type
(PS_PRART)
● Number of the
responsible
person (project
manager)
(PS_VERNR)
● Plant (WERKS)
Accounts Receivable - business catalog New restriction type(s) The Chart of Accounts Accounts
Collections Analytics (KTOPL) restriction Receivable (J59)
(SAP_FIN_BC_AR_CO type was added.
L_ANALY_PC)
Accounts Receivable - business catalog New restriction type(s) The following restric Accounts
Document Processing tion types were added: Receivable (J59)
(SAP_FIN_BC_AR_DO
● Order Status/
C_PROC_PC)
Order Type
(ASTNR_AUFAR)
● Customer Line
Items: Access to
additional data
(FIAR_CLIPA)
● Cost Center
(KOSTL)
● Responsible Cost
Center
(PS_FKSTL)
Accounts Receivable - business catalog New restriction type(s) The following restric Accounts
Incoming Payments tion types were added: Receivable (J59)
(SAP_FIN_BC_AR_IN
● Sales Document
C_PAYM_PC)
Type (AUART)
● Purchasing
Organization
(EKORG)
● Bank Account
Management
(FCLM_BAM)
● Profit Center
(PRCTR)
● Sales Area
(SALES_AREA)
Accounts Receivable – business catalog New restriction type(s) The following restric Accounts
Invoices tion types were added: Receivable (J59)
(SAP_FIN_BC_AR_IN
● Work Center
VOICES_PC)
(ARBPL_WERKS)
● Sales Document
Type (AUART)
● Authorization
Groups for
Product
(BEGRU_MAT)
● Authorization
Groups for
Product Group
(BEGRU_MATKL)
● Authorization
Groups for
Product Type
(BEGRU_MTART)
● Purchasing
Document Type
(BSART)
● Purchasing Group
(EKGRP)
● Purchasing
Organization
(EKORG)
● Bank Account
Management
(FCLM_BAM)
● Storage Location/
Plant
(LGORT_WERKS)
● MRP Controller
(PP_MRP_CTRLR)
● Profit Center
(PRCTR)
● Responsible Cost
Center
(PS_FKSTL)
● Project Type
(PS_PRART)
● Number of the
responsible
person (project
manager)
(PS_VERNR)
● Sales Area
(SALES_AREA)
● Plant (WERKS)
Accounts Receivable - business catalog New restriction type(s) The following restric Accounts
Outgoing Payments tion types were added: Receivable (J59)
(SAP_FIN_BC_AR_OU
● Work Center
T_PAYM_PC)
(ARBPL_WERKS)
● Authorization
Groups for
Business Partners
(BEGRU_BUPA_GR
P)
● Authorization
Groups for
Product
(BEGRU_MAT)
● Authorization
Groups for
Product Group
(BEGRU_MATKL)
● Authorization
Groups for
Product Type
(BEGRU_MTART)
● Purchasing
Document Type
(BSART)
● Purchasing Group
(EKGRP)
● Purchasing
Organization
(EKORG)
● Financial
Management Area
(FM_FIKRS)
● Customer Account
Group (KTOKD)
● Supplier Account
Group (KTOKK)
● Storage Location/
Plant
(LGORT_WERKS)
● Profit Center
(PRCTR)
● Responsible Cost
Center
(PS_FKSTL)
● Project Type
(PS_PRART)
● Number of the
responsible
person (project
manager)
(PS_VERNR)
● BP Role (RLTYP)
● Sales Area
(SALES_AREA)
● Plant (WERKS)
Accounts Receivable - business catalog New restriction type(s) The Bank Account Accounts
Periodic Activities Management Receivable (J59)
(SAP_FIN_BC_AR_PE (FCLM_BAM) restric
RIODIC_ACT_PC) tion type was added.
Accounts Payable and business catalog New restriction type(s) The following restric Accounts
Receivable – Payments tion types were added: Receivable (J59)
(SAP_FIN_BC_APAR_
● Sales Document
PAYM_PC)
Type (AUART)
● Purchasing
Organization
(EKORG)
● Bank Account
Management
(FCLM_BAM)
● Financial
Management Area
(FM_FIKRS)
● Profit Center
(PRCTR)
● Sales Area
(SALES_AREA)
Related Information
Type New
Additional Details
FI_AR_RP_RULES_DE data destruction ob New data destruction You can use this object Destroying Bank State
STRUCTION ject object added. to destroy bank state ment Reprocessing
ment reprocessing Rules Using
rules. FI_AR_RP_RULES_DE
STRUCTION
Related Information
Data Management
To be able to search for open items using the payment reference, in the Edit Options for Journal Entries app,
you need to select the Payment Reference as Selection Criterion field. This field has been added to the app.
The new field looks like this (image is available in English only):
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
Especially in Scandinavian countries, it is common practice to state a payment reference when you pay an
invoice. This payment reference appears on the payee's bank statement and makes it easy to identify the
invoices that have been paid.
When you create an invoice in the Create Outgoing Invoices app, you can enter the payment reference on the
Payment tab in the Payment Reference field.
Until now, you could search for open items by entering an invoice or journal entry number in the Payment
Reference field on the Payment Reference tab. Now you can also use the payment reference.
Related Information
Edit Options for Journal Entries: Payment Reference Option [page 75]
Create Outgoing Invoices
Post Incoming Payments
Clear Incoming Payments
With this app you can schedule mass changes to master data in SAP Collections Management. You can assign
collection specialists and collection profiles, and change collection segment data.
Technical Details
Type New
Use this Business Add-Inn (BAdI) to create your own basic rule BRCB000001 in Collections Management. The
basic rule is automatically assigned to the collection rule CRCB000001.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
The Administrator can configure this BAdI in the Custom Fields and Logic app on the Custom Logic tab. You can
find detailed information on the BAdI Documentation tab.
After that, the Accounts Receivables Manager can use the collection rule CRCB000001 - Cloud BAdI
Implementation in the Manage Collection Strategies app.
With the collection rule CR00000025 - Total of Due Items Until Month End, Evaluation on Day m-n, you can
collect receivables at the end of the month by causing a customer to appear in your worklist when a receivable
from that customer became due or is set to become due in the same month.
Type New
Additional Details
The Accounts Receivables Manager can use the collection rule CRCB000001 - Cloud BAdI Implementation in
the Manage Collection Strategies app. There, you can find detailed information in the documentation.
With this release, the configuration steps for SAP Credit Management in Configure Your Solution in the Manage
Your Solution app are reorganized into three new configuration groups. The previous group General Settings
has been replaced by the groups Integration, Master Data, and Process and Business Transactions. In addition,
options for a flexible credit check have been added to the configuration step Create Credit Segments.
Technical Details
Type New
New/changed configuration
Type of change object How to find it What you can do
Moved to new configuration 1. Deactivate SAP Credit Find this configuration under Make the settings for inte
group Finance Credit grating SAP Credit Manage
Management
Evaluation and Management ment with the sales and fi-
2. Assign Sales Area to nance processes.
Credit Segment Integration
Moved to new configuration 1. Create Credit Segments Find this configuration under Make the settings for the or
group Finance Credit ganizational structure and
2. Create Risk Classes
Evaluation and Management master data in SAP Credit
3. Define Customer Credit Management.
Group Master Data
Moved to new configuration 1. Define Checking Rules Find this configuration under Make the settings for the
group Finance Credit processes and business
2. Define Events and Fol
Evaluation and Management transactions in SAP Credit
low-On Processes Management.
3. Define Approval Process Process and Business
son" Attribute
5. Create Values for "Cate
gory" Attribute
New field in SSCUI Create Credit Segments Find this configuration under Flexible Credit Check
Finance Credit New field: Credit Check
Evaluation and Management
Master Data To navigate to this new field,
select a credit segment and
choose Details.
Effects on Configuration
Make your entries in Configure Your Solution, which is part of the Manage Your Solution app. In the Realize
phase, make changes to predelivered configuration settings or create new settings if needed. It may be
possible to create new settings by copying existing settings and adapting them. Note that to ensure data
consistency, the changes that you can make to predelivered configuration settings may be limited. In some, but
not all cases, you can delete new records that you have added.
For more information about the settings that are to be made in each configuration step, read the system
documentation. You access this documentation from within the configuration step using the Configuration Help
button.
Related Information
This feature enables you to extend the Manage Customer Line Items app.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
Technical Details
Type Changed
You can now deprecate bank statement reprocessing rules, which are no longer valid. You select the rule that
you want to deprecate and then choose Deprecate. Rules that you deprecate are no longer listed. You cannot
reverse this action. However, you can copy deprecated rules.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
You can now use your bank statement reprocessing rules to post open bank statement items to an AP or AR
account. To do so, you select the Post to AP/AR Account action type when you create your reprocessing rule.
Alternatively, you can use the new Analyze As action type for a specific condition and choose an interpretation
on the memo line.
Type New
Related Information
You can apply reprocessing rules to selected bank statement items. Now, you can allow these rules create
proposals and assign them to the bank statement items. In the Reprocess Bank Statement Items app, you can
check these proposals, confirm them, or change them.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Related Information
If you use the machine learning package in accounts receivable, you can run a set of reprocessing rules of even
all reprocessing rules. If you don't use the machine learning package, you can only run one reprocessing rule.
Technical Details
Type New
With these skills, you can quickly and easily display manual and electronic bank statement items as well as
open bank statement items. For example, you can use a command to show one or more bank statement items.
If you choose Open in App you can switch to the related app. You can type commands into the SAP CoPilot
window or use voice recognition.
Technical Details
Type New/Changed
As of SAP S/4HANA Cloud 1908, all customer statement correspondence documents that are created with the
Create Correspondence app will no longer contain Item Text comments for line items, unless these comments
start with an asterisk (*). Please note that the asterisk itself is not printed on the customer statement, only the
text that follows it. To define Item Text comments, you can use the app Manage Customer Line Items.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Related Information
Create Correspondence
Manage Customer Line Items
With this release, a new configuration step (SSCUI) for making settings related to Invoice Management have
been added to Configure Your Solution in the Manage Your Solution app.
Type Changed
Additional Details
New/changed
Configuration configuration ob Leading scope
Type of change for ... ject How to find it What you can do item
New SSCUI General payment Define Account Find this configu- Define the clearing J59 (Accounts Re
settings Determination ration under accounts for out ceivable), J60 (Ac
General
Payment
Settings .
Effects on Configuration
Make your entries in Configure Your Solution, which is part of the Manage Your Solution app. In the Realize
phase, make changes to predelivered configuration settings or create new settings if needed. It may be
possible to create new settings by copying existing settings and adapting them. Note that to ensure data
consistency, the changes that you can make to predelivered configuration settings may be limited. In some, but
not all cases, you can delete new records that you have added.
For more information about the settings that are to be made in each configuration step, read the system
documentation. You access this documentation from within the configuration step using the Configuration Help
button.
Related Information
This feature enables you to use enhanced functions in the Map Payment Format Data configuration step, which
is part of the Payment Medium Formats configuration item.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
● You can now import format mapping files created in transaction DMEE in the SAP backend systems.
● You can now release format mappings for productive use without the need for manual activation.
The user interface of the Map Payment Format Data app has been changed as follows:
● The Release button has been removed from the home screen of the app.
● On the editing screen for format mappings, the following changes have been added:
○ The Release button has been added, which allows activating and releasing the format mapping for
productive use.
○ The Activate button has been removed.
Note
You can still see the Active status for format mappings that have been activated in the previous releases. To
release such format mappings, use the Release button on the editing screen.
Related Information
This app enables you to create a file that includes information about all the checks that belong to a paying
company code. A new checkbox, SAP Multi-Bank Connectivity, has been added to the Output control section of
this app. This checkbox enables you to specify whether you want to send data via SAP Multi-Bank Connectivity.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
This new checkbox is to be used only in the United States and Canada.
For some payment medium formats pre-delivered by SAP, the electronic payment medium type has already
been specified. For these payment medium formats, whether you select the SAP Multi-Bank Connectivity
checkbox makes no difference. The data will always be sent via SAP Multi-Bank Connectivity.
This app enables you to schedule payment proposals or schedule payments directly and get an overview of the
proposal or payment status. MICR codes can now be added to checks printed from this app.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
MICR stands for Magnetic Ink Character Recognition. It is a character recognition system using special ink and
characters that can be magnetized and read automatically. MICR is used almost exclusively in the banking
industry where it is used to print details on checks to enable automatic processing.
To view the MICR codes for a check printed from the Manage Automatic Payments app, proceed as follows:
1. On the Payments Processed tab, find and select a payment for which check was used as the payment
method.
2. Choose the > icon in the Open column of the table. Alternatively, choose Open right above the table and
select Payment List from the context menu.
3. On the Payments tab, choose the link in the Payment Document column and select Display Related Check
Info from the context menu.
4. Choose the link in the Check Number column.
5. Choose the Display Document icon.
The MICR codes for the check are at the end of the document. They are, from left to right, check number,
house bank number, and external format account number.
MICR codes are added only to the checks that are printed using a form template adapted from the SAP-
delivered template or using the SAP-delivered template.
Refer to the SAP-delivered form template and adapt the template that you use for printing checks accordingly.
For more information, see Configuring the Output of Outgoing Checks.
Caution
Although it is possible for you to use the SAP-delivered form template for printing checks, SAP strongly
recommends against this approach. The reason is that if the template is updated with a new release of SAP
S/4HANA Cloud, the changes will be applied to the checks printed using this template without your
knowledge. To prevent this from happening, make a copy of the delivered template and always print from
the copy even if you do not want to adapt the delivered template.
Related Information
Changes to the Identity and Access Management (IAM) objects delivered for Invoice Management require you
to recheck your business roles and the business catalogs assigned to them. Ensure that the restrictions
included in the business catalogs are set correctly to allow your users to use their business apps as needed.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Use the Business Role Templates app to check the following business role templates or business catalogs and
their restriction types:
Note
You can also see which business catalogs have changed in the Business Catalogs app. Read the description
displayed for each business catalog in the system for more information about the authorizations controlled
by the catalog and its restriction types.
Accounts Payable - Business catalog An app was moved into The Delete Direct Debit ● BFB (Basic Cash
Payments this business catalog. Pre-notifications app Operations)
(SAP_FIN_BC_AP_PA was moved into this ● J60 (Accounts
Y_PROC_PC ) business catalog from Payable)
the Finance - Delete ● 19M (Direct Debit)
Personal Data ● 19O (Automated
(SAP_FIN_BC_DPP_D Dynamic Dis
EL_PC) business cata counts with SAP
log. You use this app to Ariba Discount
delete direct debit pre- Management)
notifications for SEPA ● 2MB (Integration
mandates. of Payment Ad
vice with Buyers
and Suppliers)
● 2F4 (Intercom
pany Process for
Customer Re
turns)
● 2ME (Central Pur
chase Contracts)
● 19W (Contingent
Workforce Invoice
Processing via
SAP Fieldglass)
● 2LH (Automated
Invoice Settle
ment)
● 2NX (Scheduling
Agreement for
Subcontracting
Procurement)
● BD3 (Sales Proc
essing using
Third-Party with
Shipping Notifica-
tion)
● BDN (Sales of
Non-Stock Item
with Order-Spe
cific Procure
ment)
● BMR (Scheduling
Agreements in
Procurement)
● J13 (Service and
Material Procure
ment - Project-
Based Services)
● J45 (Procurement
of Direct Materi
als)
● J62 (Asset Ac
counting)
● 1J7 (Data Protec
tion and Privacy)
Related Information
This feature enables you to extend the Manage Supplier Line Items app.
The Manage Supplier Line Items app is based on the Supplier Line Items data source. In the Data Source
Extensions section of the Custom Fields and Logic app, key users can add standard SAP fields from supplier
master data to this data source.
Technical Details
Type New
● Delete IBANs
You can use this template to delete IBANs that are no longer used.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Related Information
Delete IBANs
This new service enables you to read header and cost center related data of personnel settlement documents
that represent payments to an employee. It is based on the OData protocol and is intended for application
integration scenarios.
Type New
Additional Details
http://help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https://api.sap.com/
With this feature you can search for personnel settlement documents directly from the SAP Fiori Launchpad
with user-defined search criteria. The search also provides fuzzy search capabilities.
Technical Details
Type New
This feature enables you to display a key figure that shows you the amount of the accruals that have not been
reversed yet.
Technical Details
Type New
Effects on Configuration
To display the key figure in this field, you must have configured the condition contract type to use statuses with
accruals when setting up your system.
This new feature in the Manage Settlement Documents app enables you to filter settlement documents
according to the Supplier Total Gross Amount by Invoicing Party and the Supplier Total Gross Amount by
Supplier Company Code.
Type New
With this app you can schedule jobs to perform a mass release of personnel settlement management
documents to Financial Accounting.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
As a result of the scheduling job, the accounting status of the document is adjusted for each successfully
processed personnel settlement document and a journal entry is created (if needed). In case of errors,
corresponding error messages are stored in the spool and/or the application log.
With this app, you can get an overview over the total amount of commissions that were paid or deducted within
any given time period and filter the total amount by quarter and/or compensation reason.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
This integration enables you to get an overview over the total amount of commissions paid or deducted over a
specific time period, release personnel settlement documents to Financial Accounting manually, or schedule
jobs for mass releases.
Type New
Additional Details
As part of the integration scenario, Settlement Management receives data on employee commissions from
SAP Sales Cloud and generates personnel settlement documents that are released to accounting for
settlement. The posted personnel settlement information can be pulled by SAP SuccessFactors Employee
Central and is then transferred to Employee Central Payroll for payroll processing.
Effects on Configuration
This integration is based on two customer managed scenarios that need to be set up: one targeting SAP Sales
Cloud for commission data retrieval and the other providing read access to personnel settlement documents
for SAP SuccessFactors Employee Central.
Related Information
With this app, you can manage commissions more effectively by displaying and processing the employees
corresponding personnel settlement documents.
Type New
Additional Details
In this app, you can check the status of personnel settlement documents, edit them manually, analyze them,
block individual documents from further processing, or release them to Accounting.
Related Information
With this app you can schedule the import of commision data from SAP Commissions to create Personnel
Settlement Documents in S/4HANA.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
Personnel Settlement Documents can be enabled to go through a cloud workflow where a second eye principle
is applied. Usually a superior in the organizational hierarchy (Set up in responsibility management ) with
authority can approve or reject personnel settlement documents. This is an optional feature and can be
enabled by setting application status group and the appropriate default status while maintaining configuration
for Profile for Personnel Settlement Document Inbound.
Technical Details
Type New
With this app you can search for groups of personnel settlement documents and perform mass releases to
Financial Accounting.
Type New
Additional Details
You can use this app to find and release a group of personnel settlement documents manually that were
blocked from an automatic posting to accounting.
For the release of individual personnel settlement documents, please see Manage Personnel Settlement
Documents
Related Information
This features allows the configuration and control of the Workflow Approval Processing of Personnel
Settlement Documents feature. The flexible steps can be defined and then the workflow scenario can be
activated.
Technical Details
Type New
This feature enables you to configure how the system creates personnel settlement documents for sales
commissions from an external application.
Technical Details
Type New
Effects on Configuration
Related Information
You can use this app to assign another commodity code time-dependently to unclassified products.
As a new key feature, you can now add a remark during classification of a product.
Technical Details
Type Changed
You can use this app to assign another commodity code time-dependently to classified products.
As a new key feature, you can now add a remark during reclassification of a product.
Technical Details
Type Changed
You can use this app to classify products for legal control time-dependently, to define the control relevance of
products and to assign control classes and control groups to the products. You can find unclassified products
at a particular time for a legal regulation. Additionally, you can assign multiple products to a classification for
the legal control.
As a new key feature, you can now add a remark during classification of a product
Technical Details
Type Changed
You can use this app to assign another control class and/or control grouping to classified products, and decide
if these are relevant for control.
As a new key feature, you can now add a remark during reclassification of a product.
Type Changed
You can use this app to assign a customs tariff number time-dependently to unclassified products.
As a new key feature, you can now add a remark during classification of a product.
Technical Details
Type Changed
You can use this app to assign another customs tariff number time-dependently to classified products.
As a new key feature, you can now add a remark during reclassification of a product.
Type Changed
You can use this app to assign an Intrastat service code time-dependently to unclassified products.
As a new key feature, you can now add a remark during classification of a product.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Available In Italy
You can use this app to assign another Intrastat service code time-dependently to classified products.
As a new key feature, you can now add a remark during reclassification of a product.
Type Changed
Available In Italy
You can use this app to display products which have been classified with a code number, like commodity codes,
customs tariff numbers, legal control relevant attributes or intrastat service codes.
As a new key feature, you can now display classification remarks created during classification/reclassification
of a product.
Technical Details
Type Changed
You can display classification information for all active numbering schemes and legal regulations currently valid
for the selected product. You can call up this function via the Manage Product Master Data app.
Type New
3.7.1.2 Intrastat
3.7.1.2.1 Intrastat
Technical Details
Type New
Available In Portugal
● AT (Austria)
● BE (Belgium)
● DE (Germany)
● DK (Denmark)
● ES (Spain)
● FI (Finland)
● FR (France)
● GB (United Kingdom)
● HU (Hungary)
● IE (Ireland)
With this release, new configuration steps for making settings related to Predictive Accounting have been
added to Configure Your Solution in the Manage Your Solution app.
Technical Details
Type New
New/changed
Configuration configuration ob Leading scope
Type of change for ... ject How to find it What you can do item
New Configuration Predictive Ac ● Activate Find this configu- Make the settings 2FD
Steps counting ration under required for using
Predictive
Finance predictive ac
Accounting for
Predictive counting.
Sales
Processes Accounting
Ledgers and
● Check
Prediction Activation
Ledger
● Activate
Predictive
Accounting for
Sales Order
Item
Categories
Effects on Configuration
Make your entries in Configure Your Solution, which is part of the Manage Your Solution app. In the Realize
phase, make changes to predelivered configuration settings or create new settings if needed. It may be
possible to create new settings by copying existing settings and adapting them. Note that to ensure data
consistency, the changes that you can make to predelivered configuration settings may be limited. In some, but
not all cases, you can delete new records that you have added.
For more information about the settings that are to be made in each configuration step, read the system
documentation. You access this documentation from within the configuration step using the Configuration Help
button.
Related Information
You use this app to monitor and check for how many of the sales orders created in the system it was possible to
simulate all follow-on documents in predictive accounting. If it was possible to simulate all follow-on
documents in the system you have an accurate prediction of costs and revenues for your products. If the
system could not simulate the follow-on documents in predictive accounting you can check with this app where
in the simulation process the errors occurred and which sales orders are affected. You can correct the errors or
adapt the documents and then you can reprocess them for predictive accounting.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
You have activated the scope item 2FD. Scope item 2FD is non-standard and is not activated by default.
Use the Monitor Predictive Accounting - Predictive Quality app to monitor errors in predictive accounting. You
no longer need to use the Message Dashboard app.
Effects on Configuration
You have made the settings related to predictive accounting. You can make those settings in Configure Your
Solution in the Manage Your Solution app. Find this configuration under Finance Predictive Accounting
Ledgers and Activation .
Related Information
Predictive Accounting
New fields have been added to the following APIs on header and service node level:
Changes in Detail
● The TaxItemGroup field has been added to the DebtorItem, CreditorItem, and ProductTaxItem
nodes.
● The ServiceDocType, ServiceDocID, and ServiceDocItemID fields have been added to the
AccountAssignment block of the Item node.
● Extension fields are supported in the ProfitabilitySupplement block of the Item node.
● The SoldMaterial and SoldMaterialGroup fields have been added to the
ProfitabilitySupplement block of the Item node.
● The AccountingDocument field has been added to the JournalEntry node.
● The handling of postings has been enhanced as follows:
○ If the document line item number is lower than or equal to 999, the items are not compressed. The
details are stored in both the Entry View and Ledger View.
○ If the document line item number is higher than 999 and the items contain open items, cross-company
items, or tax items, the excluded items are compressed in the Entry View. This is done by deleting the
fields from the account assignment except for the function area. The details, however, are stored in the
Ledger View.
○ If the document line item number is higher than 999 and the items do not contain open items, cross-
company items, or tax items, the excluded items are stored in the Ledger View and are not
compressed.
○ If the document line item number is still higher than 999 after they have been compressed, the items
are not posted.
Type Changed
Additional Details
For more information, see the business documentation of the services on the SAP API Business Hub .
Use
This scope item enables integration of predictive accounting documents to SAP S/4HANA Group Reporting
and subsequent consolidation of these documents to produce actual/predictive comparisons.
Technical Details
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
Technical Details
Technical Name of Scope Item BEJ ( Inventory Valuation for Year-End Closing )
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
● Support processing of internal trade requests from subsidiaries to headquarters via SAP Cloud Platform
● Support Phone Trade via SAP Cloud Platform
● Support rejection of trade requests via Cloud Foundry
● Support splitting of trade requests via Cloud Foundry
Technical Details
Technical Name of Scope Item 2F5 ( Treasury Trading via Trading Platforms )
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
● Extend user fields that allows customers to create additional fields as part of the solution at the contract
header level, allowing for improved flexibility
Technical Details
Technical Name of Scope Item 2SA ( Lease-Out for Sublease Accounting - Group Ledger
IFRS )
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
Technical Details
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
This scope item describes the process for a standard sales process with a customer. The business process
covers order creation through the clearing of a customer account after the receipt of payment applicable for
the Canary Islands territory.
Technical Details
Technical Name of Scope Item 3SS ( General Indirect Tax in the Canary Islands )
Available In Spain
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
● Support the designation of underlying spot transaction into hedging relationship from the exercising of
Plain Vanilla FX option
Technical Details
Technical Name of Scope Item 2RW ( Hedge Accounting for FX Option - Group Ledger
IFRS )
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
● Extend user fields to allow customers to create additional fields as part of the solution at the contract
header level, allowing for improved flexibility
Technical Details
Technical Name of Scope Item 34O ( Lease-Out for Sublease Accounting - Group Ledger US
GAAP )
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
● Added the Closing Task Completion app. You can use this app to see the changes made to closing tasks,
task lists, and templates for the information of what was changed, by whom, and when.
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
● Digital Payment Merchant Accounts: Digital Payments supports now the processing of several accounts at
one Payment Service Provider (PSP). For example, in general, you need a separate PSP account for each
currency.
● SAP S/4HANA Merchant Accounts: SAP S/4HANA Financials supports several merchant accounts for
PSPs.
● Round-off of the capabilities for partners (Payment Service Providers) to integrate with SAP digital
payments.
Technical Details
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
● Magnetic Ink Character Recognition (MICR) codes for checks are supported
● Enhanced the Create Positive Pay Files app with the SAP Multi-Bank Connectivity checkbox (in the Output
control section). This checkbox enables you to specify whether you want to send data via SAP Multi-Bank
Connectivity.
● Retiring the ISO20022 classical payment format for Germany
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
This scope item enables users to periodically train the preconfigured predictive scenarios with their own
historical data to enable the model to reflect their particular business context and transaction /master data
history.
Technical Details
Technical Name of Scope Item 30K ( Predictive Analytics Model Training - Finance )
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
Technical Details
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
Technical Details
Technical Name of Scope Item 2DP ( Contract Accounting - Company Initiated Payments )
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
Technical Details
Technical Name of Scope Item 3M3 ( Event-Based Revenue Recognition - Service Docu
ments )
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
● You can extend user fields that allow customers to create additional fields as part of the solution at the
contract header level, allowing for improved flexibility
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
● Introduced a product classification factsheet (visible from the Material Master app)
● Enter a remark when classifying or reclassifying product
Technical Details
Technical Name of Scope Item 2U3 ( Classification for Customs Tariff Number and Com
modity Code )
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
● Attachment Handling: You can transfer attachments (receipts) with the posting message from Concur to
SAP as part of the feedback loop. Attachments can be attached to the financial documents and store them
via Generic Object Service (GOS).
● BAdI Methods:
● Package CTE_FIN_POST_CB_IMP
● ○ BADI_CTE_FP_CB_CHG_SGTXT
○ BADI_CTE_FP_CB_MAP_BASIC
○ BADI_CTE_FP_CB_MAP_ENTRY
Technical Details
Technical Name of Scope Item 1M1 ( Travel Expense Processing with SAP Concur Expense
Professional )
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
Technical Details
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
● Budget availability control supports the business process from budget maintenance, runs with each actual
posting, and ends with the analysis of costs and budget
● A new budget report is available that allows you to analyze the actual costs, commitments, and the
consumed and available budget
Cost Allocations:
● Profit center and cost center distributions within one company code can now be maintained in the Manage
Allocations app and can be executed with the Run Allocations app
New Change Log - Activity Types app lista all changes made to an activity type, and lets you analyze the
changes by type of change, change date, or a specific user
New Manage Direct Activity Allocation app lets you post and reverse direct activity allocations, and view posted
activity allocations
New Where Used List - Activity Types app lets you view the usage of activity types
Enhanced the Schedule Overhead Accounting Jobs app to add more periodic end transactions
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
● Support integration between Treasury Workstation (SAP S/4HANA Cloud) and SAP S/4HANA on-premise
system for accounting documents
Technical Name of Scope Item 33E ( Treasury Workstation Accounting Integration to SAP
Business Suite )
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
The parallel valuation process enables you to post the values calculated for Bond Management according to US
GAAP.
Technical Details
Technical Name of Scope Item 3X0 ( Bond Management - Group Ledger US GAAP )
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
● The Dual Control Revision Activate mode is enhanced with the Situation Framework so that the approver
gets system notifications when requests are pending for a certain period of time defined in the situation
type
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
This scope item provides functions to handle hedge management and hedge accounting processes for FX risk
using FX option under US GAAP.
Technical Details
Technical Name of Scope Item 3X4 ( Hedge Accounting for FX Option - Group Ledger US
GAAP )
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
Technical Name of Scope Item 1GA ( Accounting and Financial Close - Group Ledger IFRS )
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
● Actual costing is now available for all the countries fulfilled by localization
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
Machine Learning helps you to improve the accuracy and timeliness of your purchase order accruals.
Technical Name of Scope Item 3NF ( Machine Learning for Accruals Management )
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
This scope item provides functions to handle hedge management and hedge accounting processes for FX risk
using FX option under local GAAP.
Technical Name of Scope Item 3X2 ( Hedge Accounting for FX Option - Local GAAP )
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
This scope item provides functions to handle hedge management and hedge accounting processes for FX risk
using FX forward under US GAAP.
Technical Details
Technical Name of Scope Item 3X3 ( Hedge Accounting for FX Forward - Group Ledger US
GAAP )
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
This scope item provides functions to handle hedge management and hedge accounting processes for FX risk
using FX forward under local GAAP.
Technical Details
Technical Name of Scope Item 3X1 ( Hedge Accounting for FX Forward - Local GAAP )
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
● Support export control check for the supplying plant in Stock Transfer Orders (STOs)
● Introduce a product classification factsheet that is visible from the Material Master app
● Enter a remark when classifying or reclassifying products
Technical Details
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
● Support taking clean price for valuation with providing new security valuation procedure with clean price
and new position management procedures
● Separate asset and liability for valuation of derivatives (affects product types including Interest Rate Swap
and Cross-currency Interest Rate Swap)
Technical Details
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
This process enables you to post the values calculated for Bond Management according to IFRS9 phase I
(Classification and Measurement).
Technical Details
Technical Name of Scope Item 3WZ ( Bond Management - Group Ledger IFRS )
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
Technical Details
Technical Name of Scope Item 3M4 ( Event-Based Revenue Recognition - Service Docu
ments - IFRS )
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
● The Cash Position Analysis app offers the cash position information. Customers can extend the measures
flexibly
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
● Facilitate corporations in achieving greater cash efficiencies and higher returns through concentrating cash
via cash pools
● Allow for complex cash pool setups that contain lower-level cash pools, which are concentrated by the
bank, and higher-level cash pools, which are concentrated by the system
● Use the simulated concentration results for lower-level cash pools to make the concentrations for higher-
level cash pools
Technical Details
Technical Name of Scope Item 2U8 ( Intercompany Process for Cash Concentration )
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
Technical Details
Technical Name of Scope Item 3M5 ( Event-Based Revenue Recognition - Service Docu
ments - US GAAP )
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
● Extend user fields that allows customers to create additional fields as part of the solution at the contract
header level, allowing for improved flexibility
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
● Extend user fields to allow customers to create additional fields as part of the solution at the contract
header level, allowing for improved flexibility
Technical Details
Technical Name of Scope Item 21P ( Lease-In Accounting - Group Ledger IFRS )
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
Technical Details
Technical Name of Scope Item 2FD ( Accounting for Incoming Sales Orders )
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
This scope item covers the creation of provider contracts for products with variant configuration.
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
● Adjusted the overhead project settlement profile to allow the settlement of expenses to customer projects
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
● New position management procedure (PMP) is delivered in order to separate the GL account of the asset
and liability for valuation of derivatives. This PMP is applied to inter-company FX Forward transaction
(product type 60I) and inter-company Non-deliverable Forward transaction (product type 60J).
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
Technical Details
Technical Name of Scope Item 2BI ( Contract Accounting - Customer Initiated Payments )
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
● Extend user fields to allow customers to create additional fields as part of the solution at the contract
header level, allowing for improved flexibility
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
● In the new Adjust Assigned Liquidity Items - Anomaly Detection app, users can detect the abnormal
liquidity items by comparing the current assignment to that proposed by the trained Machine Learning
model. Users can then correct the wrong assignment of liquidity items by adopting the Machine Learning
proposals.
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
● United States:
○ IRS for 1099 and 1042s file changes for 2018 reporting for U.S.
● App enhancements for all countries
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
● Support loading Basis Spreads, FX Volatility with Moneyness and FX swap rates from Thomson Reuters
integration scenarios
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
● Extend user fields to allow customers to create additional fields as part of the solution at the contract
header level, allowing for improved flexibility
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
● Enhanced the Hedge Management Cockpit app to enable the possibility to overwrite target quota for a
specific snapshot
● Separate assets and liabilities for valuation of derivatives (affects product types including Foreign
Exchange, Non-Deliverable Forward, and OTC Currency Option)
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
Technical Details
Technical Name of Scope Item 1HB ( Financial Plan Data Upload from File )
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
● Situation Handling (as optional scope) is added in this scope item, and includes the following steps:
○ Define Situation Type
○ Manage Teams and Responsibilities
○ Monitor Notification (optional)
Technical Details
Technical Name of Scope Item 2V7 ( Monitoring of Goods and Invoice Receipts )
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
● Enhanced Liquidity Planning on SAP Analytical Cloud is enhanced with the following new features:
○ Added bank account as the new dimension
○ Added last cycle planning data as reference column
○ Copy from the reference column with ratio adjustment to the current plan input column
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
● SEPA Mandate
Technical Details
Technical Name of Scope Item 2AR ( Contract Accounting - Master Data and Basic Func
tions )
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
Technical Details
Technical Name of Scope Item 2OH ( Continuous Control Monitoring with SAP Process
Control )
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
● Support the partial reclassification from long-term to short-term for debt and investment instrument with
installment repayments
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
Technical Details
Technical Name of Scope Item 16R ( Bank Integration with SAP Multi-Bank Connectivity )
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
● Extend user fields to allow customers to create additional fields as part of the solution at the contract
header level, allowing for improved flexibility
Technical Details
Technical Name of Scope Item 34N ( Lease-In Accounting - Group Ledger US GAAP )
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
This scope item supports revenue recognition according to ASC 606 for contract accounting and invoicing.
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
With the Bond Management process, you manage your bond issuance and bond investment, from the analysis
of financial status to the accounting postings when the bond is mature.
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
● Added the Transfer BIC Data app for the upload of bank directory (International formats not included)
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
With 1905, you could search an employee based on the person’s preferred name. The field preferred name
could be maintained either by using the Success Factors integration (Preferred Name field) or via the
Workforce Person Public API (NickName field). Also the factsheet has a new field called Preferred Name under
the General Information section.
Technical Details
Type Changed
With 1905, new locking concept has been introduced in case the system run Business partner synchronization
overlaps with the import execution time when the employees are uploaded using the Import Employee app. The
process waits for 60 seconds to retrieve the lock. In case the system run is taking place still, then a new error
message is thrown. Since there is a try for lock retrieval you might have to refresh the log page once again to
check if the business partner synchronization is successful or not. The user has to wait for couple of minutes to
try the upload again or wait until the next hourly system run.
Also in case Service Cost level field is mapped to a field in EC in SAP_COM_0001 or if SAP_COM_0301 has field
Exclude Service Cost level from Workforce Public API as empty, then it is taken that service cost level has its
source as either SuccessFactors or the Public API. Hence service cost level changes for employees hired via
these channels will not be allowed using Import Employee app.
Type Changed
With 1905, the bank account number is populated in the BP bank records even if only IBAN is provided during
an employee creation. This would happen only for the new employees created or when there is an update
performed to an existing employee.
Bank information of an employee is synchronized to the business partner (BP) information. With 1905, any new
bank record created or updated through Import Employee or SuccessFactors or the Workforce Master Public
API will be synchronized to BP with a new bank id format HC*. In case of an update to existing bank information
which is manually edited via BP application tiles, then the keys are not replaced with the new naming
convention. If there is a request to delete existing bank information in case of any discrepancy arising out of
duplicate records, kindly contact SAP as deletion of synchronized data is not supported.
Technical Details
Type Changed
The Manage My Timesheet app has now been enhanced to allow the employees to now maintain the overtime
hours that they worked on a project work package.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Employees/service performers can now maintain the timesheet entries for the projects that they have not been
staffed to using the Timesheet app.
Technical Details
Type Changed
The My Inbox- Approve Timesheet app had been now enhanced to allow project managers to check and review
the overtime hours that had been maintained in the timesheet entries before approving/rejecting the
timesheet entries.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Delete option for customer specific configuration has now been enabled for the following:
Technical Details
Type Changed
Use
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
This feature enables you to create multiple versions of PIRs for one material. This means, for example, that you
can use different sources for creating different versions of PIRs such as the material forecast or an alternative
reference material. In addition, you can now also change the period for which you want to mass maintain your
PIR quantities. That is, you can always maintain the PIRs for a period of a year at a time - either in months or
weeks. The default period is set to start in the current month or week and in the case of monthly periods, you
can maintain 12 periods and in the case of weekly periods, you can maintain 52 periods. Now you can change
the start date to a period in the past or a period in the future and the system adjusts the period accordingly.
Technical Details
Type Changed
With this API (API_PLANNED_ORDERS) you can read, create, change, and delete planned orders. The API has
been enhanced to enable you to execute detailed scheduling and create capacity data for existing planned
orders using the function PlannedOrderSchedule.
Type Changed
See Also
This interface Planned Orders - Read, Create, Update, Delete is available in the SAP API Business Hub (https://
api.sap.com/ ).
Related Information
The OData service Buffer Profile - Read (API_BUFFER_PROFILE_SRV) enables you to read buffer profile data,
such as, lead time factor and variability factor, and also for each plant, read spike horizon constant (SHC), spike
horizon DLT multiplier, spike threshold factor, and on-hand alert threshold factor of demand-driven relevant
products.
Technical Details
Type New
The OData service Buffer Sizing - Read, Write, Update (API_API_BUFFERSIZING_SRV) enables you to read
and create buffer sizing data, such as, buffer proposals, average dailty usage (ADU), decoupled lead time
(DLT), demand and zone adjustments of demand-driven relevant products. It also enables you to update
demand and zone adjustment factors.
Technical Details
Type New
With this release, new configuration steps for making settings related to Material Requirements Planning have
been added to Configure Your Solution in the Manage Your Solution app. In addition, changes have been made
to some previously delivered configuration items or configuration steps.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
New/changed
Configuration configuration ob Leading scope
Type of change for ... ject How to find it What you can do item
New SSCUI Versions of Plan Define Versions of Find this configu- You can define ver BJ5 (Make-to-
Stock Production -
ned Independent Planned Independ ration under sions of planned
Discrete Manufac
Requirements ent Requirements Manufacturing independent re
turing)
(PIRs) quirements (PIRs)
Material
to differentiate be
Requirements
tween different
Planning PIRs and to indi
Planning . cate the transfer of
requirements from
previous planning
levels.
SSCUI replaced MRP Areas for Define MRP Areas Find this configu- The Define MRP J44 (Material Re
Plant/Storage Lo for Plant/Storage ration under Areas SSCUI is re quirements Plan
cations Locations Manufacturing placed with the ning)
Define MRP Areas
Material
for Plant/Storage
Requirements
Locations SSCUI.
Planning Master In this SSCUI you
Data . define the MRP
areas for plant and
storage locations.
SSCUI replaced MRP Areas for Define MRP Areas Find this configu- The Define MRP J44 (Material Re
Subcontractors for Subcontractors ration under Areas SSCUI is re quirements Plan
New fields in Planning Calendar Define Planning Find this configu- In this changed J44 (Material Re
Calendar
SSCUI ration under SSCUI you have a quirements Plan
Effects on Configuration
Make your entries in Configure Your Solution, which is part of the Manage Your Solution app. In the Realize
phase, make changes to predelivered configuration settings or create new settings if needed. It may be
possible to create new settings by copying existing settings and adapting them. Note that to ensure data
consistency, the changes that you can make to predelivered configuration settings may be limited. In some, but
not all cases, you can delete new records that you have added.
For more information about the settings that are to be made in each configuration step, read the system
documentation. You access this documentation from within the configuration step using the Configuration Help
button.
Related Information
With this app (API_PRODUCTION_ORDERS), you can create, read and update production orders. The API has
been enhanced to enable you to schedule order operations for a production order using the function
ScheduleProductionOrderOperation.
Technical Details
Type Changed
See Also
This interface Production Order - Create, Read, Update is available in the SAP API Business Hub (https://
api.sap.com/ ).
With this release, you can schedule orders for process industries. You can view the resources in your area of
reponsibility along with the work center details when you select Process as the industry type.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Changes to the Identity and Access Management (IAM) objects delivered for Production Planning require you
to recheck your business roles and the business catalogs assigned to them. Ensure that the restrictions
included in the business catalogs are set correctly to allow your users to use their business apps as needed.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Use the Business Role Templates app to check the following business role templates or business catalogs and
their restriction types:
Note
You can also see which business catalogs have changed in the Business Catalogs app. Read the description
displayed for each business catalog in the system for more information about the authorizations controlled
by the catalog and its restriction types.
IAM Objects
Production (Discrete) - Business catalog Some apps were The apps Create BJ5 (Make-to-Stock
Process Engineering added to this business Capacity, Display Production - Discrete
(SAP_SCM_BC_PROC_ catalog. Capacity, and Change Manufacturing)
ENG_MC) Capacity were added
to the business cata
log.
Production (Discrete) - Business catalog Restriction types were The restriction type BJ5 (Make-to-Stock
Process Engineering changed. Cost Center (KOSTL) Production - Discrete
(SAP_SCM_BC_PROC_ was added. Manufacturing)
ENG_MC)
Production (Process) - Business catalog Some apps were The apps Create BJ8 (Make-to-Stock -
Process Engineering added to this business Capacity, Display Process Manufacturing
(SAP_SCM_BC_PPROC catalog. Capacity, and Change Based on Process Or
_ENG_MC) Capacity were added der)
to the business cata
log.
Production (Process) - Business catalog Restriction types were The restriction type BJ8 (Make-to-Stock -
Process Engineering changed. Cost Center (KOSTL) Process Manufacturing
(SAP_SCM_BC_PPROC was added. Based on Process Or
_ENG_MC) der)
Manufacturing - Business catalog Restriction types were The restriction types BJ5 (Make-to-Stock
Master Data changed. Authorization Groups Production - Discrete
Display(SAP_SCM_BC_ for Product Manufacturing), BJ8
MFG_MD_OBJ_PGS_MC (BEGRU_MAT), (Make-to-Stock - Proc
) Authorization Groups ess Manufacturing
for Product Group Based on Process Or
(BEGRU_MATKL), der)
Authorization Groups
for Product Type
(BEGRU_MTART), and
Cost Center (KOSTL)
were added.
Production - Supply Business catalog Restriction types were The restriction types BJ5 (Make-to-Stock
Control Cycle changed. Authorization Groups Production - Discrete
Management for Product Manufacturing), BJ8
(SAP_SCM_BC_PRODN (BEGRU_MAT), (Make-to-Stock - Proc
_SUP_CTRLC_MC) Authorization Groups ess Manufacturing
for Product Group Based on Process Or
(BEGRU_MATKL), and der)
Authorization Groups
for Product Type
(BEGRU_MTART) were
added.
Production - Product Business catalog Business catalog was This business catalog BJ5 (Make-to-Stock
Engineering (Obsolete) deprecated. was deprecated. It Production - Discrete
(SAP_SCM_BC_PROD_ stays in the system for Manufacturing)
ENG_MC) two more releases be
fore being deleted. You
can use the following
business catalog in
stead:
● Product Lifecycle
Management -
Material BOM
(SAP_PLM_BC_MB
OM_PC)
Production Engineer - Business role template Assigned business cat The business catalog BJ5 (Make-to-Stock
Discrete alog was changed. Production - Product Production - Discrete
Manufacturing Engineering (Obsolete) Manufacturing)
(SAP_BR_PRODN_ENG ( SAP_SCM_BC_PROD_
_DISC) ENG_MC) was replaced
by business catalog
Product Lifecycle
Management - Material
BOM
(SAP_PLM_BC_MBOM_
PC).
Production Engineer - Business role template Assigned business cat The business catalog BJ5 (Make-to-Stock
Process Manufacturing alog was changed. Production - Product Production - Discrete
(SAP_BR_PRODN_ENG Engineering (Obsolete) Manufacturing)
_PROC) ( SAP_SCM_BC_PROD_
ENG_MC) was replaced
by business catalog
Product Lifecycle
Management - Material
BOM
(SAP_PLM_BC_MBOM_
PC).
Related Information
This feature enables you to to identify capacity issues related to demand-driven materials and solve them early
in the planning process. The following two new apps are available:
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
In Kanban, a new stock transfer replenishment strategy is available, allowing direct warehouse task creation in
Cloud Warehouse Management.
Type New
Additional Details
In the kanban control cycle you can enter the new standard stock transfer strategy PD80 Warehouse Task.
● User confirms the warehouse task - the system sets the kanban container to "Full".
● User sets the kanban container to "Full" - the system confirms the warehouse task.
Related Information
Summarized JIT calls can be used to request replenishment from suppliers when a kanban container is empty.
For this, you define external procurement replenishment strategy PDA7 Summarized JIT Call in the control
cycle.
The output for kanban summarized JIT calls is based on the SAP S/4HANA Output Control.
With the Schedule Kanban JIT Call Output app you can schedule background jobs for triggering the output of
summarized JIT calls.
New New
Additional Details
You can start jobs to print or send e-mails for kanban summarized JIT calls immediately, or schedule them to
start later.
You can schedule background jobs for triggering the output of summarized JIT calls where the dispatch time is
set to scheduled.
Related Information
This feature enables data flow of custom fields from the kanban control cycle and container to purchase order
item in case the replenishment strategy for external procurement with purchase order is used.
You can use the Business Add-In (BAdI) Change Before Creation of Replenishment Element to change custom
field values in a container whenever a kanban container is set to status "Empty", just before replenishment
elements are created.
Type New
Additional Details
As a key user, you can adapt the system with custom logic using the Custom Fields and Logic app:
This feature can be used in the control cycle to print kanban cards automatically when containers are set to
status "Empty".
Technical Details
Type New
In the Manage Kanban Control Cycle app you can set the print control indicator to enable kanban cards to print
automatically when the container status is set to "Empty":
● 0 No printing.
● 1 Print at replenishment.
This improved feature enables you to define your area of responsibility (AoR) in a more user-friendly way. If you
work with the Manage Production Orders or Manage Production Operations app, you can change the settings for
your area of responsibility by choosing App Settings from your user button. The user interface for these
settings has been enhanced.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
The user interface for specifying your area of responsibility has been enhanced:
● In the first step, you can immediately select if you want to change the settings for the production
supervisor or the work center.
● The selection list of production supervisors and work centers is no longer restricted and now loads further
entries as you scroll down. Please note that if you choose more than 1000 entries, the system displays a
warning that the app performance might be influenced.
● There is now a Clear button if you want to discard the current selection.
In Manufacturing, the Configure Your Solution app has a new configuration item for master recipe with new
configuration steps and several new configuration steps regarding master data for discrete manufacturing,
master data for process manufacturing, work center / resource, and confirmation.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
Configuration steps correspond to a Self-Service Configuration User Interface (SSCUI) and configuration items
are groupings of configuration steps. The following table provides an overview of the new configuration item
and the new configuration steps:
Master Data for Discrete Define Setup Type Define setup types for your PP-BD-RTG
Manufacturing plants.
Master Data for Process Define Setup Type Define setup types for your PP-BD-RTG
Manufacturing plants.
Confirmation Settings for Define Single Screen Entry Create layouts for the single PP-PI
Discrete and Process for Confirming Process screen entry of
Manufacturing Orders confirmations.
Please note that the following configuration item and the configuration step have been renamed:
● Manage Your Solution Configure Your Solution Manufacturing Shop Floor Control Confirmation
is now Confirmation Settings for Discrete and Process Manufacturing
● Manage Your Solution Configure Your Solution Manufacturing Shop Floor Control Confirmation
Settings for Discrete and Process Manufacturing Define Single Screen Entry is now Define Single Screen
Entry for Confirming Production Orders
Make your entries in Configure Your Solution, which is part of the Manage Your Solution app. In the Realize
phase, make changes to predelivered configuration settings or create new settings if needed. It may be
possible to create new settings by copying existing settings and adapting them. Note that to ensure data
consistency, the changes that you can make to predelivered configuration settings may be limited.
For more information about the settings that are to be made in each configuration step, read the system
documentation. You access this documentation from within the configuration step using the Configuration Help
button.
Related Information
With this API (API_PROD_ORDER_CONFIRMATION_2_SRV), you can create, read, and cancel time ticket
confirmations for production orders. The API has been enhanced to enable you to create, read, and cancel
confirmations on order level.
Technical Details
Type Changed
This interface Production Order Confirmation - Read, Create, Cancel is available in the SAP API Business Hub
(https://api.sap.com/ ).
Related Information
With this API (API_PROC_ORDER_CONFIRMATION_2_SRV), you can create, read, and cancel time ticket
confirmations for process orders. The API has been enhanced to enable you to create, read, and cancel
confirmations on order level.
Technical Details
Type Changed
See Also
This interface Process Order Confirmation - Read, Create, Cancel is available in the SAP API Business Hub
(https://api.sap.com/ ).
Related Information
You can extend the Adobe output forms by adding SAP standard fields.
This feature also provides data source extensibility to allow additional standard SAP fields in the print forms for
both production order and process orders.
Technical Details
Type New
2UG
PP-PI
Related Information
These features cover Just-In-Time (JIT) processes from the perspective of a supplier. These include apps that
enable the maintenance of master data of JIT-relevant customers, JIT-relevant customer supply controls, and
Technical Details
Type New
Related Links
For more information, refer to the product documentation at https://help.sap.com under SAP S/4HANA
Cloud Manufacturing Production Operations Just-In-Time (JIT) Supply to Customer from Stock .
This SOAP service transmits to the supplier system the IDocs resulting from customer-triggered Just-In-Time
(JIT) calls. These IDocs get routed via SAP Cloud Platform Integration and get mapped to this JIT call SOAP
service, which then transmits it to the supplier’s system.
Technical Details
Type New
This interface JIT Call - Create is available in the SAP API Business Hub (https://api.sap.com/ ).
With this feature you can record defects with the defect category Production Defect, which includes
production-relevant information from the production order.
For defects with this category you can use the follow-up action Post to Blocked Stock (QMPBLST). With the
follow-up action you can post stock of the material entered in the defect to blocked stock.
Technical Details
Type New
QM-QN-DEF
Related Information
Defect codes can be proposed using an analytical predictive model. The defect description and the detailed
description are taken into account for the determination of the proposals for defect codes. The proposal
function for defect codes is based on the Predictive Analytics Integrator (PAi), which integrates predictive
functions in business applications. The Predictive Analytics integrator comprises predictive models and
predictive scenarios.
Type New
QM-QN-DEF
Related Information
With this feature, you now have the flexibility to display the number of defects created in the last 2, 7, or 30 days
on analytical cards related to defects recording in the Quality Engineer Overview app. This also enables better
visualization of defects in the associated charts.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 2V0 (SAP Fiori Analytical Apps for Quality Management),
2QN (Nonconformance Management)
Related Information
With this feature you can monitor batch deadlines and make the system trigger batch-related actions, for
example, the creation of inspection lots for recurring inspections. You can either schedule this deadline
monitoring for recurring inspections or trigger it manually.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
This feature enables you as the supplier of a material to confirm the quality of goods, the execution of defined
inspections, and the existence of defect-free inspection results. To achieve this, you can make different
certificate planning settings so that a corresponding quality certificate in PDF format is created automatically
for an outbound delivery item.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
With this feature you can activate the production part approval process (PPAP) for a quality info record. This
allows you to execute a first article inspection.
Technical Details
Type Changed
The functions available in this app now enable it to replace the following apps:
These apps will be removed with release SAP S/4HANA Cloud 1911.
Related Information
With this feature, you can create and manage inspection plans and thus define the quality criteria on the basis
of which materials can be inspected. This feature allows you to specify the materials to be inspected and add
operations and characteristics to inspection plans.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
The OData service Inspection Lot – Read, Write (API_INSPECTIONLOT_SRV) now enables you to process
inspection point data and to record results for inspection points.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
This feature enables you to read catalog data for characteristic attributes and their language-dependent texts
by using the OData service Characteristic Attribute Catalog - Read (API_INSPECTIONPLAN_SRV). The catalog
data consists of plant-specific selected sets with their codes that are used to document the quality inspection
results for qualitative characteristics.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
Changes to the Identity and Access Management (IAM) objects delivered for Quality Management require you
to recheck your business roles and the business catalogs assigned to them. Ensure that the restrictions
included in the business catalogs are set correctly to allow your users to use their business apps as needed.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Use the Business Role Templates app to check the following business role templates or business catalogs and
their restriction types:
Note
You can also see which business catalogs have changed in the Business Catalogs app. Read the description
displayed for each business catalog in the system for more information about the authorizations controlled
by the catalog and its restriction types.
Quality Engineer Business role template Business catalog was The business catalog 1E1 (Quality Manage
(SAP_BR_QUALITY_E removed. QM – Configuration
ment in Discrete Man
NGINEER) (SAP_QM_BC_CONFIG
ufacturing), 1FM (Qual
_PC) was removed
from this role template ity Management in Pro
and added to the role curement), 1MP (Qual
template Configuration ity Management in
Expert – Business Sales), 1MR (Quality
Process Configuration Management in Stock
(SAP_BR_BPC_EXPER
Handling), 2F9 (Quality
T) instead.
Management for Com
plaints Against Suppli
ers), 2FA (Quality Man
agement for Com
plaints from Custom
ers), 2QN (Noncon
formance Manage
ment), 2QP (Quality
Management of Inter
nal Problems)
Quality Engineer Business role template Business catalog was The new business cat 1MR (Quality Manage
(SAP_BR_QUALITY_E added. alog QM – Recurring ment in Stock Han
NGINEER) Inspections of Batches dling)
(SAP_QM_BC_RECUR_
INSP_BATCH_PC) was
added.
Quality Technician Business role template Business catalog was The new business cat 2F9 (Quality Manage
(SAP_BR_QUALITY_T added. alog QM - Quality Task
ment for Complaints
ECHNICIAN) Follow-Up Action
Against Suppliers),
Processing
(SAP_QM_BC_QTSK_F 2FA (Quality Manage
OA_PRC_PC) was ment for Complaints
added. from Customers), 2QN
(Nonconformance
Management), 2QP
(Quality Management
of Internal Problems)
Quality Planner Business role template Business catalog was The new business cat 1MP (Quality Manage
(SAP_BR_QUALITY_P added. alog QM – Certificate
ment in Sales)
LANNER) Planning
(SAP_QM_BC_CERTIF
ICATE_PLNG_PC) was
added.
QM – Master Inspec Business catalog App was added. The app Master 1E1 (Quality Manage
tion Characteristics Inspection
ment in Discrete Man
(SAP_QM_BC_MSTR_I Characteristic –
ufacturing), 1FM (Qual
NSP_CHARC_PC) Where-Used List was
added. ity Management in Pro
curement), 1MP (Qual
ity Management in
Sales), 1MR (Quality
Management in Stock
Handling), 2QN (Non
conformance Manage
ment)
QM – Inspection Meth Business catalog App was added. The app Inspection 1E1 (Quality Manage
ods Method – Where-Used
ment in Discrete Man
(SAP_QM_BC_INSP_M List was added.
ufacturing), 1FM (Qual
ETHODS_PC)
ity Management in Pro
curement), 1MP (Qual
ity Management in
Sales), 1MR (Quality
Management in Stock
Handling), 2QN (Non
conformance Manage
ment)
QM – Inspection Plan Business catalog App was added. The following apps 1E1 (Quality Manage
ning Display were added:
ment in Discrete Man
(SAP_QM_BC_INSP_P
● Inspection Method ufacturing), 1FM (Qual
LNG_DSP_PC)
– Where-Used List ity Management in Pro
● Master Inspection curement), 1MP (Qual
Characteristic – ity Management in
Where-Used List
Sales), 1MR (Quality
Management in Stock
Handling), 2QN (Non
conformance Manage
ment)
QM – Inspection Plan Business catalog App was added. The new app Manage 1E1 (Quality Manage
ning Inspection Plans was
ment in Discrete Man
(SAP_QM_BC_INSP_P added.
ufacturing), 1FM (Qual
LANNING_PC)
ity Management in Pro
curement), 1MP (Qual
ity Management in
Sales), 1MR (Quality
Management in Stock
Handling), 2QN (Non
conformance Manage
ment)
QM – Quality Tasks Business catalog Business catalog was This business catalog 2F9 (Quality Manage
(SAP_QM_BC_NOTIF_ deprecated. was deleted (as an
ment for Complaints
TASK_PC) nounced two releases
Against Suppliers),
ago). You can use the
following business cat 2FA (Quality Manage
alogs instead: ment for Complaints
from Customers), 2QN
● QM – Quality Task
(Nonconformance
Processing
Management), 2QP
(SAP_QM_BC_QTA
(Quality Management
SK_PRC_PC)
of Internal Problems)
● QM – Quality
Tasks
(SAP_QM_BC_QTA
SK_MNG_PC)
QM – Defects Record Business catalog App was added. The new app Record 1E1 (Quality Manage
ment in Discrete Man
ing Production Defect was
ufacturing), 2QN (Non
(SAP_QM_BC_DEFECT added.
conformance Manage
S_RECG_PC) ment)
Note that this app is
not visible in the SAP
Fiori Launchpad ini
tially. Users need to
add it to their home
page manually.
QM – Defects Record Business catalog Restriction types were The new restriction 1E1 (Quality Manage
changed. type Defect Category in
ing ment in Discrete Man
Work Center and Plant
(SAP_QM_BC_DEFECT ufacturing), 1FM (Qual
(QDEFCAT_ARBPL_WE
S_RECG_PC) RKS) was added. ity Management in Pro
curement), 1MP (Qual
ity Management in
Sales), 1MR (Quality
Management in Stock
Handling), 2F9 (Quality
Management for Com
plaints Against Suppli
ers), 2FA (Quality Man
agement for Com
plaints from Custom
ers), 2QN (Noncon
formance Manage
ment), 2QP (Quality
Management of Inter
nal Problems)
QM – Defects Display Business catalog Restriction types were The new restriction 1E1 (Quality Manage
changed. type Defect Category in
(SAP_QM_BC_DEFECT ment in Discrete Man
Work Center and Plant
_DSP_PC) ufacturing), 1FM (Qual
(QDEFCAT_ARBPL_WE
RKS) was added. ity Management in Pro
curement), 1MP (Qual
ity Management in
Sales), 1MR (Quality
Management in Stock
Handling), 2F9 (Quality
Management for Com
plaints Against Suppli
ers), 2FA (Quality Man
agement for Com
plaints from Custom
ers), 2QN (Noncon
formance Manage
ment), 2QP (Quality
Management of Inter
nal Problems)
QM – Defects Business catalog Restriction types were The new restriction 1E1 (Quality Manage
changed. type Defect Category in
(SAP_QM_BC_DEFECT ment in Discrete Man
Work Center and Plant
S_PC) ufacturing), 1FM (Qual
(QDEFCAT_ARBPL_WE
RKS) was added. ity Management in Pro
curement), 1MP (Qual
ity Management in
Sales), 1MR (Quality
Management in Stock
Handling), 2F9 (Quality
Management for Com
plaints Against Suppli
ers), 2FA (Quality Man
agement for Com
plaints from Custom
ers), 2QN (Noncon
formance Manage
ment), 2QP (Quality
Management of Inter
nal Problems)
QM – Analytics Business catalog Restriction types were The new restriction 2V0 (SAP Fiori Analyti
changed. type Defect Category in cal Apps for Quality
(SAP_QM_BC_ANALYT
Work Center and Plant Management)
ICS_PC) (QDEFCAT_ARBPL_WE
RKS) was added.
QM – Results Record Business catalog Restriction types were The new restriction 1E1 (Quality Manage
changed. type Defect Category in
ing ment in Discrete Man
Work Center and Plant
(SAP_QM_BC_RESULT ufacturing), 1FM (Qual
(QDEFCAT_ARBPL_WE
_RECG_PC) RKS) was added. ity Management in Pro
curement), 1MP (Qual
ity Management in
Sales), 1MR (Quality
Management in Stock
Handling), 2QN (Non
conformance Manage
ment)
QM – Usage Decisions Business catalog Restriction types were The new restriction 1E1 (Quality Manage
changed. type Defect Category in
(SAP_QM_BC_USAGE_ ment in Discrete Man
Work Center and Plant
DECISION_PC) ufacturing), 1FM (Qual
(QDEFCAT_ARBPL_WE
RKS) was added. ity Management in Pro
curement), 1MP (Qual
ity Management in
Sales), 1MR (Quality
Management in Stock
Handling), 2QN (Non
conformance Manage
ment)
Use
● In-built predictive functionality provided for defect code proposals in quality management
Technical Details
Technical Name of Scope Item 20N ( Predictive Analytics Model Training - Supply Chain )
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
Technical Details
Technical Name of Scope Item 1YT ( Make-to-Order Production with Variant Configuration )
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
This scope item focuses on more complex process manufacturing scenarios with silo materials and phantom
assemblies. Silo materials are generally stored in big silos or tanks. The silos are modeled as separate storage
locations.
Technical Name of Scope Item 3UL ( Make-to-Stock with Silo Material - Process Manufac
turing )
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
This scope item enables production planning in make-to-stock scenarios with joint production capability (the
process of manufacturing two or more products in a single production run (for example, co- and by-products
along with the main product)).
Technical Name of Scope Item 3L7 ( Make-to-Stock with Co- and By-Products - Process
Manufacturing )
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
● Detecting MRP material exceptions is now available using the Situation Handling framework. The material
planner is automatically alerted in case formerly created purchase requisitions are no longer needed based
on the current stock situation using automatically generated notifications.
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
● New SAP Fiori app Set Kanban Container Status lets the user change the status of a Kanban container
easily and quickly to trigger material replenishment
● Enhanced best practice content with additional Kanban replenishment strategies
Technical Name of Scope Item 1E3 ( Manufacturing with Kanban Supply into Production )
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
This scope item enables the storage tank management process, which supports the procurement of a new
batch into the day tank and then mixing of this new batch with an existing batch in the main tank with a special
mixing process order type.
Technical Name of Scope Item 3UK ( Inbound Storage Tank Management - Process Manu
facturing )
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
Technical Details
Technical Name of Scope Item 31L ( Production Capacity Planning and Evaluation )
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
This scope item describes the Just-in-Time process (Supply to Customer from stock) for component
manufacturers. The business process encompasses steps from receiving Just-In-Time calls to billing.
Technical Details
Technical Name of Scope Item 2EM ( Just-In-Time Supply to Customer from Stock )
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
You can use the Close Projects app to schedule application jobs to close customer projects that are in the
Completed stage. The application job also records appropriate results in a log file.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
If you need to create an incident regarding this feature, use component CA-CPD-SS.
Key users can use the available selection parameters to schedule application jobs to suit their business needs.
Related Information
Close Projects
This feature enables project managers to restrict time posting in internal and customer projects, only to staffed
resources. The default value for the Restrict Unstaffed Posting indicator is determined from the service
organization of the project, and can be changed to suit the requirements of individual projects.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
This feature is available when creating or editing projects using the Plan Customer Projects and Plan Internal
Projects apps. Project managers can use this setting as follows:
Note
The Restrict Unstaffed Posting indicator only affects time postings made through the Manage My Timesheet
app.
If you need to create an incident regarding this feature, use component CA-CPD-SS.
By default, all existing customer and internal projects are set to allow time posting only by staffed resources.
The interface for data transfer has been enhanced with a mandatory importing parameter
RestrictTimePosting, with valid inputs Y or N.
Effects on Configuration
If you wish to make a default setting for customer or internal projects (for example, for a particular country or
region), you may do this by editing relevant service organizations in the Maintain Service Oranizations app.
Note
Although this setting is defaulted, project managers can update this based on the needs in specific
projects.
Related Information
This skill allows you to quickly find customer projects based on specific attributes such as the project manager,
customer, service organization, cost center, start and end dates, and project stage. You can also use this skill to
retrieve resources staffed to a customer project.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
If you need to create an incident regarding this feature, use component CA-CPD-SS.
Related Information
A new CDS view I_EngmntProjFcstCube_2 is available to enable retrieval of forecast information for
customer and internal projects. The CDS view contains information about planned and actual data by periods.
You can use this CDS view to retrieve information such as estimate to complete (ETC), estimate at completion
(EAC), percentage of completion (POC).
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
C_EngmntProjFcstQuery_2 is an example of a query that you can create to retrieve information as per your
business requirements.
If you need to create an incident regarding this feature, use component CA-CPD-SS.
As of S/4HANA Cloud 1905, the I_EngmntProjFcstCube cube and C_EngmntProjFcstQuery query have
been deprecated. Hence, you must use the relevant succeeding cube I_EngmntProjFcstCube_2 and query
C_EngmntProjFcstQuery_2.
Related Information
You can now use this service (/CPD/SC_PROJ_ENGMT_CREATE_UPD) to update and delete sales orders for a
customer project.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
Related Information
Several Core Data Services (CDS) views have been released in Professional Services. You can now use these
views to build applications that enable you to extract billing details for corresponding projects.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
● I_RRBDynamicItemFlow
● I_RRBDynamicItemTotalFlow
● I_RRBDynamicItemLongText
● I_RRBDynamicCostItem
Several basic CDS (Core Data Services) views for Professional Services have now been released. You can use
them to construct custom views or apps that need to retrieve data about sales orders, sales order items, and
work package assignments for sales order items in customer projects.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
● I_CustProjSlsOrd
● I_CustProjSlsOrdItem
● I_CustProjSlsOrdItemWorkPckg
You can look at all released CDS views and their fields in detail by using the View Browser app.
Related Information
View Browser
Sales Order for Customer Project
Sales Order Item for Customer Project
SO Item - Wrk Pckgs for Customer Project
Changes to the Identity and Access Management (IAM) objects delivered for Professional Services require you
to recheck your business roles and the business catalogs assigned to them. Ensure that the restrictions
included in the business catalogs are set correctly to allow your users to use their business apps as needed.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Use the Business Role Templates app to check the following business role templates or business catalogs and
their restriction types:
Note
You can also see which business catalogs have changed in the Business Catalogs app. Read the description
displayed for each business catalog in the system for more information about the authorizations controlled
by the catalog and its restriction types.
IAM Objects
Project Management - Business catalog Restriction type Responsible Cost J11 (Customer Project
Project Billing changed Management - Project-
Center
Scheduling Based Services)
(SAP_PS_BC_PROJ_B (PS_FKSTL)
ILL_SCHDL_PC )
Note
This new restric
tion type replaces
the restriction
type
PS_FKOKR_FKSTL
.
Project Systems - Business catalog Restriction type Responsible Cost Cen J11 (Customer Project
Intercompany Billing changed
ter (PS_FKSTL) Management - Project-
(SAP_PS_BC_INTERC Based Services)
OMPBILLING_PC) Note
This new restric
tion type replaces
the restriction
type
PS_FKOKR_FKSTL
.
Project Management - Business catalog New app The Close Projects app J11 (Customer Project
Periodic Activities
allows authorized Management - Project-
(SAP_PSP_BC_PRJ_P
users to setup applica Based Services)
ER_ACT_PC)
tion jobs to close cus
tomer projects that are
in the Completed
stage.
Related Information
With this feature, you can record, approve, calculate the price for, and bill overtime hours that are performed by
consultants and other employees in the context of project-based services. To enable this, the system must be
configured to handle different overtime categories (for example, to differentiate extended weekday hours from
weekend hours) and cost rates.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
The new functionality for overtime management is delivered as an end-to-end process. With this innovation,
consultants can record time using the new overtime categories in the timesheet, which must be configured
The overtime category is included in the approval process for recorded working times through the My Inbox
app. Similarly, the project manager sees the overtime hours and category when releasing the billing proposal in
the Release Billing Proposals app. In case the overtime that a consultant has performed is linked with additional
charges to the customer, the overtime category can also be found when setting service prices through
condition types SOV1 and SOV2, which act as a surcharge. In the billing proposal, the overtime recordings are
visible as separate line items. To make these visible on the final invoice, the invoice output form must be
adjusted accordingly. To give an example, if a consultant records regular working time, working time on a
weekend, and working time on a public holiday, this would be visible on the invoice in three separate line items.
The recording and processing of overtime hours affects several lines of business, which are described in more
detail below.
Human Resources
Consultants and other business users can use the Manage My Timesheet app to record overtime for customer
projects. Timesheets must be approved by the project manager before they are transferred to controlling.
Professional Services
In the Release Billing Proposals app, in addition to the normally recorded time entries, you can now view billing
proposal items that are classified with an overtime category and description.
The items categorized with an overtime category display the final sales price under Sales Price per Unit.
Sales
Price Management delivers the following surcharge condition types:
● SOV1: Overtime
● SOV2: Overtime (%)
The access sequence SOV1 (Overtime) is delivered with the following mandatory fields: sales organization,
distribution channel, overtime and the following optional fields: customer, material.
You can use the Set Material Prices – Sales app or the Set Service Prices – Sales app to create, edit, and display
condition records for overtime categories. When a business user records overtime, and a debit memo request
is created with the Release Billing Proposals app, you can see the relevant price condition in the debit memo
request.
To make overtime hours visible on customer invoice output, developers can add the new item-level field for
overtime category (CATS_OVERTIME_CATEGORY) to billing output form templates. They do this by
downloading the required template in the Maintain Form Templates app and using Adobe LiveCycle Designer to
add the field (which is part of the BillingDocumentItem XML node) to the appropriate part of the form. The
edited form must then be re-uploaded within the same app. Adding the field enables overtime items to be
shown separately on all billing document output (for example, on the printout).
In the Manage Your Solution app under Configure Your Solution, configuration experts can use the configuration
item Define and Maintain Settings for Timesheet Application to enable overtime and define overtime categories.
In this configuration item, they must perform the following configuration steps:
For more information, see the configuration help of these configuration steps.
Related Information
Manage My Timesheet
My Inbox
Release Billing Proposals
About Managing Your Solutions
Output Management for Sales Documents and Billing Documents
Form Templates
Maintain Form Templates
When looking for suitable resources for a request, you can now compare multiple resources in more detail
before deciding whom to assign to the request.
Technical Details
Type New
The resource comparison provides you with an overview of relevant information, such as similar and additional
skills or other assignments for the same customer, in the same industry, or with the same role.
Related Information
Resource Comparison
The Transfer of Staffing Assignments app has been renamed to Check and Transfer Staffing Assignments. You
can now check existing assignments before transferring them from customer and internal project management
to resource management.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
The provided application job template now includes an additional option. You use the Check Employments
option to check if employments are active and daily availability data has been maintained for all relevant
resources and the entire assignment time period.
In addition, in-app help is now available for the Check and Transfer Staffing Assignments job template.
This skill allows you to quickly find resource requests with specific attributes. For example, you can use SAP
CoPilot to find overdue resource requests for a specific customer.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
You can communicate with SAP CoPilot using natural language. Just voice or type a command using the
relevant search parameters. After SAP CoPilot has returned a list of matching requests, you can view the most
important details for the requests that you are interested in and open the request directly in the Manage Project
Staffing app.
Related Information
Use
Technical Details
Technical Name of Scope Item 1A8 ( Internal Project Management - Project-Based Serv
ices )
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
Technical Details
Technical Name of Scope Item J13 ( Service and Material Procurement - Project-Based
Services )
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
● Handle overtime hours (for example, condition type SOV2 for pricing conditions and inclusion in billing
process and documents)
● Use process flow for preliminary billing documents
● Use convergence criteria for customer billing documents
● Use API for customer projects including sales order data (Update and Delete)
● Use API for service price maintenance (Update and Delete)
Technical Details
Technical Name of Scope Item J14 ( Sales Order Processing - Project-Based Services )
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
Technical Details
Technical Name of Scope Item J11 ( Customer Project Management - Project-Based Serv
ices )
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
● Compare multiple resources in more detail before deciding to whom to assign to the request
● Check existing assignments before transferring them from customer and internal project management to
resource management
● Find resource requests with specific attributes through SAP CoPilot
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
The Project Control app has new fields to indicate the project currency and location.
Technical Details
Type New
Availability of joint venture attributes in the Project Control and Project Builder apps that can be assigned to
projects.
Technical Details
Type New
With this app, you can display the structure of a project, view the planned project timeline in a Gantt chart, and
edit master data of the project structure elements. The project structure consists of the project and its work
packages.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
You can open the Project Planning app for individual projects from the Project Control app.
Related Information
Project Planning
Work Package [page 355]
IAM Objects in Enterprise Portfolio and Project Management [page 360]
With this app, you can display and edit detailed master data for a work package. A work package is a structure
element of a specific project. This app enables you to edit the essential characteristics of a work package as
well as parameters that control subsequent process steps, such as actual cost collection or period end closing.
Type New
Additional Details
As work packages can be arranged in a hierarchical structure, they are also referred to as work breakdown
structure (WBS) elements in other apps.
You can open the Work Package app for individual work packages from the Project Planning app.
Related Information
Work Package
IAM Objects in Enterprise Portfolio and Project Management [page 360]
With this app, you can perform mass changes to projects and work packages simultaneously. This allows you to
implement changes that affect a large number of your items.
Technical Details
Type New
With this feature, you can now view actual costs, plan costs, budget and commitments of projects in project
currency in the Project Budget Report and Monitor Projects apps. You can also view and budget and assigned
values of projects in project currency on the budget consumption cards in the Project Financial Controller
Overview app
Technical Details
Type New
This skill allows you to quickly find projects with specific attributes and obtain information about the financial
details related to them, such as, actual cost, plan cost, budget, budget consumption. For example, you can use
SAP CoPilot to find the budget consumption of a specific project.
Technical Details
Type New
With this app you can simulate and finally decide the entire set (scope) of all the projects you definitely want to
execute within a certain planning period. To define for an upcoming period which projects shall be in scope or
out of scope, you create one or more project rankings that you use as a decision-making basis in your regular
review process.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
This feature enables you to extend the project header data of My Projects - Key Figures app according to your
business needs.
Type New
Related Information
The Enterprise Project – Create, Read, Update, Delete service now enables you to perform status changes for
project elements as well as to update and read joint venture accounting related information of project
definitions and project elements. Furthermore, the Plant property is available for projects and the Location
property is available for projects and project elements.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
This interface is also available in the SAP API Business Hub (https://api.sap.com/ ).
Changes to the Identity and Access Management (IAM) objects delivered for Enterprise Portfolio and Project
Management require you to recheck your business roles and the business catalogs assigned to them. Ensure
that the restrictions included in the business catalogs are set correctly to allow your users to use their business
apps as needed.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Use the Business Role Templates app to check the following business role templates or business catalogs and
their restriction types:
Note
You can also see which business catalogs have changed in the Business Catalogs app. Read the description
displayed for each business catalog in the system for more information about the authorizations controlled
by the catalog and its restriction types.
IAM Objects
Changes with This Re Relevant Scope
Name of IAM Object Object Type lease Details Item(s)
Project Financial Business role template Business catalog was The new business cat 1NT (Project Financial
Controller added. alog Project Systems -
Control)
(SAP_BR_PROJ_FIN_C Mass Changes
ONTROLLER) (SAP_PS_BC_PROJ_M
ASS_CHANGE_PC) was
added.
Project Financial Business role template Business catalog was The new business cat 1YF (Project Review)
Controller added. alog Project Monitoring
(SAP_BR_PROJ_FIN_C - Project Ranking
ONTROLLER) (SAP_PPM_BC_PROJ_
RANKING_PC) was
added.
Project Systems - Mass Business catalog New business catalog This new business cat 1NT (Project Financial
Changes alog contains the new
Control)
(SAP_PS_BC_PROJ_M app Mass Changes to
ASS_CHANGE_PC) Projects.
Project Monitoring - Business catalog New business catalog This new business cat 1NT (Project Financial
Project Ranking alog contains the new
Control)
(SAP_PPM_BC_PROJ_ app Manage Project
RANKING_PC) Rankings.
Project Systems - Business catalog Apps were added. The new apps Project 1NT (Project Financial
Project Financial Planning and Work
Control)
Controlling Package were added.
(SAP_PS_BC_PROJ_C
ONTRL_MC)
Project Systems - Business catalog Restriction types were The following new re 1NT (Project Financial
Project Financial changed. striction types were
Control)
Controlling added:
(SAP_PS_BC_PROJ_C
● Joint Venture
ONTRL_MC)
Master
(JV_MASTER)
This restriction
type applies to the
Project Control
app.
● Project Type
(PS_PRART)
This restriction
type applies to the
Import Financial
Plan Data app.
Project Systems - Business catalog Restriction types were The restriction type 1NT (Project Financial
Financial Control changed. Controlling Area/
Control)
(SAP_PS_BC_FIN_CO Responsible Cost
NTRL_MC) Center
(PS_FKOKR_FKSTL)
was replaced by the re
striction type
Responsible Cost
Center (PS_FKSTL).
Project Systems - Business catalog Restriction types were The restriction type 1NT (Project Financial
Project Financial changed. Controlling Area/
Control)
Analytics Responsible Cost
(SAP_PS_BC_PROJ_FI Center
N_ANLYTC_MC) (PS_FKOKR_FKSTL)
was replaced by the re
striction type
Responsible Cost
Center (PS_FKSTL).
Related Information
The trigonometric functions sin, cos and tan are supported for integer and float characteristics.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 22T (Set up Configurable Bill of Material using Variant Con
figuration)
Related Information
With this feature, you are able to see additional information to help resolve an inconsistent configuration,
including object dependency documentation.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 22T (Set up Configurable Bill of Material using Variant Con
figuration)
Related Information
Configuration Status
With this feature, you can use the following enhancements in the Simulate Configuration Models app:
Expand the high-level trace messages and see the following details related to the characteristic:
● Object Dependency
● Variant Tables
● Characteristic value before and after the object dependency was executed
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
With this feature, you can implement the following two BAdIs:
● VCH_HL_PRE_VALIDATE_ASSIGN
This BAdI allows you to make changes to all the characteristic value assignments on every active instance
of the configuration state (including all not validated changes) since the last configuration validation
roundtrip.
● VCH_HL_POST_VALIDATE_ASSIGN
This BAdI allows you to make changes to all the characteristic value assignments on every active instance
of the configuration state directly after the model was configured.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 22T (Set up Configurable Bill of Material using Variant Con
figuration)
Related Information
This features provides an enterprise search to find classification classes based on the following basic
attributes:
● Class name
● Class description
● Keyword
● Characteristics (name and description) assigned to the class
Technical Details
Type New
This features provides an enterprise search to find classification characteristics based on the following basic
attributes:
● Characteristic name
● Characteristic description
● Characteristic value
● Characteristic value description
Technical Details
Type New
This feature enables you to manage the change record of product structure variants. You can select existing
variants in product structures to add into a change record as a change object, and navigate to the target
product structure to apply changes.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
Product Structure
Manage Engineering Changes
This feature enables you to create new product structures and maintain the objects of existing product
structures, for example, a product item, a product variant, and a product item variant. You can also view the
objects that are related to their respective product structures in a customizable worklist.
Type New
Related Information
This feature enables you to maintain product structure nodes where the selected product structure node is
used. You can use the where-used function to display its existing parents or create new parents. If the selected
node is a product view, the where-used list displays the immediate parent, which can be a product family or a
product view. If the selected node is a product item, the where-used list displays the immediate parent, which
can be a product family or a product view.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
With this feature you can now calculate cost and nutrient contribution of each formula item using dedicated
reference quantities. You can also calculate in percentage the composition contribution of each formula item to
the primary output, and identify how selected composition items appear in the recipe.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
● Calculate the cost contribution of each formula item using a dedicated reference quantity.
● Calculate the nutrient contribution of each formula item using a dedicated reference quantity.
● Calculate the composition of each component of a formula item. You can visualize the contribution against
the Primary Output (PO).
● Reorder columns within the contribution table, sorting them based on importance.
The Contribution view is available in the Manage Recipes app, under the Formula tab.
With this feature you can extend recipe header data with custom fields. You can then use these fields in various
recipe apps, such as Display Recipe and Recipe Finder, as well as enable them in the API for Recipe Header and
Formula (API_RECIPE)
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
With this feature, you can monitor product compliance events and reprocess failed events. When an event has
been processed, the initiator is notified in the central SAP Fiori launchpad notification area. This feature
increases data quality and consistency by keeping calculated results in sync with its base data.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
This feature recalculates compliance assessments based on various event triggers, especially if a new
compliance requirement version is activated. The Process Product Compliance Events app supports
asynchronous event processing for the activation of a new compliance requirement version, as well as
synchronous processing for other events.
Upon the activation of a new compliance requirement version, a background job to recalculate the relevant
compliance assessments is started.
Effects on Configuration
In the SAP Fiori launchpad settings, you can disable the notifications regarding product compliance event
processing. By default, the notifications are enabled.
Related Information
This feature makes the Product Compliance Relevant field available in the Unified Product API to ensure data
consistency for customers using both the Product Master Fiori app and update processes in background
programs.
Type Changed
With this feature, the regulatory content has been updated to comply with requirements related to Product
Marketability and Chemical Compliance. The content reflects globally increasing country coverage,
continuously deepening regional specifics, and regular updates based on new or updated regulations
worldwide. This feature also facilitates compliance checks by extending automation for data calculations,
broadening standardization to reduce effort, and covering changing business requirements.
Technical Details
Type Changed
The regulatory content is updated with 20 new compliance requirements and 30 updates of existing
compliance requirements.
In addition, the Activate Compliance Requirements app has been enhanced in the following ways:
● The expiration date of the previous compliance requirement version is updated automatically upon
activation of a new version.
● The updated and new compliance requirement versions are displayed in both the Active and New or
Updated views, which increases visibility.
● The activation of a new compliance requirement version is carried out in the background.
The Compliance Assessment app has also been enhanced for the following compliance patterns:
The activation of a new compliance requirement version is now carried out as a background job.
Related Information
With this feature, you can analyze what the impact will be on sales revenue, production (that is, affected
materials for products), and suppliers (that is, affected materials and suppliers of raw materials) if substances
on a monitoring list become restricted in the future. This enables you to stay up to date on regulatory changes
and plan potential actions if a substance must be replaced due to regulation.
Type New
Additional Details
You can view, filter, and group data, view displayed data by various dimensions, and navigate to the
Unpackaged Product - Basic Compliance Data app to get more information about the data.
With this feature, you can apply dangerous goods regulations to specific countries and specify the languages in
which dangerous goods data must be printed on sales and delivery documents.
Technical Details
Type New
When you transport dangerous goods into another country, you have to comply with the dangerous goods
regulations valid for this country. Compliance involves ensuring that the transport of a dangerous good is
allowed for the mode of transport you are using and that the dangerous goods documents are available in the
required languages.
Using the Apply Regulation - Dangerous Goods app, you, as a dangerous goods expert, can select regulations
that are applicable for a specific mode of transport in a certain country. The dangerous goods check that is
carried out in sales and delivery documents determines the classification of the transported product for the
specified regulation. Depending on the transport permission of the classification, the check either allows or
blocks further processing of the documents.
In addition, you can allow or forbid the transport of dangerous goods by a specific mode of transport. If you
select one of these options, the check always allows further processing of the documents or blocks them
independent of the classification of the transported product. These settings are useful if, for example, no
dangerous goods regulations are valid for a specific country.
SAP delivers applicable regulations and required languages for various countries. However, you can change the
data using the Apply Regulation - Dangerous Goods app.
Related Information
With this feature, you can analyze the dangerous goods classification of packaged products step by step from
different perspectives.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
Using the Analyze Packaged Dangerous Goods app, you can view classification data grouped by various criteria,
such as where you want to transport the product, how is it classified, or in which status the classification is. If
you select a value in one of the charts in the filter area, the data in the content area is adapted automatically to
display only the data that meets your selection. This feature enables you to easily get an overview of the
classifications of all your packaged products. If a regulation is changed, you can quickly identify the products
that have to be reassessed.
Related Information
To simplify the classification process using the Classify Packaged Dangerous Good app, you can now select
various regulations and specify the enclosure variant and the description for documents for all selected
regulations. You can also release all selected regulations in one step. In addition, you can check if the
dangerous goods data will be printed correctly on documents by viewing all descriptions in the required
languages.
Technical Details
Type New
If you have entered a description in the Classify Dangerous Good - Packaged Product app, the system reuses
this description in the Classify Packaged Dangerous Good app.
Compliance with dangerous goods regulations is an important component of product compliance to ensure the
safe transportation of dangerous goods. The dangerous goods management solution enables you to manage
data that is needed to classify and process dangerous goods according to dangerous goods regulations. This
data can be used in the delivery processes for transport checks and for printing dangerous goods data on
delivery documents.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
If a product has been marked as relevant for compliance in the product master, the system checks dangerous
goods data when a shipping specialist saves a delivery. If an item in the delivery has been classified as a
dangerous good, the system checks if all necessary dangerous goods data is available. If so, the system checks
whether transportation of the product is allowed, forbidden, or restricted.
If transport is not allowed from the departure country to the destination country, the system automatically
blocks the item and informs the shipping specialist about the issue.
If the dangerous good is not yet assessed, or the classification is not released, the item is blocked. In addition, a
request is triggered so that the product steward or dangerous goods expert can assess the data for the
product.
If transport is allowed under restricted conditions, the shipping specialist is informed that there are
restrictions, but the item can be processed further.
Dangerous goods data is not only used for checks in the delivery processes, the description of the dangerous
good is also printed on the documents in all required languages.
Related Information
Dangerous goods data is not only used for checks in sales processes, the description of the dangerous good is
also printed on documents in all required languages.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
The form templates include dangerous goods data if the goods are picked up by the customer and not
transported by the seller (that is, if the corresponding shipping condition is used).
For sales orders and sales order without charge, the delivery date and the confirmed quantity are excluded
from the output for items that are blocked by the dangerous goods check. Instead, the output contains the
information that further assessment is required before the relevant item can be delivered.
With this feature, you can filter on sales orders in the Sales Order Fulfillment - Analyze and Resolve Issues app
that are blocked due to a dangerous goods check. In the details, that is, in the Track Sales Order Details app,
you can display the dangerous goods status on header and item level for delivery blocks and delivery issues in
sales orders.
Technical Details
Type New
For more information about new functions in the Sales Order Fulfillment - Analyze and Resolve Issues app, see
Enhancements to Sales Order Fulfillment - Analyze and Resolve Issues and Track Sales Orders [page 456].
To support compliance with safety data sheet regulations, a safety data sheet check is integrated into the
processing of various sales document types. This feature checks all compliance-relevant products to
determine whether safety data sheets exist for the ship-to country and in the required languages. If a safety
data sheet is required but not available, a warning is displayed and, if necessary, a request for the safety data
sheet is created for the product-stewardship department.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
If a product has been marked as relevant for compliance in the product master, the system checks safety data
sheet data when an internal sales representative saves a sales document. If an item in the sales document is
relevant for the check, the system first verifies that a ship-to country and the address of the sales organization
is given. If not, a warning is created and the user is informed about the missing data.
As a next step, the system verifies whether, for the ship-to country, safety data sheets are required. If no safety
data sheet is required for a ship-to country, the check for the item is completed successfully. If the ship-to
country requires safety data sheets, the system checks whether the documents exist in all required languages.
If no released safety data sheets are available or languages are missing, the system raises a warning for the
item, informs the user, and creates a request for the product stewardship specialist.
Effects on Configuration
The system creates notifications to the product-stewardship department to complete missing data for checks
or to request the safety data sheets.
By default, these notifications are enabled. However, you can disable the notifications in the SAP Fiori
launchpad settings.
With this feature, you can view and manage a compliance requirement for safety data sheets. You can upload
safety data sheets to fulfill the requirements selected in the Unpackaged Product - Compliance Requirements
app and release documents for use in follow-up processes.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
A compliance requirement in Safety Data Sheet Management contains data that indicates in which languages a
safety data sheet is required for a certain country. Since only active compliance requirements are used in
safety data sheet-related business processes, you can activate the compliance requirements using the Activate
Compliance Requirements – Safety Data Sheets app.
You can create your own compliance requirements and review existing ones using the Manage Compliance
Requirements - Safety Data Sheets app.
Use
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
Technical Details
Technical Name of Scope Item 1R3 ( Engineering Bill of Material - Change Master Manage
ment )
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
● Enabled Joint Venture Accounting fields in enterprise projects and related work packages
● Enabled project currencies for reporting
● Able optionally to run budget availability control in project currencies
● Added app for creating project structures and maintaining control parameters
● Mass change project header fields
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
Placing chemical products on the market requires an efficient system support for handling mandatory
documentation as defined by regulators. This scope item covers the main process steps for the maintenance of
Safety Data Sheets for products.
Technical Details
Technical Name of Scope Item 3VR ( Manage Safety Data Sheets for Products )
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
● Include a ranking app that enables the user to do the central project review. The central review of projects
typically happens regularly (for example, quarterly). To ensure a smooth review process, the Project
Financial Controller ensures that all information required is available and that everybody is aware of the
dates of the review.
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
● Support product structures and multilevel bill of materials maintenance, controlled by change numbers
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
● Enable Joint Venture Accounting fields in enterprise projects and related work packages
● Enable project currencies for reporting
● Run budget availability control in project currencies (optional)
● Use SAP Fiori app to create project structures and maintain control parameters
● Execute mass changes of project header fields
● Use SAP Fiori app to create project structures and maintain control parameters. This App allows to display
the project structure and timeline by help of a Gantt chart, you can change e.g. plan dates and some basic
attributes of work package attributes, but you cannot create or change the structure
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
Technical Details
Technical Name of Scope Item 35E ( Research and Development Project Management )
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
Placing chemical products on the market requires an efficient system support for handling mandatory
documentation as defined by regulators. This scope item focuses on the maintenance of Safety Data Sheets
for products during Sales processes.
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
With this release, new configuration steps for making settings related to Service have been added to Configure
Your Solution in the Manage Your Solution app.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
New/changed
Configuration configuration ob Leading scope
Type of change for ... ject How to find it What you can do item
New SSCUI Data Protection Define residence Service → General Define residence 3D2 (Service Or
times for service Settings times for service der Management
transactions contracts, service and Monitoring),
orders, and service 3MO (Service Con
confirmations. tract Manage
ment)
New SSCUI Timesheet Time recording Human Resources ● Activate use 3D2 (Service Or
→ Time and Ex of overtime der Management
pense Manage categories in and Monitoring)
ment service orders
and service
confirmations
● Define over
time catego
ries
New SSCUI Item Pricing Condition type Service → Service Assign a condition 3D2 (Service Or
Order Manage type to service der Management
ment part item catego and Monitoring)
ries.
Changed SSCUI Procurement Employee Service Service → Service Assign a storage 3D2 (Service Or
Location Order Manage location to a serv der Management
ment ice technician. and Monitoring)
Effects on Configuration
Make your entries in Configure Your Solution, which is part of the Manage Your Solution app. In the Realize
phase, make changes to predelivered configuration settings or create new settings if needed. It may be
possible to create new settings by copying existing settings and adapting them. Note that to ensure data
consistency, the changes that you can make to predelivered configuration settings may be limited. In some, but
not all cases, you can delete new records that you have added.
For more information about the settings that are to be made in each configuration step, read the system
documentation. You access this documentation from within the configuration step using the Configuration Help
button.
Related Information
Changes to the Identity and Access Management (IAM) objects delivered for Service require you to recheck
your business roles and the business catalogs assigned to them. Ensure that the restrictions included in the
business catalogs are set correctly to allow your users to use their business apps as needed.
Type Changed
Use the Business Role Templates app to check the following business role templates or business catalogs and
their restriction types:
Note
You can also see which business catalogs have changed in the Business Catalogs app. Read the description
displayed for each business catalog in the system for more information about the authorizations controlled
by the catalog and its restriction types.
Service - Contract Business catalog New business catalog The new business cat 3MO (Service Contract
Management alog was assigned to Management)
(SAP_S4CRM_BC_CUS the Customer Service
T_CONTR_PC) Manager
( SAP_BR_CUSTOMER_
SRVC_MGR) business
role template.
● Manage Service
Contracts
● Schedule Billing
Document
Request Creation
Customer Service Business role template A new business cata A new business cata 3MO (Service Contract
Manager log was assigned to log Service - Contract Management)
( SAP_BR_CUSTOMER_ this business role tem Management
SRVC_MGR) plate. (SAP_S4CRM_BC_CUS
T_CONTR_PC) was as
signed to this business
role template.
Service - Synchronize Business catalog Changes were made to The following restric 3MO (Service Contract
Org Units the restriction types. tion types were Management), 3D2
(SAP_S4CRM_BC_CUS changed: (Service Order Man
T_SRVC_ADM_PC)
● The Sales Area / agement and Monitor
(SALES_AREA_OF agement)
FICE_GROUP) re
striction type was
added.
● The Allowed
Organ. Units
(CRM_ORD_OE) re
striction type was
removed.
Customer Service Business role template A business catalog was The Service - 3MO (Service Contract
Manager removed from this Synchronize Org Units Management), 3D2
( SAP_BR_CUSTOMER_ business role template. (SAP_S4CRM_BC_CUS (Service Order Man
SRVC_MGR) T_SRVC_ADM_PC) agement and Monitor
business catalog was ing), 3NI (Procure
removed from this ment for Service Man
business role template. agement)
Related Information
You can now enable Service in SAP S/4HANA Cloud to directly access and use the sales organizational
structures that belong to SAP S/4HANA Sales.
Note
The mandatory direct access of sales organizational structures replaces the former organizational
management setup for the sales structures in Service in SAP S/4HANA Cloud. Therefore, the use of the
For more information, see the relevant topics under Creating an Organization Structure on SAP Help Portal.
Technical Details
Type New
With this app you can now create and edit service contracts and service contract items. This includes both
service contracts created in the system and service contracts synchronized from external systems. You can
now display additional information that is relevant for service contracts and service contract items. In addition,
you can set up periodic billing plans to bill service contracts at regular intervals and enable auto renewal to
automatically renew a service contract item. A new item category of service contract items that enables this
app's new price adaptation functions has also been added.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
Service contracts contain header and item data. The header information includes service contract details,
items assigned to it, cancellation, organizational data, price information, billing, transaction history, related
change documents, and more. The item information includes item details, billing plan, cancellation, price
information, object list, product list, and more. You can personalize the assignment blocks to display
information as needed.
To use price adaptation functions for service contracts, you must use a product of item category SC Itm (Pri.
Adptn.) (SCN2) when creating a service contract item.
Auto renewal is only available for service contract items of item category Service Contract Itm (SCN1).
The new user interfaces that you use to create, display, and edit service contracts and service contract items
have effects on the extensibility of this app. The following UI element is not available as one of the fields that are
included in the personalization options for business users:
This app has been moved from the Service - Manage Service OrdersSAP_S4CRM_BC_CUST_SRVC_MGR_PC)
business catalog to the new Service - Contract Management (SAP_S4CRM_BC_CUST_CONTR_PC) business
catalog. Administrators should adjust business roles as needed.
Related Information
For long-term service contracts, prices of individual items are always determined once and then usually remain
fixed throughout the entire contract duration. For scenarios that require flexible pricing, price adaptation for
service contracts offers two methods of achieving this: One is to set the billing date, settlement start date, or
settlement end date within a billing request line as the pricing date of a service contract item, so that varying
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
To use price adaptation functions in the Manage Service Contracts app, you must use the new item category SC
Itm (Pri. Adptn.) (SCN2) for service contract items.
Related Information
Based on price agreements in service contracts, you can offer your customers lower prices for services and
service parts. Key users with the Pricing Specialist (SAP_BR_PRICING_SPECIALIST) role can create the
relevant condition records to maintain these prices or discounts for service contract items by using the Set
Material Prices - Sales app. Prices from the price agreements in service contracts are copied to the service
orders (resources-related) that are assigned to service contracts after service contract determination.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
To maintain the condition records, you can use the following condition types for service contracts:
Related Information
The system now automatically runs service contract determination to search for and display existing service
contracts to which your service orders (resource-related) can be assigned. The service contracts are
determined and assigned at item level.
Technical Details
Type New
This feature enables you to view the results of the daily job run for the auto renewal process. You can see
whether or not auto renewal was enabled successfully for a service contract item.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
You can now use additional fields in the following SOAP APIs for service contracts: Service Contract - Create,
Update, Service Contract - Send Confirmation, and Service Contract - Send Notification.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
For organizational units, the fields SalesOffice and SalesGroup have been added to the following service
nodes:
● ServiceContractRequest_In - OrgUnit
● ServiceContractConfirmation_Out - OrgUnit
● ServiceContractNotification_Out - OrgUnit
For auto renewal of service contract items, the fields SrvcContrItemRnwlDuration and
SrvcContrItemExtensionDuration have been added to the following service nodes:
● ServiceContractRequest_In - Item
● ServiceContractConfirmation_Out - Item
● ServiceContractNotification_Out - Item
Related Information
As of SAP S/4HANA Cloud 1905, the Synchronize Organizational Units app is deprecated as it only served as a
temporary solution. Accordingly, this app is no longer visible on the SAP Fiori launchpad.
After this app is deprecated, the Sales organizational structures are directly accessed and used in service
transactions.
For more information, see the relevant topics under Creating an Organization Structure on SAP Help Portal.
Type New/Changed
Additional Details
● As a result, the business catalog SAP_S4CRM_BC_CUST_SRVC_ADM_PC is not available for any role
assignments.
● The app is no longer available for the Customer Service Manager role.
Use the Business Role Templates app to check business role templates or business catalogs.
This feature enables you to use a quick create for service orders. Only minimal data input is required to create
service orders with life cycle status Open. You can continue to edit or release the service orders you have
created in the Manage Service Orders app.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
This feature enables you to create service confirmations by using a quick create function. To create a service
confirmation assigned to a service order, the service order must have the status Released. When you create a
service confirmation, the relevant information is automatically copied from the service order. You then must
provide a description and assign a service employee. The service confirmation will have status Open. You can
edit and complete the service confirmation in the Manage Service Confirmations app.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
This feature enables you to set a service confirmation to final. When you set a service confirmation to final, the
system checks whether all service confirmations assigned to the service order have been set to Completed. If
this is the case, the system sets the service order to Completed automatically.
Type New
Related Information
With this feature, customer service managers can define planned overtime in service orders and service
technicians can record unplanned overtime in service confirmations. Customers are charged either a higher
fixed or percentage-based rate depending on the pricing defined for the overtime category.
Technical Details
Type New
Effects on Configuration
To use overtime categories in service orders and service confirmations, you must activate this feature in the
Manage Your Solution app. You must then define overtime categories according to your business needs.
With this feature, the system automatically creates a purchase requisition when you add a service part item to
a service order. Procurement integration supports non-stock materials.
Price information for spare part items displayed in the system is updated using information from the purchase
order and the supplier invoice. Costs are initially derived from the goods receipt and updated from the supplier
invoice. Revenue is derived from the service order item (fixed price scenario) or the service confirmation item
(resource related scenario).
Technical Details
Type Changed
8.5 Analytics
With this feature, you can use several Core Data Services (CDS) views to manage service transactions.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
Name Description
Related Information
With this feature, you can change the display currency and filter data by organizational unit. Additional cards
offer insights into service transactions by providing information on total service contract values and expiring
service contracts, as well as incomplete and overdue service orders and average repair times. You can access
list pages and other apps to analyze and resolve issues.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Related Information
With this feature, you can display service contracts by contract value as well as various other key performance
indicators. You can display the profit margin of a particular service contract, service organization or region. A
range of filters and sorting options help you to obtain information. Communication features enable you to
share insights and analyses.
Technical Details
Type New
With this feature, you can display incomplete resource-related and fixed price service orders enabling you to
identify potential issues during the execution of service processes. A variety of filters and sorting options help
you to obtain information. You can navigate directly to other apps to resolve issues and take appropriate action.
Communication features enable you to share insights and analyses.
Type New
With this feature, you can obtain detailed information on confirmation issues and billing blocks affecting
service transactions. You can also display charts and lists of service transactions that haven't been fully billed
or contain errors. In addition, the cockpit also provides information on rejected service orders.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Related Information
Use
● Create/Change UIs: The Create and Change UIs for Service Orders and Confirmations are assigned to the
Customer Service Manager role
● Integration with Procurement: Automatic purchase requisition creation against service order line items.
Update the confirmations with the procurement cost from the supplier invoice, if the supplier invoice is
posted after confirmation
● Overtime: Booking overtime for services through confirmation and billing the customer based on the
overtime price for Time and Material services
Technical Details
Technical Name of Scope Item 3D2 ( Service Order Management and Monitoring )
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
With this release, new configuration steps for making settings related to Sales have been added to Configure
Your Solution in the Manage Your Solution app. In addition, changes have been made to some previously
delivered configuration items or configuration steps.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Application Component SD
New/
changed
Type of Configura configura How to find What you Leading Solution Solution Ca
change tion for ... tion object it can do scope item Area pability
New SSCUI ● Material Define Re Find this con You can de (No leading Sales Sales Master
serve Fields figuration un fine custom scope item) Data Man
group 1
in Material der Sales entries for agement
● Material Master material
group 2 Sales
groups.
Master Data
● Material
Managemen
group 3
t
● Material
group 4
● Material
group 5
New func General set Partner De Find this con You can now BD9 Sales Sales Master
tionality in tings for part termination figuration un delete part Data Man
SSCUI ner determi der Sales ner functions agement
nation you have de
Basic
fined in the
Functions system.
Effects on Configuration
Make your entries in Configure Your Solution, which is part of the Manage Your Solution app. In the Realize
phase, make changes to predelivered configuration settings or create new settings if needed. It may be
possible to create new settings by copying existing settings and adapting them. Note that to ensure data
consistency, the changes that you can make to predelivered configuration settings may be limited. In some, but
not all cases, you can delete new records that you have added.
For more information about the settings that are to be made in each configuration step, read the system
documentation. You access this documentation from within the configuration step using the Configuration Help
button.
Related Information
9.1.2.1 Tax per Document (Max Tax) for the United States
and Canada
With this feature, you can use tax per document so that Max Tax calculation rules are applied across multiple
items of a sales document. In addition, the use of tax per document improves system performance because
the call to the external tax system occurs once for the entire document, instead of numerous times for each
item.
Tax per document is part of the country-specific product assistance for tax calculation in Sales for the United
States and Canada that explains how you can automate the tax calculation for Sales in SAP S/4HANA Cloud
and an external tax system.
To make full use of the tax per document, you must configure pricing in Sales accordingly.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item BD9 (Sell from Stock) and all other scope items that include
Price Management
Related Information
The synchronous inbound OData service API_SLSPRICINGCONDITIONRECORD_SRV has been renamed from
Sales Pricing Condition Record - Create, Read, Update to Condition Record for Pricing in Sales – Create, Read,
Update, Delete. The service now enables external applications to delete condition records for pricing that are
used in Sales.
Type Changed
Scope Item BD9 (Sell from Stock), 3D2 (Service Order Management and
Monitoring), J13 (Service and Material Procurement -
Project-Based Services)
Additional Details
If you need to create an incident regarding this service, use component SD-MD-CM.
To be able to use this service, you as an administrator have to set up the communication scenario
SAP_COM_0294.
For more information, refer to the setup guides attached to the relevant scope items for Sales, Professional
Services, and Service in the SAP Best Practices Explorer under https://rapid.sap.com/bp SAP Best
Practices for SAP S/4HANA Cloud .
This interface Condition Record for Pricing in Sales – Create, Read, Update, Delete is available in the SAP API
Business Hub (https://api.sap.com/ ).
With this service (API_SALES_QUOTATION_SRV), you can now accept or deny approval requests for sales
quotations that cannot be processed without the consent of an approver.
Type Changed
Additional Details
Effects on Configuration
If you want to use this service for approving or rejecting sales quotations, you must define at least one approval
request reason for sales quotations in the Sales Document Approvals configuration steps found under
Manage Your Solution Configure Your Solution , filtering by Sales as the application area and Sales Order
Management and Processing as the sub application area. This reason must then be flagged as relevant for an
external workflow.
Related Information
The predelivered form templates for sales order and sales orders without charge now include information
about product compliance.
Type Changed
Scope Item BD9 (Sell from Stock), BDA (Free of Charge Delivery)
Additional Details
The form templates now include dangerous goods data if you use dangerous goods in sales processes.
For sales orders and sales order without charge, the delivery date and the confirmed quantity are now excluded
from the output for items that are blocked by a product compliance check (product marketability check,
dangerous goods check, or safety data sheet check). Instead, the output now contains the information that
further assessment is required before the relevant item can be delivered.
Effects on Configuration
If you have used these form templates to create your own custom form templates before, note that these
enhancements are not automatically included in your custom form templates. If you want to use these
enhancements, please copy over the changes to your custom form templates or create new ones using the
predelivered form templates.
Related Information
Two Core Data Service (CDS) views for sales contracts have now been released. You can use the CDS views to
obtain information about sales contracts and sales contract items.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
Related Information
Sales Contract
Sales Contract Item
With this app, you can display details and contextual information of a sales scheduling agreement on header,
item, and delivery shedule level. Examples include process flow, customer reference, requirements and delivery
relevance, customer fiscal year, and cumulative quantities. You can also extend the app according to your
business needs.
Type New
Related Information
With this app, you can search for, display, filter, sort, and group all sales scheduling agreements. You can also
extend the app according to your business needs.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
With this app, you can create sales scheduling agreements with delivery schedules. A sales scheduling
agreement is an outline agreement with the customer containing expected delivery quantities and dates. You
use a sales scheduling agreement as a basis for delivering materials.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
With this app, you can change sales scheduling agreements, as well as manually maintain and create delivery
schedules.
Technical Details
Type New
With this app, you can display scheduling agreements in greater details than with the Sales Scheduling
Agreement app. You can also print the sales scheduling agreement on header level.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
With this app, you can search for, create, copy, change, and display sold-to party assignments. You can also
display sold-to party changes in each sold-to party assignment. You maintain sold-to party assisgnments as
master data of sales scheduling agreements. Based on sold-to party assignments, the system determines the
appropriate sold-to party for each inbound delivery schedule in electronic data interchange (EDI) processing.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
With this app, you can search for, create, copy, change, and display delivery schedule processing options.
Delivery schedule processing options are saved as master data of sales scheduling agreements. Based on the
delivery schedule processing options, the system determines how to process inbound delivery schedules in
electronic data interchange (EDI) processing.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
With this service Sales Scheduling Agreement - Create, Read, Update, Delete (A2X)
(API_SALES_SCHEDULING_AGREEMENT), you can retrieve sales scheduling agreements, as well as create,
update, and delete sales scheduling agreements on header and item level.
You as a key user can extend this OData service according to your business needs.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
This interface Sales Scheduling Agreement - Create, Read, Update, Delete (A2X) is available in the SAP API
Business Hub (https://api.sap.com/ ).
With this service Delivery Schedule of Sales Scheduling Agreement - Receive, Update (B2B)
(SchedgAgrmtDlivSchedule_In), you as a supplier can receive and update the delivery schedules of the
sales scheduling agreements.
You as a key user can extend this SOAP service according to your business needs.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
If you need to create an incident regarding this feature, use component [SD-SLS-OA-EDI].
This interface Delivery Schedule of Sales Scheduling Agreement - Receive, Update (B2B) is available in the SAP
API Business Hub (https://api.sap.com/ ).
To be able to use this service, you as an administrator have to set up the communication scenario
SAP_COM_0444.
For more information, see scope item 3NR (Sales Scheduling Agreements) in the SAP Best Practices Explorer.
This feature enables you to create and manage workflows to optimize the approval process for sales orders.
The workflows allow you to define conditions under which to approve sales orders as well as define one or more
approvers.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
You can now use the configuration steps Define Reasons for Approval Requests and Assign Reasons for Approval
Requests to define the reasons why sales orders need to be approved (for example, whenever a net value is
higher than USD 1,000). With the Business Add-In (BAdI) Set Approval Request Reasons for Sales Documents,
you then define for which sales orders this reason is valid. Whenever a sales order matches these criteria, and
the corresponding workflow has been set up, the system automatically blocks the sales order and triggers an
approval request. The approver can release the document, send the document back for rework, or deny the
approval. You can see the approval status of documents in the Manage Sales Orders app and the Sales Order
object page. In the Sales Order object page, the approval request reason is also displayed.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
These configuration steps are now available for the key user from the Manage Your Solution app under the
application area Sales, sub application area Sales Order Management and Processing in the Sales Document
Approvals app. The configuration steps were previously available under the Sales application area and Basic
Functions sub application area.
Related Information
The predelivered form templates for sales order and sales orders without charge now include information
about product compliance.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item BD9 (Sell from Stock), BDA (Free of Charge Delivery)
Additional Details
The form templates now include dangerous goods data if you use dangerous goods in sales processes.
For sales orders and sales order without charge, the delivery date and the confirmed quantity are now excluded
from the output for items that are blocked by a product compliance check (product marketability check,
dangerous goods check, or safety data sheet check). Instead, the output now contains the information that
further assessment is required before the relevant item can be delivered.
If you have used these form templates to create your own custom form templates before, note that these
enhancements are not automatically included in your custom form templates. If you want to use these
enhancements, please copy over the changes to your custom form templates or create new ones using the
predelivered form templates.
Related Information
With this feature, you gain more granular control over how data is copied from an existing reference document
to a newly created sales document. You can influence the copying process on both header and item level. For
example, by defining the data transfer, you can influence specific fields on header and item level during the
copying process from reference document to sales document. By setting copying requirements, you can let the
system determine whether, in a given situation, the copying takes place at all.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
1. With the Custom Fields and Logic app, you can implement custom logic for the following Business Add-Ins
(BAdIs) and assign a unique filter value to the implementation:
Define Copying Rqmt for Sales Document (from Sales Sales: Sales Document
Document)
Define Copying Rqmt for Sales Document (from Billg Sales: Sales Document
Document)
Define Data Transfer for Sales Document Header Sales: Sales Document
Define Copying Rqmt for Sls Doc Item (from Sales Docu Sales: Sales Document Item
ment)
Define Copying Rqmt for Sls Doc Item (from Billing Docu Sales: Sales Document Item
ment)
Define Data Transfer for Sales Document Item Sales: Sales Document Item
2. With the Manage Your Solution app, you can perform the Define Data Transfer and Copying Requirements
for Sales Documents configuration step for the implementation type Business Add-In (BAdI). You can
define a routine number for the following process enhancement options:
○ Copying Requirement - Billing to Sales (Header)
○ Copying Requirement - Sales to Sales (Header)
○ Copying Requirement - Billing to Sales (Item)
○ Copying Requirement - Sales to Sales (Item)
○ Data Transfer for Sales Document (Header)
○ Data Transfer for Sales Document (Item)
You use this routine number in a later step during the configuration of the copying control for reference
document to sales document. To this routine number, you assign the filter value of the respective BAdI
implementation as the enhancement ID for the relevant process enhancement option task.
Effects on Configuration
You can change the Set Copying Control: Sales Document to Sales Document or the Set Copying Control: Billing
Document to Sales Document configuration step: For a selected reference document and target sales
document, you can configure the routine for the Data Transfer or the Copying Requirement field by entering the
routine number that you defined previously. You can change the copying control on header and item level.
As a result, the system executes the assigned BAdI implementations during the copying process.
Related Information
Custom Logic: Data Transfer and Copying Requirements for Sales Documents
When you use this service (SalesOrderBulkReplication_Out) to replicate sales orders, it now reflects
status changes due to the creation of follow-up documents (for example, deliveries or billing documents). This
means that any changes of the delivery status or the billing status of the sales order in your system trigger
another replication to update the status.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
Effects on Configuration
If you have used this service before and you want any status changes to be reflected in the replication, please
use the Communication Arrangements app to reactivate your communication arrangements. In the app, search
for communication scenario ID SAP_COM_0287, select your arrangements, and reactivate them.
With this service (API_SALES_ORDER_SRV), you can now handle external payments and approvals of sales
orders.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item BD9 (Sell from Stock), 1QI (Opportunity-to-Order with Third-
Party Sales Force Automation Apps)
Additional Details
You can now use external payments (also known as wallet payments) for sales orders that are created, for
example, in a Web shop.
You can also accept or deny approval requests for sales orders that cannot be processed without the consent
of an approver.
In addition, you can now use the following fields on the A_SalesOrder node:
● CustomerTaxClassification1
● TaxDepartureCountry
● VATRegistrationCountry
If you want to use this service for approving or rejecting sales orders, you must define at least one approval
request reason for sales orders in the Sales Document Approvals configuration steps found under Manage
Your Solution Configure Your Solution , filtering by Sales as the application area and Sales Order
Management and Processing as the sub application area. This reason must then be flagged as relevant for an
external workflow.
Related Information
With this synchronous service, you can simulate a sales order to retrieve information regarding pricing,
availability and credit limit. The result is provided synchronously. The simulated sales order is not saved.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
● Pricing
● Availability check
● Credit limit check
With this feature, the following two new types of billing document request (BDR) are introduced:
● External debit billing document request (BDR type BDRD), used for creating debit memos (billing type L2)
based on external billing data
● External credit billing document request (BDR type BDRC), used for creating credit memos (billing type G2)
based on external billing data
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
The following table provides information about the two new external billing document request types. The
standard billing document request (type BDR1) is also included for comparison.
BDR1 External billing document A standard billing document Invoice type (for example,
request request that contains billing CBD1, CBD2, F2, CI01)
data from an external source depends on the chosen
(such as an integrated convergence use case.
All three billing document request types can be created by using the SOAP API Billing Document Request -
Create or the spreadsheet import function in the Manage Billing Document Requests app.
Related Information
You can use the filter-enabled Business Add-In (BAdI) SD_BIL_FLEX_NUMBERING to allocate newly created
billing documents of a given billing document type to one of several number range intervals. This enables a
flexible allocation of billing documents to number range intervals that is dependent on one or more attributes
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item BD9 (Sell from Stock) and other scope items that involve the
creation of billing documents
Additional Details
By mapping BAdI implementation filter values to routine numbers and then mapping each routine number to a
billing document type, each billing document type can be assigned to a different BAdI implementation.
Assigning a routine number causes the BAdI implementation to override the billing document type's standard
billing document numbering procedure.
When the system is configured correctly, the designated BAdI implementation is called whenever a billing
document is created whose billing document type has been assigned to a routine number. In effect, each
routine number represents a specific BAdI implementation that has been created for a specific billing
document type.
Note
If required, the same routine number can be assigned to several billing document types.
A typical use case example for this BAdI arises when you consider a multinational corporation that consists of
eight companies, each based in a different country, including Germany and Portugal. When a new billing
document of type F2 invoice is created by the German company, the custom logic tells the system to use the
next available number in number range interval 'G1'. When, on the other hand, an F2 invoice is created by the
Portuguese company, the custom logic tells the system to use the next available number in number range
interval 'P1'. In this way, within each billing document type, a different number range interval can be determined
and used for each company. This can, for example, help satisfy legal requirements for invoice numbering, which
can vary from country to country.
After implementing the BAdI and assigning a unique filter value to the implementation, you must perform the
following two configuration steps to enable the system to call the desired BAdI implementation when a billing
document of the relevant type is created:
1. In the configuration step Define Custom Routines for Flexible Billing Document Numbering, you register a
routine number and assign it to an enhancement ID by entering the BAdI implementation filter value as the
enhancement ID. This maps a specific BAdI implementation to the routine number. From the SAP Fiori
launchpad, key users can do this under Manage Your Solution Configure Your Solution Billing
Enhancements Define Custom Routines for Flexible Billing Document Numbering . . For more
information, see the documentation of the above configuration step.
Note
Note: To facilitate the mapping between routine number and BAdI implementation, the filter value of
the target BAdI implementation must be identical to the enhancement ID provided above. Key users
can set this filter value in the Custom Fields and Logic app.
2. In the configuration step Define Process Enhancements According to Billing Document Type, you must
assign the relevant routine number to the billing document type for which you want to trigger the specific
BAdI implementation. From the SAP Fiori launchpad, key users can do this under Manage Your Solution
Configure Your Solution Billing Enhancements Define Process Enhancements According to Billing
Document Type . For more information, see the documentation of this configuration step
Note
The custom logic can only function correctly if it refers to number range intervals that already exist in the
system. Key users can define number range intervals under Manage Your Solution Configure Your
Solution Sales Documents Define Number Ranges for Sales Documents .
Related Information
The inbound SOAP web service Billing Document - Create (BillingDocumentRequest_In), which enables
your system to create billing documents on the basis of external billing data, is now extensible. Key users can
extend the service by creating custom fields in the Custom Fields section of the Custom Fields and Logic app
and enabling the relevant service interface BillingDocumentRequest_In for these fields under SOAP APIs.
The custom fields can be filled by consumers of the service when they call it.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Related Information
The apps Create Billing Documents and Manage Billing Document Requests are now extensible with custom
fields. In addition, seven new business scenarios for the forwarding of custom fields throughout the billing
process are now available. Key users can extend the mentioned apps and enable the new scenarios for custom
fields of their choosing in the Custom Field and Logic app.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item BD9 (Sell from Stock), 3D2 (Service Order Management and
Monitoring), and other scope items involving billing docu
ment creation
Additional Details
Extensibility of the Billing Due List in the Create Billing Documents App
The following three business scenarios enable custom header fields in sales documents, billing document
requests, and delivery documents to be made visible in the billing due list within the Create Billing Documents
app.
● Sales Document Header Level to Billing Due List in business contexts Sales: Sales Document and Sales:
Billing Due List
● Billing Document Request Header Level to Billing Due List in business contexts Sales: Billing Document and
Sales: Billing Due List
● Delivery Header Level to Billing Due List in business contexts Shipping: Delivery and Sales: Billing Due List
A key user must enable the relevant business scenario for a specific custom field and also enable this field for
the Create Billing Documents app. Business users can then use the app's personalization options to add this
field to the billing due list as an additional column. They can also use the field as an additional filter and sort
criterion.
Filtering the billing due list according to custom fields is useful when you want to create combined billing
documents according to custom convergence criteria. For example, the custom header field in a delivery
document could be used to identify a specific container in a shipment. A billing clerk that is tasked with
creating a combined billing document for all orders that are shipped in the same container could easily achieve
this by using the corresponding filter settings to help identify the correct delivery documents to be converged.
Key users can now enable the following business scenarios in the Custom Fields and Logic app to enable the
flow of custom fields from service transactions to billing documents. One typical use case could be the
inclusion of a custom field in the service transaction to hold an additional pricing attribute. This attribute could
then be used for advanced tax calculation during pricing.
● Service Transaction to Billing Document at Header Level in the business contexts Service Header and Sales:
Billing Document
● Service Transaction to Billing Document at Item Level in the business contexts Service Item and Sales:
Billing Document Item
The following business scenarios enable the flow of custom fields from service transactions to billing
documents, from service transactions to pricing, and from billing documents to pricing, respectively on header
and item level:
● Service Transaction to Billing Document to Pricing at Header Level in the business contexts Service Header,
Sales: Billing Document, and Sales: Pricing Communication Head.
● Service Transaction to Billing Document to Pricing at Item Level in the business contexts Service Item,
Sales: Billing Document Item, and Sales: Pricing Communication Item.
With this release, four new configuration steps for the management of condition tables used in revenue
account determination have been added to the configuration item Revenue Account Determination. You use
these configuration steps to create and work with custom condition tables that contain rules for controlling
revenue account determination. You can specify combinations of billing document fields to determine which
revenue account a given billing document is posted to. Please also note that, within the application area Sales
in the Manage Your Solution app, the configuration item Revenue Account Determination has moved from sub-
application area Basic Functions to sub-application area Sales Billing.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item BD9 (Sell from Stock) and other scope items that involve the
posting of billing documents to financial accounting
Additional Details
The following new configuration steps are now available in the configuration item Revenue Account
Determination:
For more information, see the configuration help of each individual configuration step, which is located directly
in the system, within the configuration item.
Key users can access the configuration item in the Manage Your Solution app under Configure Your Solution
<set Application Area to Sales> < set Sub Application Area to Sales Billing> Revenue Account
Determination .
For settings that you make in three of the four new configuration step, the system creates extension items that
require manual transport to the production system. After saving your settings, a system administrator must
perform the following steps:
1. In the quality system, add the corresponding extension item to the export list and export the software
collection by using the Export Software Collection app.
2. In the production system, import the software collection by using the Import Collection app.
Related Information
With this feature, the process flow that is displayed on the Billing Document object page and on the detailed
billing document overview within the Manage Billing Documents app has been improved with the following two
enhancements:
As is standard for the process flow, you can navigate to related apps for each document type by choosing their
graphical representations within the process flow.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Related Information
Billing Document
Manage Billing Documents
Preliminary Billing Document
Sales Scheduling Agreement
With this feature, six list-based billing apps can now export their list of documents to a spreadsheet file (*.XLSX
format).
In each app, you can export all items in the currently displayed list to a spreadsheet file (*.XLSX format). All
columns that you have previously configured to be visible on the screen are then included in the spreadsheet.
Any filter settings that you have made are also taken into account.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item BD9 (Sell from Stock), 1MC (Convergent Billing), BKZ,
(Sales Order Processing with Invoice List and Collective Bill
ing), and other scope items that include the creation of bill
ing documents
Related Information
Billing document items contain a field called Reference Document. You can see this field when viewing billing
document items in detail in the apps Manage Billing Documents and Display Billing Documents. In previous
releases, standard system behavior was as follows:
As of the current release, the standard system always fills the Reference Document field with the document
number of the corresponding billing due list item (independent of whether the billing document has a
preceding preliminary billing document or not).
Example
You create preliminary billing document P300000001 for sales order 12345. Later, you convert this
preliminary billing document to a billing document. For each item in this billing document, the value of the
field Reference Document is 12345, which indicates that the items originate from sales order 12345.
(With the previous implementation, the value of the field for each billing document item would have been
P300000001, indicating that the items were copied from the preliminary billing document.)
This change was implemented to increase consistency in system behavior. It does not affect any of the related
processes.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Related Information
With this feature, you can record, approve, calculate the price for, and bill overtime hours that are performed by
consultants and other employees in the context of project-based services. To enable this, the system must be
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
The new functionality for overtime management is delivered as an end-to-end process. With this innovation,
consultants can record time using the new overtime categories in the timesheet, which must be configured
first. The overtime process can only be triggered by the consultant performing the work, who ultimately
decides which category to record time against. It is subsequently included in the approval and billing process.
The overtime category is included in the approval process for recorded working times through the My Inbox
app. Similarly, the project manager sees the overtime hours and category when releasing the billing proposal in
the Release Billing Proposals app. In case the overtime that a consultant has performed is linked with additional
charges to the customer, the overtime category can also be found when setting service prices through
condition types SOV1 and SOV2, which act as a surcharge. In the billing proposal, the overtime recordings are
visible as separate line items. To make these visible on the final invoice, the invoice output form must be
adjusted accordingly. To give an example, if a consultant records regular working time, working time on a
weekend, and working time on a public holiday, this would be visible on the invoice in three separate line items.
The recording and processing of overtime hours affects several lines of business, which are described in more
detail below.
Human Resources
Consultants and other business users can use the Manage My Timesheet app to record overtime for customer
projects. Timesheets must be approved by the project manager before they are transferred to controlling.
Professional Services
In the Release Billing Proposals app, in addition to the normally recorded time entries, you can now view billing
proposal items that are classified with an overtime category and description.
The items categorized with an overtime category display the final sales price under Sales Price per Unit.
● SOV1: Overtime
● SOV2: Overtime (%)
The access sequence SOV1 (Overtime) is delivered with the following mandatory fields: sales organization,
distribution channel, overtime and the following optional fields: customer, material.
You can use the Set Material Prices – Sales app or the Set Service Prices – Sales app to create, edit, and display
condition records for overtime categories. When a business user records overtime, and a debit memo request
is created with the Release Billing Proposals app, you can see the relevant price condition in the debit memo
request.
To make overtime hours visible on customer invoice output, developers can add the new item-level field for
overtime category (CATS_OVERTIME_CATEGORY) to billing output form templates. They do this by
downloading the required template in the Maintain Form Templates app and using Adobe LiveCycle Designer to
add the field (which is part of the BillingDocumentItem XML node) to the appropriate part of the form. The
edited form must then be re-uploaded within the same app. Adding the field enables overtime items to be
shown separately on all billing document output (for example, on the printout).
Effects on Configuration
In the Manage Your Solution app under Configure Your Solution, configuration experts can use the configuration
item Define and Maintain Settings for Timesheet Application to enable overtime and define overtime categories.
In this configuration item, they must perform the following configuration steps:
For more information, see the configuration help of these configuration steps.
Related Information
Manage My Timesheet
My Inbox
Release Billing Proposals
About Managing Your Solutions
Output Management for Sales Documents and Billing Documents
Form Templates
Maintain Form Templates
As of the current release, you can find information about omnichannel convergent billing in the Sales product
assistance under Order and Contract Management Solution Billing Omnichannel Convergent Billing .
Technical Details
Type Changed
Related Information
Solution Billing
You can use Settlement Management for your incentive and commission management, which can help you to
motivate external sales agents by providing accurate and timely commission payments. You can find
information about incentive and commission management in the Sales product assistance under Order and
Contract Management Incentive and Commission Management .
Type New
Effects on Configuration
You make configuration settings in the Manage Your Solution app under Sales Incentive and Commission
Management .
Related Information
Creation and management of approval workflows for credit memo requests as it functions in the current
Manage Sales Document Workflows app is planned to be deprecated with SAP S/4HANA Cloud 1908.
Technical Details
Type Changed
The current method of creating and approving credit memo request workflows will be deprecated as of SAP S/
4HANA Cloud 1908. In SAP S/4HANA Cloud 1908, you will be able to create credit memo request workflows
using the same highly flexible and customizable solution currently offered for the creation of sales quotation
and sales order workflows in the Manage Sales Document Workflows app. You will be able to create credit
memo request workflows using the deprecated solution until SAP S/4HANA Cloud 1911.
Related Information
The predelivered form templates for sales order and sales orders without charge now include information
about product compliance.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item BD9 (Sell from Stock), BDA (Free of Charge Delivery)
Additional Details
The form templates now include dangerous goods data if you use dangerous goods in sales processes.
For sales orders and sales order without charge, the delivery date and the confirmed quantity are now excluded
from the output for items that are blocked by a product compliance check (product marketability check,
dangerous goods check, or safety data sheet check). Instead, the output now contains the information that
further assessment is required before the relevant item can be delivered.
Effects on Configuration
If you have used these form templates to create your own custom form templates before, note that these
enhancements are not automatically included in your custom form templates. If you want to use these
enhancements, please copy over the changes to your custom form templates or create new ones using the
predelivered form templates.
Related Information
The new SOAP services Customer Return - Create, Update, Delete (A2A) and Customer Return - Confirm
Processing (A2A) are now available for external applications to integrate with customer return processing in
SAP S/4HANA Cloud.
● Customer Return - Create, Update, Delete (A2A) with technical name: CustomerReturnBulkRequest_In
● Customer Return - Confirm Processing (A2A) with technical name:
CustomerReturnBulkConfirmation_Out
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
These interface are available on the SAP API Business Hub (https://api.sap.com/ ).
Up till now, it was possible to predict the delivery delay by focussing on the predicted delay in creating the
planned delivery document. You can now also focus on the predicted delivery processing delay of the planned
goods issue date of a delivery.
You can also display the overall predicted delivery delay for both of these predictions, that is, whether the
delivery is likely to be late, early, or on time.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Related Information
In this app, additional standard fields from sales orders and billing documents are now available as dimensions
for planning.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
The following additional standard fields are now available for planning:
● Sales office
● Sales group
● Sales district
● Sold-to party
● Ship-to party
● Bill-to party
● Payer
● Customer groups 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5
● Material groups 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5
● Plant
● Cost center
● Company code
● Controlling area
● Business area
● Country key
● Destination country of sales order
● Region (State, Province, County)
● Region of sales order
Subsequently, you can compare your plan and actual data based on these dimensions in the Sales Performance
– Plan/Actual app.
The dimension Sold-to Party replaces the dimension Customer in some analytical apps within Sales. In these
apps, additional business partner functions (such as ship-to party and bill-to party) are now also available as
customer-related dimensions for planning and analysis.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 1O0 (Planning Apps for Sales), 2YJ (Predictive Analytics
Model Training - Sales)
Additional Details
The dimension Sold-to Party replaces the dimension Customer in the following apps:
The Manage Sales Plans app no longer supports uploading plan data that contains the Customer dimension.
Uploaded plan data that relates to the Customer dimension is now represented by the Sold-to Party dimension
automatically.
The CDS view C_BILLINGDOCUMENTITEMBASICDEX (Billing Document Item Extraction Data) has now been
released for BW extraction. This CDS view is app-independent, and is available for all external consumers who
want to extract billing document item data to SAP BW or other external systems.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
New CDS (Core Data Services) views have been released and an existing CDS view have been updated.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
Related Information
Technical Details
Type Changed
Related Information
With this app, you can analyze the monthly rolling trend of your customer returns based on flexible
combinations of dimensions.
Technical Details
Type New
You can analyze the following customer return-related KPIs in multi-dimensional reports:
KPI Description
Customer Returns Net amount of customer return items that are relevant for
billing or delivery
Return Item Quantity Quantity of customer return items that are relevant for deliv
ery or billing
No. of Return Items Number of customer return items that are relevant for deliv
ery or billing
Related Information
Scope item Order-to-Cash Performance Monitoring (BKN) is under consideration for deprecation in a future
release. Therefore, SAP recommends that you do not activate and set up scope item BKN. Instead, please use
the apps for sales monitoring and analytics.
Technical Details
Type Changed
You can find the configuration steps associated with scope item BKN in the Manage Your Solution app under
Configure Your Solution Sales Sales Monitoring and Analytics Process Activation Setting for
Performance Monitoring .
Related Information
Changes to the Identity and Access Management (IAM) objects delivered for Sales require you to recheck your
business roles and the business catalogs assigned to them. Ensure that the restrictions included in the
business catalogs are set correctly to allow your users to use their business apps as needed.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Use the Business Role Templates app to check the following business role templates or business catalogs and
their restriction types:
Note
You can also see which business catalogs have changed in the Business Catalogs app. Read the description
displayed for each business catalog in the system for more information about the authorizations controlled
by the catalog and its restriction types.
Internal Sales Business role template Some business The following business cat Sales Scheduling
Representative catalogs were as alogs are assigned to this Agreements (3NR)
(SAP_BR_INTERNAL_ signed to this business role template:
SALES_REP). business role tem
● Sales - Sales
plate.
Scheduling
Agreements
● Sales - Sales
Scheduling Agreement
Master Data
Sales - Sales Business catalog New business cat The following apps were Sales Scheduling
Scheduling alog added to this business cat Agreements (3NR)
Agreements alog and become visible in
(SAP_SD_BC_SSA_PC the Sales Scheduling
) Agreements business
group:
● Create Sales
Scheduling
Agreements
● Change Sales
Scheduling
Agreements
● Display Sales
Scheduling
Agreements
● Manage Sales
Scheduling
Agreements
Sales - Sales Business catalog New business cat The following apps were Sales Scheduling
Scheduling Agreement alog added to this business cat Agreements (3NR)
Master Data alog and become visible in
(SAP_SD_BC_SSA_MD the Sales Scheduling
_MANAGE_PC) Agreement Master Data
business group:
Sales - Sales Business catalog New business cat This business catalog is Sales Scheduling
Scheduling Agreement alog now assigned to the follow Agreements (3NR)
Display ing business role templates:
(SAP_SD_BC_SSA_DI
● Sales Manager
SPL_PC)
(SAP_BR_SALES_MANA
GER)
● Billing Clerk
(SAP_BR_BILLING_CL
ERK)
Sales - Manage Business catalog New business cat This business catalog is Internal Commissions
Personnel Settlement alog now assigned to the busi Settlement with SAP
Documents(SAP_SD_ ness role template Sales Sales Cloud(3TD)
BC_PSDOC_MNG_PC) Manager(SAP_BR_SALES_
MANAGER)
Sales - Monitor Business catalog New business cat This business catalog is Internal Commissions
Personnel Settlement alog now assigned to the busi Settlement with SAP
Documents(SAP_SD_ ness role template Sales Sales Cloud(3TD)
BC_PSDOC_MON_PC) Manager(SAP_BR_SALES_
MANAGER)
Sales - Release Business catalog New business cat This business catalog is Internal Commissions
Personnel Settlement alog now assigned to the busi Settlement with SAP
Documents(SAP_SD_ ness role template Sales Sales Cloud(3TD)
BC_PSDOC_REL_PC) Manager(SAP_BR_SALES_
MANAGER)
Sales - Release Business catalog New business cat This business catalog is Internal Commissions
Personnel Settlement alog now assigned to the busi Settlement with SAP
Documents ness role template Sales Sales Cloud(3TD)
Scheduling(SAP_SD_B Manager(SAP_BR_SALES_
C_PSDOC_REL_JOB_P MANAGER)
C)
Sales - Customer Business catalog New business cat This business catalog is SAP Fiori Analytical
Returns Analytics alog now assigned to the follow Apps for Sales (1BS)
(SAP_SD_BC_RETURN ing business role templates:
S_ANA_PC)
● Sales Manager
(SAP_BR_SALES_MANA
GER)
● Returns and Refund
Clerk
(SAP_BR_RETURNS_RE
FUND_CLERK)
Related Information
Use
This scope item describes the sales scheduling agreement process for component manufacturers (Sell-from-
Stock).
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
This scope item covers the settlement of internal commissions received from SAP Sales Cloud for the payout
of the commission amount to an employee.
Technical Details
Technical Name of Scope Item 3TD ( Internal Commissions Settlement with SAP Sales
Cloud )
Available In Germany
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
● PayPal as a Payment Service Provider (PSP) can be integrated into the sales order via the Digital Payments
Hub. This integration supports the PayPal two-step scenario where the PayPal authorization is passed from
Webshops to SAP S/4HANA Sales and the capturing is done in SAP S/4HANA Finance.
Technical Details
Technical Name of Scope Item 1Z1 ( SAP Digital Payments Add-on - Sales )
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
● Stock level replication from SAP S/4HANA Cloud to SAP Commerce Cloud
Technical Details
Technical Name of Scope Item 2TY ( B2B Order Fulfillment with SAP Commerce Cloud )
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
Technical Details
Technical Name of Scope Item 2YJ ( Predictive Analytics Model Training - Sales )
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
This scope item handles return order processing of non-stock items and corresponding compensation.
Technical Details
Technical Name of Scope Item 3TE ( Return Order Processing for Non-Stock Material )
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
The product assistance for Sourcing and Procurement has been enhanced with documentation regarding the
configuration of the flexible workflow for requests for quotations, supplier quotations, scheduling agreements,
centrally managed purchase requisitions, centrally managed purchase orders, and service entry sheets for lean
services. For each of the business objects, there is a list of optional and mandatory configuration steps,
including a comprehensive overview of what needs to be done. In addition, you get detailed information about
the apps that can be used for troubleshooting.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
This means that documentation for configuring the flexible workflow is now available for the following:
To access these documents, see Flexible Workflow for the Approval of Documents in Sourcing and Procurement.
Related Information
With this release, new configuration steps for making settings related to Sourcing and Procurement have been
added to Configure Your Solution in the Manage Your Solution app. In addition, changes have been made to
some previously delivered configuration items or configuration steps.
Technical Details
Type New
Application Component MM
New/
changed
Type of Configura configura How to find What you Leading Solution Solution Ca
change tion for ... tion object it can do scope item Area pability
Configuration Approval Set Activate Flex Find this conYou can 18J (Requisi Sourcing and Operational
step replaced tings for Pur ible Workflow figuration un adapt the tioning), 1XI Procurement Procurement
chase Requi for Purchase der flexible work (Central
sitions Requisitions Sourcing flow settings Requisition
and for purchase ing)
Procurement requisitions.
The flexible
Operational
workflow al
Procurement
lows you to
define appro
Requirements val processes
Processing for purchase
requisitions
according to
your require
ments.
Configuration Maintenance Maintain Find this con You can add 18J (Requisi Sourcing and Operational
step added of Requisi Requisition figuration un and maintain tioning), 1XI Procurement Procurement
tioning ing Groups der requisitioning (Central
Groups for Sourcing groups for Requisition
Purchase and purchase ing)
Requisitions Procurement requisitions.
Operational
Procurement
Requirements
Processing
Configuration Smart Enter Define Ma Find this con You can acti 3UH (Image- Sourcing and Integration
step changed prise Intelli chine Learn figuration un vate the Based Order Procurement
gence ing Scenarios der Image-Based ing)
Sourcing Buying ma
and chine learn
Procurement ing scenario.
Integration
Smart
Enterprise
Intelligence
Effects on Configuration
Make your entries in Configure Your Solution, which is part of the Manage Your Solution app. In the Realize
phase, make changes to predelivered configuration settings or create new settings if needed. It may be
For more information about the settings that are to be made in each configuration step, read the system
documentation. You access this documentation from within the configuration step using the Configuration Help
button.
Related Information
The synchronous inbound OData service API_PURGPRICINGCONDITIONRECORD_SRV has been renamed from
Purchasing Pricing Condition Record - Read to Condition Record for Pricing in Purchasing – Create, Read,
Update, Delete. The service now enables external applications to create, update, and delete condition records
for pricing that are used in Purchasing.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
If you need to create an incident regarding this service, use component SD-MD-CM.
To be able to use this service, you as an administrator have to set up communication scenario SAP_COM_0294.
For more information, refer to the setup guides attached to the relevant scope items for Sourcing and
Procurement, for example, J45 (Procurement of Direct Materials) in the SAP Best Practices Explorer under
https://rapid.sap.com/bp SAP Best Practices for SAP S/4HANA Cloud Sourcing and Procurement .
This interface Condition Record for Pricing in Purchasing– Create, Read, Update, Delete is available in the SAP
API Business Hub (https://api.sap.com/ ).
The OData service Purchase Requisition - Read, Create, Update, Delete (API_PURCHASEREQ_PROCESS_SRV)
now enables you to create and update purchase requisitions for external systems. You can now create multiple
account assignments, include item note texts and perform standalone (non-batch) operations - create, read
and update.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 18J (Requisitioning), 1ZM (SAP Ariba Buying and Invoicing
Integration), 22K (Contingent Workforce Procurement via
SAP Fieldglass), BNX (Consumable Purchasing), J13 (Serv
ice and Material Procurement - Project-Based Services), J45
(Procurement of Direct Materials)
Additional Details
If you need to create an incident regarding this service, use component MM-PUR-REQ.
To be able to use this service, you as an administrator have to set up communication scenario SAP_COM_0102
or SAP_COM_0292.
For more information, refer to the setup guides attached to the relevant scope items for Sourcing and
Procurement, for example, J45 (Procurement of Direct Materials) in the SAP Best Practices Explorer under
https://rapid.sap.com/bp SAP Best Practices for SAP S/4HANA Cloud Sourcing and Procurement .
This interface Purchase Requisition – Read, Create, Update, Delete is available in the SAP API Business Hub
(https://api.sap.com/ ).
The service Supplier Invoice - Create (A2A) (SupplierInvoiceS4Request_In) for creating supplier invoices
in SAP S/4HANA Cloud from external systems has been enhanced.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
● The error handling for this inbound service has changed. If an inbound service request leads to an error, an
administrator can view this service request in the Message Dashboard app. If he decides to cancel the
service request in this app, an outbound message is triggered via the outbound service Supplier Invoice –
Send Status Update Notifications (InvoiceStatusUpdateNotification_Out) and transfers details
about the error. The details include:
○ The code of the error message in the SAP S/4HANA system
○ The message class in SAP S/4HANA system
○ The text of the error message
These services and their documentation are available in the SAP API Business Hub (https://api.sap.com/ ).
Technical Details
Type Changed
Related Information
You can now get notifications for contract consumption prediction details on your home screen. You can
navigate to the Purchase Contract Item app from these notifications.
Type Changed
The integration of the purchase scheduling agreement functionality of SAP S/4HANA Cloud with external
suppliers allows buyers to send scheduling agreement releases, that is, forecast delivery schedules and JIT
delivery schedules, to suppliers using an external SAP system. Follow-on documents of scheduling agreement
releases (advanced shipping notifications and supplier invoices) can be transferred from the external supplier
system to SAP S/4HANA Cloud.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
With this interface Delivery Schedule of Purchase Scheduling Agreement - Send, Update (B2B)
(SchedulingAgreementDeliverySchedule_Out), you as a buyer can send and update the delivery
schedules of purchase scheduling agreements.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
If you need to create an incident regarding this service, use component [MM-PUR-GF-EDI].
This interface Delivery Schedule of Purchase Scheduling Agreement - Send, Update (B2B) is available in the
SAP API Business Hub (https://api.sap.com/ ).
Related Information
SOAP API for Delivery Schedules of Sales Scheduling Agreements [page 426]
With this app, you can now search for catalog items by image as part of the Image-Based Buying machine
learning scenario. You can select an image file or capture an image on your smartphone and search for catalog
items that match the image. In addition, when creating purchase requisitions, you can now assign a requestor
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
A prerequisite for using the Image-Based Buying machine learning scenario is successful completion of a
training job in the Schedule Export of Catalog Item Images for Machine Learning app. This involves exporting a
catalog containing a list of image URLs and corresponding product IDs to the SAP Leonardo system.
Effects on Configuration
The Image-Based Buying feature is available only if you have activated the Image-Based Buying machine
learning scenario in the Configure Your Solution app under Sourcing and Procurement Integration Smart
Enterprise Intelligence Define Machine Learning Scenarios .
Related Information
With this app, you can now use Excel-based data exchange to update settings for multiple users with the help of
Microsoft Excel. Furthermore, in the user details section, you can now assign requisitioning groups for
purchasing and select the required shop on behalf type.
Type Changed
Additional Details
● Group Based – You can shop on behalf of another user who belongs to the same requisitioning group.
● Company Code Based – You can shop on behalf of another user who belongs to the same company code.
● No Shopping on Behalf – You can restrict a user from creating shopping cart on behalf of another user.
The shop on behalf type determines the shop on behalf behavior in the app Create Purchase Requisition.
Related Information
This app enables you to schedule an export of catalog item images to be used in the Image-Based Buying
machine learning scenario. You first select a catalog containing the image URLs and associated product IDs
and then schedule a training job to export the data to the SAP Leonardo system. After a training job has
finished successfully, the machine learning service returns a list of matching catalog items when you search by
image in the Create Purchase Requisition app.
Type New
Effects on Configuration
Before you can schedule the export of catalog item images for machine learning, you need to activate the
Image-Based Buying machine learning scenario in the Configure Your Solution app under Sourcing and
Procurement Integration Smart Enterprise Intelligence Define Machine Learning Scenarios
The app Manage Workflows for Purchase Requisitions is planned to be deprecated with SAP S/4HANA Cloud
1911. Also, it is renamed to Manage Workflows for Purchase Requisitions - Obsolete as of 1911. Use Manage
Workflows for Purchase Requisitions – New app as an alternative. Scenarios related to central requisitioning are
moved to the Manage Workflows for Purchase Requisitions – New app. They are no longer available in the old
app.
Technical Details
Type Changed
● You can activate workflows in either of the apps at a time. If you want to activate workflows in the Manage
Workflows for Purchase Requisitions – New app, you must deactivate all the workflows in Manage
Workflows for Purchase Requisitions - Obsolete as of 1911.
● The following central requisitioning scenarios are moved to Manage Workflows for Purchase Requisitions –
New app:
○ Overall Release of Central PR
○ Release of Central PR Item
Related Information
● This new app is a replacement for Manage Workflows for Purchase Requisitions - Obsolete as of 1911
(planned to be deprecated with SAP S/4HANA Cloud 1911).
● You can now set deadlines for workflow steps using this new app.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
With this new app you can, if required, edit specific fields in the purchase requisitions to which you are assigned
as an approver before approving them from the app My Inbox.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
Using this app, you can edit the following fields from My Inbox for a purchase requisition before approving it:
● Quantity
● Source of Supply
Related Information
The following new features are now available with this app:
● The sections Supplier Confirmation Control and Supplier Confirmations have been added to the app on
purchase order item level.
● If Public Sector Management (scope item 3QE) is active in your system, the new section Funds
Management is also available on purchase order item level.
● In case of missing authorization, the entries of the user in the app Manage Purchase Orders are reset by
the system.
Type Changed
Additional Details
● The new sections Supplier Confirmation Control and Supplier Confirmations of the purchase order item
enable you to view supplier confirmations and corresponding control settings.
● In the new section Funds Management, you can enter information for purchase orders without an account
assignment category, such as fund, grant, budget period, functional area, cost center, and G/L account.
Invoices created with reference to these purchase orders also have no account assignment category and
forward the information to Finance.
● If a user does not have authorization, for example, for the purchasing group, purchasing organization, or for
the plant entered, the system resets the previous entries.
With this app, you can now post a goods receipt for a selected purchase order item on the Purchase Orders tab.
When you choose the Post Goods Receipt button, you are directed to the Post Goods Receipt for Purchase Order
app, in which the selected purchase order value is entered automatically.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item J45 (Procurement of Direct Materials), J13 (Service and Ma
terial Procurement - Project-Based Services)
Additional Details
The Post Goods Receipt button is visible only to users who have been assigned the Inventory Manager role.
Related Information
With this app, you can now view an assembly flow diagram for purchasing document items generated by
Material Requirements Planning (MRP). For these MRP-generated items, you can display a flow diagram
showing the entire network for the subcontracting process – from the first component through to the final
assembly. For example, you can see which components were supplied to the subcontractor from which
supplier or plant, which organization is handling the next assembly step, and what components are involved.
Type Changed
Related Information
With this app, you can monitor the number of purchase requisitions for which the replication has failed, as well
as the jobs for which the source of supply extraction failed, in both the SAP S/4HANA hub system and your
connected systems. You can then navigate directly to the Central Procurement Interface Monitor or Central
Procurement Job Monitor apps, where you see more details about the problem and begin to investigate the
cause.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
With this app, you can see more detail about why the replication of purchase requisitions failed and at what
stage during the process. You can then navigate directly to the relevant application or transaction on the SAP
S/4HANA hub system or the connected system, where you can investigate the problem and begin to fix it.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
With this app, you can see more detail about why source of supply extraction jobs failed and at what stage
during the process. You can then navigate directly to the relevant application in which you can investigate the
problem, attempt to fix it, and then restart the job.
Type New
Related Information
With this app, you can now create central purchase contracts from centrally managed purchase requisition
items. You can also add purchase requisition items to a purchase order.
Technical Details
Type Changed
In the Schedule Import of Purchasing Documents app, you can now use input help for many of the entry fields
to help you make valid entries.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
Related Information
In the Create Purchase Order Centrally app, you can now specify various new information for the purchase
order.
Type Changed
Additional Details
On the header level, you can now specify the following information:
● Document Type
● Payment Terms
● Incoterms
● Incoterms Location
On the item level, you can now specify the following information:
● Material Description
● Quantity
● Price
● Tax Code
● Delivery Date
● Good Receipt
Related Information
With this feature, you can maintain the info record update code on the item distribution level of a central
contract. This change is then replicated in the Update Info Record field in your connected systems accordingly.
Type New
With this app, you can now edit the distribution percentage individually for specific purchasing organizations or
contract items within one or more central purchase contracts. This gives you greater flexibility when changing
distribution percentages at header or item level for multiple central purchase contract headers or items.
Technical Details
Type Changed
With this new app, you can monitor purchase requisition items that were created in the SAP S/4HANA Cloud
system (which acts as a hub system), and purchase requisition items that were extracted from the connected
systems. SAP S/4HANA, SAP S/4HANA Cloud, or SAP ERP act as connected systems.
Type New
Related Information
With this new app, you can display the number of purchase requisition items that were created in the SAP S/
4HANA Cloud system (which acts as a hub system), and the number of purchase requisition items that were
extracted from the connected systems. SAP S/4HANA, SAP S/4HANA Cloud, or SAP ERP act as connected
systems.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
With this app, you can use new header fields (Reporting Country, EU Triangular Deal, Payment Method
Supplement, and Invoice Receipt Date). The Enterprise Search is now available for supplier invoices.
Technical Details
Type Changed
method.
Invoice Receipt Date Specifies the date on which the invoice REINDAT
was received.
Note
The term journal entry replaces accounting document following a change in the underlying financial
architecture. While the basic concept – the accounting record for a business transaction – is the same,
journal entries enable a truly integrated accounting system.
You may notice that you still see the terms document or accounting document on the user interface and in
the documentation. Nevertheless, these accounting documents are journal entries since they are based on
the new architecture.
Related Information
You can use this new app to identify the average time taken to approve a purchase requisition from the time of
its creation. This app only considers purchase requisitions for which the approval process is based on the
flexible workflow. By default, the app calculates the average approval time from the previous year to date. The
average approval time is shown in days.
Type New
Additional Details
The average approval time is calculated for different cost ranges; low, medium, high, and very high. You can
specify the cost ranges in the following filters:
● Price Low-Cost
● Price Mdm-Cost
● Price High-Cost
Related Information
Technical Details
Type Changed
Use
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
● The Create supplier invoice app is available for subcontracting scheduling agreement
Technical Details
Technical Name of Scope Item 2NX ( Scheduling Agreement for Subcontracting Procure
ment )
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
● SOAP message available for JIT delivery schedule and forecast delivery schedule, inbound delivery, and
invoice, which can communicate with other cloud systems
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
● You can now generate invoices for the U.S. (a tax code issue was resolved)
Technical Details
Technical Name of Scope Item 22K ( Contingent Workforce Procurement via SAP Field
glass )
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
● Maintain additional data in a purchase order (from centrally managed purchase requisitions) before it is
created in the connected system
● Add a central purchase requisition item to an existing purchase order in the connected system
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
● Create or update a purchasing info record in the connected system at the time of distributing the central
contract
● Update multiple central contracts at a time using the mass update functionality
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
● Display journal entry and supplier invoice number after posting supplier invoice
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
You can order an item and procure it based on an image. You can use images from a local laptop to add items
into the shopping cart, or you can use a dedicated image based app to prepare a draft shopping cart and a
purchase requisition.
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
Technical Details
Technical Name of Scope Item 1JI ( Real-Time Reporting and Monitoring for Procurement )
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
● View all plants, across different countries, assigned to a cross-country purchasing organization in a single
view in the organization structure
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
The Schedule Deletion of ATP Results Log app is deprecated as of SAP S/4HANA Cloud 1902 and will be
deleted in SAP S/4HANA Cloud 1908. The app will not be replaced.
Technical Details
Type Deleted
Additional Information
To perform the activities previously executed in the Schedule Deletion of ATP Results Log app, use data
destruction object ATP_CHECK_LOG_DESTRUCTION instead.
Related Information
The Monitor BOP Run app has been enhanced to indicate if plant substitution has taken place during backorder
processing.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
If Alternative-Based Confirmation (ABC) is active when a backorder processing run takes place and results in
the requirement supplying plant for a requirement being substituted by an alternative plant, this is displayed
graphically. If the line item is selected, an additional dialog displays the original and substituted plant.
Related Information
The Configure Custom BOP Sorting app has been enhanced to log when a custom sort sequence was used
when a backorder processing run was executed.
Type New
Configuration Details
To display the logged data in the Configure Custom BOP Sorting app, go to Settings and activate the Used On
column for display in the Sequences table.
Related Information
The Configure Order Fulfillment Responsibility app has been enhanced with configuration functionality that
enables the order fulfillment manager to define if and how the order fulfillment specialist's worklist in the
Release for Delivery app is updated when changes are made to the requirements in underlying sales and/or
stock transport orders.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
The Release for Delivery app has been enhanced with functionality for dynamically updating the order
fulfillment specialist's worklist when changes are made to the requirements in underlying sales and/or stock
transport orders.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
The Configure Substitution Strategy app has been enhanced to enable the evaluation of alternatives to be
restricted according to the posting status of each individual line item.
Type New
Additional Details
When you create a new strategy in the Configure Substitution Strategy app, you can use the Consider
Alternative dropdown to decide if alternatives are always to be considered or if they are to be considered for
new requirements only or when existing requirements are changed.
Furthermore, Alternative-Based Confirmation now supports all confirmation strategies used in Backorder
Processing (BOP).
Related Information
Confirmation Strategies
Configure Substitution Strategy
Changes to the Identity and Access Management (IAM) objects delivered for Order Promising require you to
recheck your business roles and the business catalogs assigned to them. Ensure that the restrictions included
in the business catalogs are set correctly to allow your users to use their business apps as needed. This is of
particular importance if you wish to use the new Manage Characteristic Catalogs app.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Use the Business Role Templates app to check the following business role templates or business catalogs and
their restriction types:
Note
You can also see which business catalogs have changed in the Business Catalogs app. Read the description
displayed for each business catalog in the system for more information about the authorizations controlled
by the catalog and its restriction types.
IAM Objects
Name of IAM Object Object Type Changes with This Release Details
Internal Sales Representative Business role template A new business catalog was The business catalog ATP -
(SAP_BR_INTERNAL_SALES assigned to this business role Characteristic Catalogs is as
_REP). template. signed to this business role
template.
ATP - Characteristic Catalogs Business catalog New business catalog The Manage Characteristic
(SAP_SCM_BC_ATPPAL_CTL Catalogs app was added to
G_PC) this business catalog and has
become visible in the Product
Allocation business group.
Related Information
This new app enables you to adapt characteristic catalogs to suit your business needs for checking the
availability of materials for sales and/or stock transport orders against product allocation.
Type New
Additional Details
The Manage Characteristic Catalogs app is available if the business role Internal Sales Rep (R0080) is assigned
to your user.
Note that before you can use the app, business catalog ATP - Characteristic Catalogs
(SAP_SCM_BC_ATPPAL_CTLG_PC) must be included in the business role(s) created from the template
SAP_BR_INTERNAL_SALES_REP. Failure to do so will result in the app not appearing on the SAP Fiori
launchpad.
Related Information
The draft handling behavior of the Configure Product Allocation app has changed due to the new functionality
for adapting characteristic catalogs in the Manage Characteristic Catalogs app. This may have a negative
impact on draft product allocation objects for sales and stock transport oders when you upgrade to SAP S/
4HANA Cloud 1905.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Information
Draft product allocation objects created in SAP S/4HANA Cloud 1902 may contain erroneous data after you
upgrade to SAP S/4HANA Cloud 1905 if the Show Additional Characteristics button on the Select
Characteristics dialog was pressed when the draft product allocation object was created. To identify potentially
problematic draft product allocation objects in the Configure Product Allocation app, open existing draft
product allocation objects and press Add: if the Show Additional Characteristics button is not displayed on the
Select Characteristics dialog, the draft product allocation object must be saved or discarded prior to the
upgrade to SAP S/4HANA Cloud 1905 to prevent erroneous data after the upgrade.
Related Information
11.2 Inventory
Changes to the Identity and Access Management (IAM) objects delivered for Inventory require you to recheck
your business roles and the business catalogs assigned to them. Ensure that the restrictions included in the
business catalogs are set correctly to allow your users to use their business apps as needed.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Use the Business Role Templates app to check the following business role templates or business catalogs and
their restriction types:
Note
You can also see which business catalogs have changed in the Business Catalogs app. Read the description
displayed for each business catalog in the system for more information about the authorizations controlled
by the catalog and its restriction types.
Name of IAM Object Object Type Changes with This Release Details
Materials Management - Business catalog group An app was removed from The Create PI Documents-
Physical Inventory Mass the standard version of this Project Stock app was re
Creation business group. moved from this business
(SAP_MM_BC_IM_PI_DOC_M catalog group.
ASS_PC).
Materials Management - Business catalog group Some apps were removed The Post Goods Receipt, Post
Warehouse Execution from the standard version of Transfer Posting and Post
(SAP_PRC_BC_IM_WHSE_EX this business group. Goods Issue apps were re
EC_MC) moved from this business
catalog group.
Materials Management - Business catalog group Some apps were removed The Post Goods Receipt, Post
Warehouse Management from the standard version of Transfer Posting and Post
(SAP_PRC_BC_IM_WHSE_MG this business group. Goods Issue apps were re
MT_MC) moved from this business
catalog group.
Materials Management - Restriction type Changes were made to the The Company Code (BUKRS)
Inventory Processing restriction types. restriction type was added.
Overview
(SAP_MM_BC_IM_PROCESS_
OVP_PC)
With this feature, you can post the receipt of goods with reference to the purchase order with which you
ordered the goods. If a material is delivered for a purchase order, it is important for all the departments
involved that the goods receipt entry in the system references this purchase order.
In the Post Goods Receipt for Purchase Order app, you can now do the following:
● You can use optimized, predefined output forms in the output management, such as collection slips. You
can copy and adapt these forms for your needs.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Related Links
● Adjustment of documentation: The app supports the initial entry of stock balances. Alternatively, based on
your authorization, you can use the Post Goods Movement app for the initial entry of stock balances
Technical Details
Type Changed
Related Links
● Manage Stock
With this feature, you can make transfer postings within a plant.
In the Transfer Stock – In Plant app, you can now do the following:
● You can use the print function for a stock transfer of storage location to storage location in one step (that
is, movement type 311: Valuated Unrestricted-Use Stock to Valuated Unrestricted-Use Stock).
Technical Details
Type Changed
With this feature, you can get an overview of your material stocks. You can review your stock by the plants and
storage locations for which you are responsible:
In the Stock – Multiple Materials app, you can now do the following:
● You can use enhanced filter options for a refined search with the additional fields Batch, Shelf Life
Expiration Date, and Production Date.
● You can use optimized, predefined filter grouping for an easier filter selection. The filter criteria with
reference to the display currency have been renamed and grouped in the areas Stock Value in Display
Currency and Current Stock Value in Display Currency.
● You can extend the Stock – Multiple Materials app according to your business needs. In the Custom Fields
and Logic app, you can enable the usage of standard fields.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Related Links
With this feature, you can get an overview of the overdue materials for which a stock transport order has been
created. You can identify these materials to complete the stock transfer process or investigate potential
problems.
In the Overdue Materials - Stock in Transit app, you can now do the following:
● You can extend the Overdue Materials - Stock in Transit app according to your business needs. In the
Custom Fields and Logic app, you can enable the usage of standard fields.
● You can use the optimized tooltip in the bullet micro chart.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Related Links
With this feature, you can get an overview of the overdue materials for which a goods receipt (GR) was posted
into the non-valuated GR blocked stock. You can identify these overdue materials to complete the goods
receipt process or investigate potential problems.
In the Overdue Materials - GR Blocked Stock app, you can now do the following:
● You can extend the Overdue Materials - GR Blocked Stock app according to your business needs. In the
Custom Fields and Logic app, you can enable the usage of standard fields.
Type Changed
Related Links
With this feature, you can monitor and make time-dependent investigations of the slow or non-moving
materials in your stock. Based on these results you can react immediately with follow-on activities such as
scrapping or stock transfers.
In the Slow or Non-Moving Materials app, you can now do the following:
● You can now use an optimized structured filter bar with new and changed filter criteria. This supports you
in determining more easily and more accurately the materials with their different inventory turnovers
according to your business needs:
○ The filter Days w/o Consumption has been renamed Days with Low Consumption and its function has
been extended. When entering the number of days, you define the time period for the analysis.
○ You can now determine the use of a material in a bill of material (BOM) as a filter option (Use in BOMs).
○ You can now determine slow-moving materials based on the consumption to stock ratio (Slow-Moving
Indicator). The Slow-Moving Indicator represents the percentage of consumption quantity per year
with respect to the total stock quantity on the reference date. Setting the filter with a value of 0, you
can search directly for non-moving materials. This corresponds to the behavior of the app in the last
release.
● The result table has been adapted according to the filter criteria.
Type Changed
Related Links
With this feature, you can monitor the most important information and tasks relevant for you as an inventory
analyst right now. The information is displayed on a set of actionable cards. You can therefore focus on the
most important tasks, enabling faster decisions and immediate action.
In the Inventory Analysis Overview app, you can now do the following:
● You can use the list card More than 100 Days without Consumption with a new chart visualization. The chart
displays values and the number of materials grouped in intervals of 50 days for days without consumption.
● You can use the two list cards Monitor Batches by Longest Time in Storage and Monitor Batches by Shortest
Expiration Date with an optimized navigation feature:
○ You can navigate from the list card header to the Stock Multiple Materials app with the corresponding
parameters.
○ You can navigate from the item to the Stock Multiple Materials app, which displays the selected
material in more detail.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item BGG (SAP Fiori Analytical Apps for Inventory and Warehouse
Management)
Related Links
With this feature, you can monitor and make time-dependent investigations of your dead stock. The Dead
Stock Analysis app supports you in your daily work, for example, as an inventory manager, to achieve maximum
inventory accuracy and subsequently to optimize the inventory situation in your stock.
In the Dead Stock Analysis app, you can now do the following:
● You can extend the Dead Stock Analysis app according to your business needs. In the Custom Fields and
Logic app, you can enable the usage of standard fields.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Related Links
With this feature, you can effectively monitor inventory Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) to ensure forecast
and inventory accuracy in a timely manner and in a meaningful visualization. This app supports you for
example, as an inventory analyst in your daily work. You can identify critical KPIs to monitor the inventory flow
or investigate potential problems.
In the Inventory KPI Analysis app, you can now do the following:
● You can extend the Inventory KPI Analysis app according to your business needs. In the Custom Fields and
Logic app, you can enable the usage of standard fields.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item BGG (SAP Fiori Analytical Apps for Inventory and Warehouse
Management)
Related Links
With this feature, you can analyze the goods movements in your company.
In the Goods Movement Analysis app, you can now do the following:
● You can extend the Goods Movement Analysis app according to your business needs. In the Custom Fields
and Logic app, you can enable the usage of standard fields.
Type Changed
Related Links
With this feature you can display a list of material document items and display the material document details of
a selected material document item. In addition, you can reverse a material document.
In the Material Documents Overview app, you can now do the following:
● You can use optimized, predefined output forms in the output management, such as collection slips. You
can copy and adapt these forms for your needs.
Technical Details
Type Changed
With this feature, you can use different kinds of physical inventory strategies, such as annual counts,
continuous counts, and cycle counts. You can use specific criteria such as storage location, materials, or
physical inventory document numbers. The app provides an overview of a physical inventory document and all
its related detailed information.
In the Physical Inventory Document Overview app, you can now do the following:
● You can extend the Physical Inventory Document Overview app according to your business needs. In the
Custom Fields and Logic app, you can enable the usage of standard fields.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Related Links
With this feature, you can analyze physical inventory in your company to identify opportunities for process
improvement.
● You can extend the Physical Inventory Analysis app according to your business needs. In the Custom Fields
and Logic app, you can enable the usage of standard fields.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Related Links
With this feature, you can display lists of materials and choose to create physical inventory documents for
selected materials or groups of materials. These documents are used as the basis for planning and performing
a physical inventory, for recording count data, and for posting any differences revealed by the count. The app
helps you find and select materials due to be counted, and you can create physical inventory documents for the
materials directly from the detail list.
In the Create Physical Inventory Documents app, you can now do the following:
● You can extend the Create Physical Inventory Documents app according to your business needs. In the
Custom Fields and Logic app, you can enable the usage of standard fields.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Related Links
With this feature, you can extend the Adobe® output forms of various material documents according to your
business needs.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
You can extend the Adobe® output forms of the following material documents according to your business
needs:
Related Information
11.3 Warehousing
With this app, you can process the warehouse tasks destined for picking. In the overview screen, you can view
all relevant information about the pick warehouse tasks in your warehouse. You can directly choose one or
multiple warehouse tasks for confirmation or cancellation. You can print a pick list with this app. You can also
view the details of a warehouse task or handle an exception.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
With this feature, change documents are written when you create, change, or delete a control cycle in
Warehouse Management.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
When a production supply area (PSA) that is relevant to Warehouse Management is created in Production
Planning, or if the production supply area is used in a control cycle supplied by Warehouse Management, it is
automatically replicated to Warehouse Management. Now when you maintain a control cycle in Production
Planning, you can navigate directly to the dependent control cycle in Warehouse Management to maintain it as
well.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Related Information
A new replenishment strategy is available for stock transfer via Kanban. With this new replenishment strategy,
warehouse tasks to replenish a kanban container are automatically created when you set the kanban container
to empty. You can confirm the warehouse tasks either in a kanban app or in Warehouse Management.
Type New
Related Information
This feature allows you to work with warehouse resources in the Warehouse Monitor app under Resource
Management > Resource. You can create or delete resources, and you can log off users from a resource, not
only yourself but also other users.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Related Information
Warehouse Monitor
This feature allows you to search for warehouse tasks via the kanban container ID in the Warehouse Monitor
app under Documents > Warehouse Tasks. You can also find the kanban container ID in the detailed fields of the
warehouse task.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Related Information
Warehouse Monitor
With this feature, you can access the Physical Stock node under Documents > Inspection. This node displays
the physical stock for inspection lots with no usage decision yet. You can also display the inspection lot from
the Inspection node.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Related Information
Warehouse Monitor
This feature enables you to search for storage bins or warehouse product data directly from the Fiori launchpad
in a simple-to-use search function. The searches allow you to get an overview of the storage bins or warehouse
product data, navigate to additional information, and navigate to apps with additional functions.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
As a warehouse clerk you can use the enterprise search for storage bins for the following purposes:
As a warehouse clerk you can use the enterprise search for warehouse products for the following purposes:
With this service (API_WAREHOUSE_ORDER_TASK), you can integrate warehouse orders and warehouse tasks
in your external applications. This allows you to retrieve warehouse orders and warehouse tasks; to confirm,
confirm with exceptions, or cancel warehouse tasks; and to assign or unassign warehouse orders to warehouse
resources.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
This interface Process Warehouse Tasks - Read, Update (A2X) is available on the SAP API Business Hub
(https://api.sap.com ).
To learn more about this service interface, see the documentation linked to this service in the SAP API Business
Hub.
With this service (API_WAREHOUSE_RESOURCE), you can integrate warehouse resources in your external
applications. This allows you to retrieve warehouse resources; to create or delete warehouse resources; and to
log on to or log off of warehouse resources.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
This interface Warehouse Resource - Create, Read, Update, Delete (A2X) is available on the SAP API Business
Hub (https://api.sap.com ).
To learn more about this service interface, see the documentation linked to this service in the SAP API Business
Hub.
Related Information
Changes to the Identity and Access Management (IAM) objects delivered for Warehouse Management require
you to recheck your business roles and the business catalogs assigned to them. Ensure that the restrictions
included in the business catalogs are set correctly to allow your users to use their business apps as needed.
Inform your end users of the changes to the business group names on the SAP Fiori launchpad.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Use the Business Role Templates app to check the following business role templates or business catalogs and
their restriction types:
Note
You can also see which business catalogs have changed in the Business Catalogs app. Read the description
displayed for each business catalog in the system for more information about the authorizations controlled
by the catalog and its restriction types.
WM - Warehouse Floor business catalog An app was added to The Process 3BR (Warehouse In
this catalog. Warehouse Tasks - bound Processing),
(SAP_SCM_BC_EWM_E
Picking app was 3BS (Warehouse Out
XEC_F_PC)
added. bound Processing),
3BT (Warehouse Ad
Hoc Goods Issue), 3DV
(Warehouse Produc
tion Integration), 3BU
(Warehouse Posting
Changes), 3BW (Ware
house Internal Repack
ing), 3M0 (Quality
Management in Ware
housing), 3VT (Ware
house Kanban Supply
into Production)
Warehouse Clerk business role template This business role tem The additional depend 3BR (Warehouse In
(EWM) plate was enhanced ent business catalog is bound Processing),
with a dependent busi Master Data - Product 3BS (Warehouse Out
(SAP_BR_WAREHOUSE
ness catalog. Display bound Processing),
_CLERK_EWM)
(SAP_CMD_BC_PRODU 3BT (Warehouse Ad
CT_DSP_PC). It ena Hoc Goods Issue), 3DV
bles the display of (Warehouse Produc
product master data tion Integration), 3BU
within the Warehouse (Warehouse Posting
Clerk (EWM) role. Changes), 3BW (Ware
house Internal Repack
ing), 3M0 (Quality
Management in Ware
housing), 3VT (Ware
house Kanban Supply
into Production), 3BX
(Warehouse Physical
Inventory), 3W0 (Re
source Management in
Warehousing)
Warehouse Setup business group This business group The new name is 3BR (Warehouse In
was renamed to make Warehouse Setup bound Processing),
it clear that it refers to (WM). 3BS (Warehouse Out
warehouse manage bound Processing),
ment content. 3BX (Warehouse Phys
ical Inventory), 3DV
(Warehouse Produc
tion Integration), 3BW
(Warehouse Internal
Repacking), 3VT
(Warehouse Kanban
Supply into Produc
tion)
Warehouse Processing business group This business group The new name is 3BR (Warehouse In
was renamed to make Warehouse Processing bound Processing),
it clear that it refers to (WM). It more pre 3BS (Warehouse Out
warehouse manage cisely describes this bound Processing),
ment content. group and helps to dif 3BT (Warehouse Ad
ferentiate it from the Hoc Goods Issue), 3DV
business group (Warehouse Produc
Warehouse Processing tion Integration), 3BU
for inventory manage (Warehouse Posting
ment content. Changes), 3BW (Ware
house Internal Repack
ing), 3BX (Warehouse
Physical Inventory),
3M0 (Quality Manage
ment in Warehousing),
3VT (Warehouse Kan
ban Supply into Pro
duction), 3W0 (Re
source Management in
Warehousing)
Related Information
You can now display the output for each item in a delivery.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
This feature enables you, as a key user, to use the Business Add-In (BAdI) Modify Items for Picklist
(LE_SHP_PICKLIST_MODIFY_ITEMS) to implement custom logic in your applications. This extensibility offers
you increased flexibility during delivery processing, so you can better meet your specific business needs.
Type New
Additional Details
To learn more about this BAdI, go to the Custom Fields and Logic app to display their specific documentation.
Related Information
This feature enables you, as a key user, to use the Business Add-In (BAdI) Determine EWM-Relevant Custom
Fields for Delivery (LE_SHP_EWM_RELEVANT_DETERMINE) to implement custom logic in your applications.
This extensibility offers you increased flexibility when defining which custom fields you want to distribute to an
EWM system, so you can better meet your specific business needs.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
To learn more about this BAdI, go to the Custom Fields and Logic app to display their specific documentation.
Related Information
With this release, a new configuration step for making settings related to Delivery Management has been added
to Configure Your Solution in the Manage Your Solution app.
Technical Details
Type New
Configura New/
tion for De changed
Type of livery Man configura How to find What you Leading Solution Solution Ca
change agement tion object it can do scope item Area pability
New SSCUI Delivery Item Define Find this con You can de 2TX (Direct Supply Chain Delivery Man
figuration un agement
Categories Delivery Item fine delivery Procurement
Categories der Supply item catego with Inbound
Chain ries. Delivery),
Delivery BKP (Accel
Management
erated Cus
tomer Re
Deliveries turns), BD9
(Sell from
Stock)
Effects on Configuration
Make your entries in Configure Your Solution, which is part of the Manage Your Solution app. In the Realize
phase, make changes to predelivered configuration settings or create new settings if needed. It may be
possible to create new settings by copying existing settings and adapting them. Note that to ensure data
consistency, the changes that you can make to predelivered configuration settings may be limited. In some, but
not all cases, you can delete new records that you have added.
For more information about the settings that are to be made in each configuration step, read the system
documentation. You access this documentation from within the configuration step using the Configuration Help
button.
Related Information
With this feature, you can use dangerous goods checks for transport checks. In addition, dangerous goods data
can be printed on delivery documents.
Type New
Related Information
You can now use this service to read inbound delivery header and item texts.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Related Information
You can now use this service to read outbound delivery header and item texts.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Related Information
This outbound service is used to tell a third-party warehouse management system or a third-party logistics
provider that a supplier is sending goods to the remote warehouse. In some cases, it is also used to tell the
third-party warehouse management system or the third-party logistics provider that it is OK to accept returns
from a buyer. This message is sent from SAP S/4HANA Cloud to a third-party warehouse management system
or a third-party logistics provider.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
This inbound service is used by a third-party decentralized warehouse management system or a third-party
logistics provider to inform a supplier that their goods have been received for storage and that the delivery
information has been checked and verified. This message is sent from the third-party decentralized warehouse
management system or the third-party logistics provider to SAP S/4HANA Cloud.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
This outbound service enables a seller to tell a third-party decentralized warehouse management system or a
third-party logistics provider to send goods to a buyer. This message is sent from SAP S/4HANA Cloud to a
third-party decentralized warehouse management system or to a third-party logistics provider.
Type New
Related Information
This inbound service is used by a third-party decentralized warehouse management system or by a third-party
logistics provider to inform a supplier that goods have been sent out to the buyer. This message is sent from
the third-party decentralized warehouse management system or from the system of the third-party logistics
provider to SAP S/4HANA Cloud.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
The business events CREATED, CHANGED, and DELETED are now available for SAP Object Types Outbound
Delivery, Inbound Delivery, and Customer Returns Delivery.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 2TX (Direct Procurement with Inbound Delivery), BDD (Cus
tomer Returns), BD9 (Sell from Stock)
Related Information
New features are now available. When you reverse a goods issue, a new delivery note is automatically
regenerated with the updated details. Also, in certain scenarios, output is not issued automatically. For
example, if a dangerous goods check is carried out and the check results in the delivery or some of its items
being blocked, the output is not issued. Additionally, dangerous goods information related to your items is now
included on the delivery note and picking list.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Related Information
With this feature, you can define output types for each delivery item. You can control which delivery items are
relevant for output management and you can also choose when to issue their output.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
A quality certificate PDF can be output as a printout and an email using pre-delivered form and email
templates. This certificate certifies the quality of goods.
Related Information
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
For more information about dimensional weight profiles and amount-based charges, see Enhancements for
Charge Calculation in Freight Orders [page 555].
The usability of the app has been improved in multiple ways, for example:
● The system displays all freight agreements in the app by default (you no longer need to choose Go to
displays all freight agreements).
● You can access contact details of the user that created or last changed a freight agreement.
● You can specify how you want columns to display in the Calculation Sheet Items table.
● You can copy and filter rates within a rate table.
● You can select checkboxes instead of entering X or a space, for example, for calculation bases and holiday
pick-up charges.
Related Information
● Calculate charges for amount-based items, for example, insurance fees, using the Goods Value calculation
base
● Use a dimensional weight profile to convert a product's gross volume into dimensional weight, which allows
the system to apply the correct rate when calculating transportation charges
Technical Details
Type Changed
Application Component TM
TCC
Additional Details
Amount-Based Charges
You can specify amount-based charges in freight agreements, for example, for insurance fees. The system
calculates amount-based charges in freight orders based on the value of the goods being transported. You use
the Goods Value calculation base for amount-based charges.
Related Information
Charge Calculation
Use
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
● Added visualization for subcontracting material flow in the Monitor Subcontracting Documents app
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
● Create and monitor purchase orders with supplier confirmations in the Manage Purchase Order app
Technical Details
Technical Name of Scope Item 2TX ( Direct Procurement with Inbound Delivery )
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
This scope item helps you to increase the efficiency of warehouse processes by using resource management
and mobile data entry.
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
● Display journal entry and supplier invoice number after posting supplier invoice
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
● You can use the Process Warehouse Tasks – Picking app to pick or stage warehouse tasks
● It is not required to manually replicate a production supply area
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
This scope item allows you to supply material from your warehouse to production by leveraging the Kanban
replenishment method as part of lean manufacturing.
Technical Details
Technical Name of Scope Item 3VT ( Warehouse Kanban Supply into Production )
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
Technical Details
Technical Name of Scope Item 1ZQ ( Logistics with Third-Party Warehouse Management )
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
● New data migration business objects and updates to some existing migration objects for staging area
approach data migration
Technical Details
Technical Name of Scope Item 2Q2 ( Data Migration to SAP S/4HANA from Staging )
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
Technical Details
Technical Name of Scope Item 1YB ( Import Connection Setup with SAP Analytics Cloud )
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
● Include new data migration business objects and update some existing migration objects
Technical Details
Technical Name of Scope Item BH5 ( Data Migration to SAP S/4HANA from File )
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
● Manage Legal Tasks - Users can manage tasks that are linked to different legal transactions, forward tasks
to other agents, and notify agents about pending tasks. Users can see all the tasks grouped under the legal
transaction from where these workflow tasks were triggered.
● Legal Content Overview - Users can analyze the most important tasks to be processed by each of them.
They can analyze the pending tasks of your legal transaction, average processing time taken by each task,
and task completion of different types of tasks.
● Categories – You can add descriptions to the node category.
● Manage Legal Transactions - Users can now use Situation Handling in Legal Content Management. This
involves defining situations to notify the legal counsel when the health synchronization of a legal
transactions may fail which then needs to be processed to ensure successful synchronization. Users can
use the Open Issues hyperlink to view the missing or wrong attributes that affect the health of the legal
transaction.
Technical Details
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
● The preferred name is now included in all search scenarios as well as in the SAP S/4HANA Cloud fact sheet
Technical Details
Technical Name of Scope Item JB1 ( Core HR with SAP SuccessFactors Employee Central )
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
Technical Details
Technical Name of Scope Item 3AB ( Automated Provisioning via SAP Cloud Identity Access
Governance )
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
● Read Access Logging: It is now possible to compare read access logging configurations provided by SAP
with read access logging configurations which are created by customers. For more information, refer to the
Set-Up Instructions.
Technical Details
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
In the Manage Product Master Data app, you can create a new record or modify an existing record by copying
the reference data of an existing product. A reference product supports the copy of data in an incremental way
in contrast to the copy function where only a one time copy is possible. While creating a new record, you can
use the Reference Product field available in the Create Master Data Record dialog to specify an existing product
that can be used as a reference for copying.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
For Product Master, the Maintain External Material Groups and Define Attributes of System Messages self-
service configuration UIs (SSC UI) are available in the Manage Your Solution app.
Type New
Additional Details
The Import Data for Consolidation app enables you to import data without a source system. The system will
disregard key mapping and value mapping information of the imported records. When importing data without a
source system, you cannot use process templates that contain key value or value mapping steps.
The Export Master Data app enables you to export master data in the Compressed CSV (*.zip) format. In case
of large data quanties SAP recommends to use the Compressed CSV (*.zip) as this format has less memory
consumption on the application server. The Import Data for Consolidation app can handle both, CSV and
Compressed CSV (.zip) format.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 1RM (Mass Load and Mass Maintenance for Product)
Related Information
The Import Data for Consolidation app enables you to import data without a source system. The system will
disregard key mapping and value mapping information of the imported records. When importing data without a
source system, you cannot use process templates that contain key value or value mapping steps.
The Export Master Data app enables you to export master data in the Compressed CSV (*.zip) format. In case
of large data quanties SAP recommends to use the Compressed CSV (*.zip) as this format has less memory
consumption on the application server. The Import Data for Consolidation app can handle both, CSV and
Compressed CSV (.zip) format.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item 1RK (Mass Load and Mass Maintenance for Business Part
ner)
With this release, new configuration steps for making settings related to business partner have been added to
Configure Your Solution in the Manage Your Solution app. In addition, changes have been made to some
previously delivered configuration items or configuration steps.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
New/changed
Configuration configuration What you can Leading scope
Type of change for ... object How to find it do item Solution Area
New SSCUI Business Part Define Account Find this config- From the stand 1RK Cross Applica
ner Groups with uration under ard account tions
Screen Layout Database group, you can
(Customers) and Database create new cus
tomer account
Management
groups using
Business
the Copy fea
Partner ture
New SSC UI Business Part Define Name Find this config- You can main 1RK Cross Applica
ner Affixes uration under tain name af tions
Database fixes
and Database
Management
Business
Partner
New SSC UI Business Part Maintain Mari Find this config- You can main 1RK Cross Applica
ner tal Status uration under tain marital sta tions
Database tus
and Database
Management
Business
Partner
SSCUI moved Business Part Define Cus Find this config- You can define 1RK Cross Applica
to a different ner tomer Classifi- uration under customer clas tions
configuration cation Database sifications to
item and Database which custom
ers can belong
Management
Business
Partner
Effects on Configuration
Make your entries in Configure Your Solution, which is part of the Manage Your Solution app. In the Realize
phase, make changes to predelivered configuration settings or create new settings if needed. It may be
possible to create new settings by copying existing settings and adapting them. Note that to ensure data
consistency, the changes that you can make to predelivered configuration settings may be limited. In some, but
not all cases, you can delete new records that you have added.
For more information about the settings that are to be made in each configuration step, read the system
documentation. You access this documentation from within the configuration step using the Configuration Help
button.
Related Information
You can use SAP_CMD_BC_BP_APP_MAINT_PC to access Manage Business Partner Master Data Fiori app.
Technical Details
Type New
Use the Business Role Templates app to check the following business role templates or business catalogs and
their restriction types:
Note
You can also see which business catalogs have changed in the Business Catalogs app. Read the description
displayed for each business catalog in the system for more information about the authorizations controlled
by the catalog and its restriction types.
IAM Objects
Master Data - Business catalog Manage Business Part This new business cat No scope item re
Business Partner App ner Master Data app alog is created exclu quired
(SAP_CMD_BC_BP_AP was added to this busi sively for Manage
P_MAINT_PC) ness catalog Business Partner
Master Data app
The I_CUSTOMERSEPAMANDATE CDS (Core Data Services) view has been released for customer master data.
Type New
Additional Details
You can look at all released CDS views and their fields in detail by using the View Browser app.
Related Information
Interface Views
View Browser
The entities A_CUSTOMER and A_SUPPLIER are enhanced with the field TradingPartner . With this feature,
you can read and update trading partner data.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
This interface Business Partner - Create, Read, Update, Delete is available in the SAP API Business Hub http://
help.sap.com/disclaimer?site=https://api.sap.com/)
The Import Data for Consolidation app enables you to import data without a source system. The system will
disregard key mapping and value mapping information of the imported records. When importing data without a
source system, you cannot use process templates that contain key value or value mapping steps.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 1N1 (Master Data Consolidation for Product), 1N3 (Master
Data Consolidation for Product)
Related Information
The Export Master Data app enables you to export master data in the Compressed CSV (*.zip) format. In case
of large data quanties SAP recommends to use the Compressed CSV (*.zip) as this format has less memory
consumption on the application server. The Import Data for Consolidation app can handle both, CSV and
Compressed CSV (.zip) format.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item 1N1 (Master Data Consolidation for Product), 1N3 (Master
Data Consolidation for Product), 1N5 Mass Processing for
Product, 1N7 Mass Processing for Business Partner
Related Information
The following CDS (Core Data Services) views for Enterprise Technology have now been released:
● I_User
You can refer to this CDS view to find who created or changed data in the system.
Type New
You can now search for configurations that have deviations from their SAP template. You can directly open the
SAP templates of configurations that have been copied from an SAP template as well as rebuild those
configurations if necessary. You can also filter your configuration table by template owner and sort the columns
of the table.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Related Information
The Reports feature is enhanced to include Analytics List Page report along with Generic reports. Using the
Analytic List Page report, you can analyze data from different perspectives, investigate root causes, and act on
transactional content. You can create an application and launch it directly from the SAP Fiori launchpad.
Technical Details
Type Changed
CA-GTF-SB-S4H-RT
● Create Report
● Create Report Evaluation
● Configure Report Drill-Down
● Report Workspace
● Publish Report
The above-mentioned apps will be deleted with SAP S/4HANA Cloud 1911.
See Also
For more information about Mange KPIs and Reports, see http://help.sap.com/s4hana_ce_1905 Product
Assistance Generic Information Analytics Manage KPIs and Reports .
This feature enables you to create a new predictive model from SAP Analytics Cloud Smart Predict, and to add
it to a predictive scenario that already exists in the Predictive Scenarios app. Only predictive scenarios created
by customers from release 1905 of SAP S/4HANA Cloud, support the ability to add an additional model.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
For more information about the Predictive Scenarios app, go to the SAP Help Portal at https://help.sap.com,
and search for SAP S/4HANA Cloud Product Assistance Generic Information Analytics Predictive
Analytics integrator (PAi) Predictive Scenarios App .
With this feature, you can now use situation handling with the following apps:
Finance:
Procurement
● Manage Purchase Contracts (Fiori ID: F1600A; Scope Items: 1QR, BMD)
Cross Applications:
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
Situation Handling
The Manage Situation Types app has the following new features:
Technical Details
Type Changed
Related Information
This feature enables you to group responsible members, who perform specific functions in a business process,
as a team. You can refer to these teams, members, and functions in frameworks, such as workflows or situation
handling as responsible members to receive focus about specific circumstances or business situations. For
example, end users receive a notice about upcoming deadlines, warnings about delays, or are informed about
tasks that need to be completed as soon as possible.
With this feature, you can see details (old and new values) about the changes made to a team definition.
Hierarchical changes are not captured in Change Documents.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Related Information
This feature lets you see details about Digital Access licenses, S4HC Digital Access (8005687), and S4HC
Digital Access Add Doc Cap (8005688).
Technical Details
Type Changed
Related Information
This feature lets key users see details about whitelisted ABAP development artifacts that are released as APIs.
These development artifacts can be used in enhancement implementations to extend SAP S/4HANA Cloud
solutions.
● Details about whitelisted artifacts, such as classes, interfaces, and data structures
● Documentation, application components, and short descriptions for each artifact
● Implemented and comprised interfaces, attributes, and methods with signatures for classes and interfaces
● Component lists for structures with component types and data types
Type New
Related Information
Use
Procure
Finance
Idea
Produce
Cloud Foundation
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
Use
Technical Details
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, you can refer to the following overview .
See also
For more information about this scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet in the SAP
Best Practices Explorer.
This feature enables you to start and execute data migration and to use pre-defined migration objects. This
feature now includes additional data migration objects.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Scope Item BH5 (Data Migration to SAP S/4HANA from File), 2Q2 (Data
Migration to SAP S/4HANA from Staging)
Additional Details
For more information about the scope items and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheets BH5 (Data
Migration to SAP S/4HANA from File) and 2Q2 (Data Migration to SAP S/4HANA from Staging) in the
SAP Best Practices Explorer.
Effects on Configuration
Configuration settings can be edited or enhanced in configuration apps. To find out more about changed or
new configuration apps for this scope item, refer to the SAP Activate Methodology for SAP S/4HANA Cloud
and download the Expert Configuration and SSCUI Reference file under Explore.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
For more information about the scope item and additional deliverables, refer to the fact sheet BH5 (Data
Migration to SAP S/4HANA from File) in the SAP Best Practices Explorer.
13.14 My Queries
You can use this app to view and evaluate your search activities and search terms either graphically in a bar
chart or as a table.
Technical Details
Type New
My Queries
The Display Restrictions app has been renamed to Display Restriction Types.
Technical Details
Type Changed
● You can now set one of the parameters of type Date as the Key Date.
Technical Details
Type New
For more information about this app, see http://help.sap.com/s4hana_ce_1905 Product Assistance
Generic Information General Functions for the Key User Extensibility Custom Analytical Queries .
With this feature you can define a restriction as leading. The value in the corresponding field is automatically
passed on to other restriction types the field is used in as well. Therefore you only have to define the value
once.
Technical Details
Type Changed
The app Import Software Collection was renamed to Import Collection. You can now import business
configurations with the Import Collection app.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Related Information
The data access management option allows you to control the access to your custom business object: With
this feature, you can add a custom application to a business catalog in the SAP Fiori user experience (using the
SAP Fiori app Custom Catalog Extensions) and set the application to “read-only access” via the business role
maintenance. You can configure a blocking behavior for a custom business object so that blocked instances are
visible only to authorized users.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Related Information
The Manage Data Aging Groups app is deleted and is replaced with View Data Aging Runs app.
Type Deleted
The Monitor Data Aging Objects app is deleted and is replaced with Enable Data Agingapp.
Technical Details
Type Deleted
Operational Data Provisioning (ODP) provides a technical infrastructure for data extraction and data replication
(including delta mechanisms) from SAP NetWeaver or ABAP-based applications. To support the delta
procedures, the data from a source is written to a delta queue. You can use the Operational Data Provisioning -
Monitor Queues app to monitor delta queues in various detail views, and to perform various monitoring
activities.
Type New
Additional Details
The source object of the data extraction and data replication is referred to as an operational data provider. In
the context of SAP S/4HANA Cloud for example, the operational data provider is defined by an ABAP Core Data
Services view (ABAP CDS view). To support the delta procedures, the data from the source is automatically
written using an update process to a delta queue, referred to as the Operational Delta Queue (ODQ). The target
applications, such as SAP BW/4HANA or SAP BW, SAP Data Services or SAP HANA Smart Data Integration
(ABAP adapter) retrieve the data from the delta queue and continue processing the data.
Related Information
With this feature, you can now configure Situation Handling in Legal Content Management. When the status
synchronization of related legal transaction fails, a notification is sent to the user to ensure successful
synchronization. When the user does not process this task within a stipulated period, the system triggers this
situation to notify the user about this task.
Type Changed
Additional Details
● You can choose the Open Issues hyperlink to view the missing or wrong attributes that affect the health of
the legal transaction.
Related Information
With this feature, you can see an overview of all your workflow tasks that need to be processed. You can forward
workflow tasks to other agents and also notify them about pending tasks. You can see all the tasks grouped
under the legal transaction from where these tasks were triggered. You can also filter the tasks based on task
types and agent roles, in addition to all the other common filter types.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
With this feature, you can analyze the most important workflow tasks to be processed by you. You can also
analyze the pending tasks of your legal transaction, average processing time taken by each task, and the
number of completed tasks. You can also analyze these parameters based on different workflow task types.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Related Information
With this feature, you can now add a description to the node category.
Type Changed
Related Information
Categories
With this feature, you can choose the Discard Content button to delete the content of a legal document, without
actually deleting the document.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Related Information
14.1 Australia
14.1.1 Finance
Changes to the Identity and Access Management (IAM) objects delivered for Australia require you to recheck
your business roles and the business catalogs assigned to them. Ensure that the restrictions included in the
business catalogs are set correctly to allow your users to use their business apps as needed.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
If you need to create an incident regarding this feature, use componen XX-CSC-AU.
Use the Business Role Templates app to check the following business role templates or business catalogs and
their restriction types:
You can also see which business catalogs have changed in the Business Catalogs app. Read the description
displayed for each business catalog in the system for more information about the authorizations controlled
by the catalog and its restriction types.
IAM Objects
General Ledger - Business Catalog Changes were made to The Company Code/ Not applicable
Reporting for Australia the restriction types. House Bank/Payment
(SAP_FIN_BC_GL_RE Method
PORTING_AU_PC) (BUKRS_HBKID_HKTI
D_PAYMETH) was
added to the business
catalog.
Related Information
14.2 Austria
14.2.1 Finance
Changes to the Identity and Access Management (IAM) objects delivered for Austria require you to recheck
your business roles and the business catalogs assigned to them. Ensure that the restrictions included in the
business catalogs are set correctly to allow your users to use their business apps as needed.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
If you need to create an incident regarding this feature, use component XX-CSC-AT-FI.
Use the Business Role Templates app to check the following business role templates or business catalogs and
their restriction types:
Note
You can also see which business catalogs have changed in the Business Catalogs app. Read the description
displayed for each business catalog in the system for more information about the authorizations controlled
by the catalog and its restriction types.
IAM Objects
General Ledger - Business catalog New business catalog A new business cata Not applicable
Reporting for Austria dependency has been log has been added to
(SAP_FIN_BC_GL_RE added to the business the list of the depend
PORTING_AT_PC) catalog. ent business catalogs:
the Master Data -
Customer Display
(SAP_CMD_BC_CUSTO
MER_DSP_PC) busi
ness catalog.
Related Information
With this release, new configuration steps for making settings related to Austria have been added to Configure
Your Solution in the Manage Your Solution app. In addition, changes have been made to some previously
delivered configuration items or configuration steps.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
New/changed
Configuration configuration ob Leading scope
Type of change for ... ject How to find it What you can do item
SSCUI moved to a Balance of Pay Define Items for Finance Define items for J58 (Accounting
Balance of Statutory the corresponding
different configu- ments and Financial
Payments Forms form for Balance
ration item Reporting Close )
of Payments for
Balance of
your country.
Payments
SSCUI moved to a Balance of Pay Define Rules for Finance Define rules for the J58 (Accounting
Items Statutory items of your Bal
different configu- ments and Financial
ance of Payments
ration item Reporting Close )
form
Balance of
Payments
Effects on Configuration
Make your entries in Configure Your Solution, which is part of the Manage Your Solution app. In the Realize
phase, make changes to predelivered configuration settings or create new settings if needed. It may be
possible to create new settings by copying existing settings and adapting them. Note that to ensure data
For more information about the settings that are to be made in each configuration step, read the system
documentation. You access this documentation from within the configuration step using the Configuration Help
button.
Related Information
14.3 Belgium
14.3.1 Finance
Changes to the Identity and Access Management (IAM) objects delivered for Belgium require you to recheck
your business roles and the business catalogs assigned to them. Ensure that the restrictions included in the
business catalogs are set correctly to allow your users to use their business apps as needed.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
If you need to create an incident regarding this feature, use component XX-CSC-BE-FI.
Use the Business Role Templates app to check the following business role templates or business catalogs and
their restriction types:
Note
You can also see which business catalogs have changed in the Business Catalogs app. Read the description
displayed for each business catalog in the system for more information about the authorizations controlled
by the catalog and its restriction types.
IAM Objects
General Ledger - Business catalog New business catalog A new business cata Not applicable
Reporting for Belgium dependency has been log has been added to
(SAP_FIN_BC_GL_RE added to the business the list of the depend
PORTING_BE_PC) catalog. ent business catalogs:
the Master Data -
Customer Display
(SAP_CMD_BC_CUSTO
MER_DSP_PC) busi
ness catalog.
Related Information
With this release, new configuration steps for making settings related to Belgium have been added to Configure
Your Solution in the Manage Your Solution app. In addition, changes have been made to some previously
delivered configuration items or configuration steps.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
New/changed
Configuration configuration ob Leading scope
Type of change for ... ject How to find it What you can do item
SSCUI moved to a Balance of Pay Define Items for Finance Define items for J58 (Accounting
Statutory the corresponding and Financial
different configu- ments Balance of
form for Balance Close)
ration item Payments Forms Reporting
of Payments for
Balance of
your country.
Payments
SSCUI moved to a Balance of Pay Define Rules for Finance Define rules for the J58 (Accounting
Items Statutory items of your Bal and Financial
different configu- ments
ance of Payments Close)
ration item Reporting
form.
Balance of
Payments
Effects on Configuration
Make your entries in Configure Your Solution>, which is part of the Manage Your Solution app. In the Realize
phase, make changes to predelivered configuration settings or create new settings if needed. It may be
possible to create new settings by copying existing settings and adapting them. Note that to ensure data
consistency, the changes that you can make to predelivered configuration settings may be limited. In some, but
not all cases, you can delete new records that you have added.
For more information about the settings that are to be made in each configuration step, read the system
documentation. You access this documentation from within the configuration step using the Configuration Help
button.
Related Information
14.4.1 Cross-Application
With this release, new configuration steps for making settings related to taxes have been added to Configure
Your Solution in the Manage Your Solution app. In addition, changes have been made to some previously
delivered configuration items or configuration steps.
Technical Details
Type New
New SSCUI Brazil Tax Determi Define Tax Juris Find this configu- Enter tax jurisdic BD9, 2EQ, J45, and
ration under 22Z
nation diction Codes tion codes, which
Configure Your are used by the
Solution system to calcu
Application late taxes and cre
Platform and
ate NF-e.
Infrastructure
Legal Compliance
Brazil Tax
Determination
Define Tax
Jurisdiction
Codes
New SSCUI Brazil Tax Determi Assign Postal Co Find this configu- Assign a range of BD9, 2EQ, J45, and
ration under 22Z
nation des to Tax Juris postal codes to
diction Codes Configure Your each tax jurisdic
Solution tion code.
Application
Platform and
Infrastructure
Legal Compliance
Brazil Tax
Determination
Assign Postal
Codes to Tax
Jurisdiction
Codes
New SSCUI Brazil Tax Determi Define ICMS Tax Find this configu- Define tax laws for 1J5 and 2RP
ration under
nation Laws ICMS processing.
Configure Your
Solution
Application
Platform and
Infrastructure
Legal Compliance
Brazil Tax
Determination
Define ICMS Tax
Laws
New SSCUI Brazil Tax Determi Define IPI Tax Find this configu- Define tax laws for 1J5 and 2RP
ration under
nation Laws IPI processing.
Configure Your
Solution
Application
Platform and
Infrastructure
Legal Compliance
Brazil Tax
Determination
Define IPI Tax
Laws
New SSCUI Brazil Tax Determi Define ISS Tax Find this configu- Define tax laws for 1J5 and 2RP
ration under
nation Laws ISS processing.
Configure Your
Solution
Application
Platform and
Infrastructure
Legal Compliance
Brazil Tax
Determination
Define ISS Tax
Laws
New SSCUI Brazil Tax Determi Define COFINS Tax Find this configu- Define tax laws for 1J5 and 2RP
ration under
nation Laws COFINS process
Configure Your ing.
Solution
Application
Platform and
Infrastructure
Legal Compliance
Brazil Tax
Determination
Define COFINS Tax
Laws
New SSCUI Brazil Tax Determi Define PIS Tax Find this configu- Define tax laws for 1J5 and 2RP
ration under
nation Laws PIS processing.
Configure Your
Solution
Application
Platform and
Infrastructure
Legal Compliance
Brazil Tax
Determination
Define PIS Tax
Laws
New SSCUI Brazil Tax Determi Assign Specifier Find this configu- Determine the 1J5 and 2RP
ration under
nation Code of Substitui CEST (Código Es
ção Tributária Configure Your pecificador da
Solution Substituição Tribu
Application tária) according to
Platform and
the material or
Infrastructure NCM (Nomencla
Legal Compliance
tura Comum do
Brazil Tax Mercosul) code.
Determination
Assign Specifier
Code of
Substituição
Tributária
Effects on Configuration
Make your entries in Configure Your Solution, which is part of the Manage Your Solution app. In the Realize
phase, make changes to predelivered configuration settings or create new settings if needed. It may be
possible to create new settings by copying existing settings and adapting them. Note that to ensure data
consistency, the changes that you can make to predelivered configuration settings may be limited. In some, but
not all cases, you can delete new records that you have added.
For more information about the settings that are to be made in each configuration step, read the system
documentation. You access this documentation from within the configuration step using the Configuration Help
button.
Related Information
With this release, new configuration steps for making settings related to numbering parameters have been
added to Configure Your Solution in the Manage Your Solution app. In addition, changes have been made to
some previously delivered configuration items or configuration steps.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
New SSCUI Brazil Numbering Define Number Find this configu- Create number 1J5 and 2RP
ration under groups for notas
Parameters Groups
Configure Your fiscais and other
fiscal documents.
Solution
Application
Platform and
Infrastructure
Legal Compliance
Brazil
Numbering
Parameters
Define Number
Groups
New SSCUI Brazil Numbering Maintain Number Find this configu- Mantain one or 1J5 and 2RP
ration under several ranges for
Parameters Ranges
Configure Your the external docu
ment numbers of
Solution
fiscal documents.
Application
Platform and
Infrastructure
Legal Compliance
Brazil
Numbering
Parameters
Maintain Number
Ranges
New SSCUI Brazil Numbering Maintain Number Find this configu- Maintain one or 1J5 and 2RP
ration under several ranges for
Parameters Ranges for Elec
Configure Your the external docu
tronic Fiscal Docu
ment numbers of
ments Solution
electronic fiscal
Application
documents.
Platform and
Infrastructure
Legal Compliance
Brazil
Numbering
Parameters
Maintain Number
Ranges for
Electronic Fiscal
Documents
Effects on Configuration
Make your entries in Configure Your Solution, which is part of the Manage Your Solution app. In the Realize
phase, make changes to predelivered configuration settings or create new settings if needed. It may be
possible to create new settings by copying existing settings and adapting them. Note that to ensure data
consistency, the changes that you can make to predelivered configuration settings may be limited. In some, but
not all cases, you can delete new records that you have added.
For more information about the settings that are to be made in each configuration step, read the system
documentation. You access this documentation from within the configuration step using the Configuration Help
button.
14.4.2 Finance
Changes to the Identity and Access Management (IAM) objects delivered for Brazil require you to recheck your
business roles and the business catalogs assigned to them. Ensure that the restrictions included in the
business catalogs are set correctly to allow your users to use their business apps as needed.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Use the Business Role Templates app to check the following business role templates or business catalogs and
their restriction types:
Note
You can also see which business catalogs have changed in the Business Catalogs app. Read the description
displayed for each business catalog in the system for more information about the authorizations controlled
by the catalog and its restriction types.
General Ledger - Business catalog Changes were made to New restriction types 1J2_BR
Reporting for Brazil the restriction types. were added to the
(SAP_FIN_BC_GL_RE business catalog and
PORTING_BR_PC) existing restriction
types were changed.
Related Information
This feature enables you to collect all the required data for the EFD-Reinf Tables Files report to generate XML
files that you need to submit to the tax authorities through the Run Advanced Compliance Reports app.
Technical Details
Type New
Available In Brazil
Related Information
With this release, new configuration steps for making settings related to Brazil have been added to Configure
Your Solution in the Manage Your Solution app. In addition, changes have been made to some previously
delivered configuration items or configuration steps.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Available In Brazil
Additional Details
New/changed
Configuration configuration ob Leading scope
Type of change for ... ject How to find it What you can do item
New fields in con Company Settings Define Organiza Find this configu- Now you can add 1J2 (Advance
ration under
figuration step tional Structure information about Compliance Re
Finance the software house porting)
Statutory
responsible for
Reporting Brazil sending the EFD-
ACR . Reinf report to the
Brazilian govern
ment.
Effects on Configuration
Make your entries in Configure Your Solution, which is part of the Manage Your Solution app. In the Realize
phase, make changes to predelivered configuration settings or create new settings if needed. It may be
possible to create new settings by copying existing settings and adapting them. Note that to ensure data
consistency, the changes that you can make to predelivered configuration settings may be limited. In some, but
not all cases, you can delete new records that you have added.
Related Information
14.5 Canada
14.5.1.1 Tax per Document (Max Tax) for the United States
and Canada
With this feature, you can use tax per document so that Max Tax calculation rules are applied across multiple
items of a sales document. In addition, the use of tax per document improves system performance because
the call to the external tax system occurs once for the entire document, instead of numerous times for each
item.
Tax per document is part of the country-specific product assistance for tax calculation in Sales for the United
States and Canada that explains how you can automate the tax calculation for Sales in SAP S/4HANA Cloud
and an external tax system.
To make full use of the tax per document, you must configure pricing in Sales accordingly.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item BD9 (Sell from Stock) and all other scope items that include
Price Management
Related Information
14.5.2 Finance
The advanced compliance reports for Canada (GST/HST and RITC, PST-MB, PST-BC, PST-SK, QST), that were
earlier based on general ledger balance reporting solution, are now replaced by tax box based reporting
solution. The report output format, report category IDs, and report entity IDs are updated according to the
reporting solution.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Available In Canada
Related Information
With this release, new configuration steps for making settings related to advance compliance repoting for
Canada have been added to Configure Your Solution in the Manage Your Solution app. In addition, changes have
been made to some previously delivered configuration items or configuration steps.
Technical Details
Type New
Available In Canada
Additional Details
New/changed
Configuration configuration ob Leading scope
Type of change for ... ject How to find it What you can do item
New configuration Canada GST/HST, Specify the Federal Find this configu- For every company 1J2 (Advance
PST, QST, and Level Tax Jurisdic ration under code, you can en
step Compliance Re
RITC. tion Code Finance ter the Federal
porting )
Statutory level relevant Tax
Jurisdiction code.
Reporting VAT
You can customize
all GST/HST rele
vant Tax Jurisdic
tion codes with the
Federal Indicator
mentioned as X.
New configuration Canada GST/HST, Specify the Recap Find this configu- You can enter the 1J2 (Advance
PST, QST, and ture Rate Percent ration under recapture rate per
step Compliance Re
RITC. age for RITC Tax Finance centage for the rel
porting )
Jurisdiction Code Statutory evant Tax Jurisdic
tion code of Re
Reporting VAT
captured Input Tax
Credit (RITC).
New configuration Canada GST/HST, Define the Tax Box Find this configu- Maintain Tax box 1J2 (Advance
PST, QST, and Structure ration under structures for Can
step Compliance Re
RITC. Finance ada GST/HST, PST,
porting )
Statutory QST, and RITC.
Reporting Tax
Effects on Configuration
Make your entries in Configure Your Solution, which is part of the Manage Your Solution app. In the Realize
phase, make changes to predelivered configuration settings or create new settings if needed. It may be
possible to create new settings by copying existing settings and adapting them. Note that to ensure data
consistency, the changes that you can make to predelivered configuration settings may be limited. In some, but
not all cases, you can delete new records that you have added.
For more information about the settings that are to be made in each configuration step, read the system
documentation. You access this documentation from within the configuration step using the Configuration Help
button.
Related Information
Changes to the Identity and Access Management (IAM) objects delivered for Canada require you to recheck
your business roles and the business catalogs assigned to them. Ensure that the restrictions included in the
business catalogs are set correctly to allow your users to use their business apps as needed.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
If you need to create an incident regarding this feature, use component XX-CSC-CA-FI.
Use the Business Role Templates app to check the following business role templates or business catalogs and
their restriction types:
Note
You can also see which business catalogs have changed in the Business Catalogs app. Read the description
displayed for each business catalog in the system for more information about the authorizations controlled
by the catalog and its restriction types.
IAM Objects
General Ledger - Business Catalog Changes were made to The Company Code/ Not applicable
Reporting for Canada the restriction types. House Bank/Payment
(SAP_FIN_BC_GL_RE Method
PORT_CA_PC) (BUKRS_HBKID_HKTI
D_PAYMETH) restric
tion type was added to
the business catalog.
Related Information
14.6.1 Finance
Changes to the Identity and Access Management (IAM) objects delivered for China require you to recheck your
business roles and the business catalogs assigned to them. Ensure that the restrictions included in the
business catalogs are set correctly to allow your users to use their business apps as needed.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
If you need to create an incident regarding this feature, use component XX-CSC-CN-FI.
Use the Business Role Templates app to check the following business role templates or business catalogs and
their restriction types:
Note
You can also see which business catalogs have changed in the Business Catalogs app. Read the description
displayed for each business catalog in the system for more information about the authorizations controlled
by the catalog and its restriction types.
Accounts Payable and Business Catalog A new restriction type The Bank Account J60 (Accounts Paya
Receivable - Payments was added to the busi Management ble)
for China ness catalog. (FCLM_BAM) restriction
(SAP_FIN_BC_APAR_ type was added to the
PM_EPIC_CN_PC) business catalog ena
bling only read access.
Accounts Payable - Business Catalog A new restriction type The Authorization Not applicable
Procurement for China was added to the busi Group for Suppliers
(SAP_FIN_BC_AP_PR ness catalog. (BEGRU_LFA1) restric
OCMT_CN_PC) tion type was added to
the business catalog
enabling only read ac
cess.
Accounts Receivable - Business Catalog A new restriction type The Company Code/ J59 (Accounts Receiv
Operational was added to the busi Profit Center / Cost able)
Processing for China ness catalog. Element
(SAP_FIN_BC_AR_DO (BUKRS_PRCTR_KSTA
C_PROC_CN_PC) R) restriction type was
added to the business
catalog enabling only
read access.
Accounts Receivable - Business Catalog A new restriction type The Shipping Point / J59 (Accounts Receiv
Operational was added to the busi Receiving Point able)
Processing for China ness catalog. (VSTEL) restriction
(SAP_FIN_BC_AR_DO type was added to the
C_PROC_CN_PC) business catalog ena
bling only value help
(F4) access.
Cash - Electronic Business Catalog A new restriction type The Bank Account 1EG (Bank Integration
Payment Integration was added to the busi Management with File Interface)
for China ness catalog. (FCLM_BAM) restriction
(SAP_FIN_BC_CASH_ type was added to the
EPIC_CN_PC) business catalog ena
bling only read access.
General Ledger - Business Catalog New restriction types The following restric J58 (Accounting and
Reporting for China were added to the tion types were added Financial Close)
(SAP_FIN_BC_GL_RE business catalog. to the business catalog
PORTING_CN_PC) enabling only read ac
cess:
● Authorization
Group for
Customer Related
Journal Entries
(BEGRU_BKPF_BE
D)
● Authorization
Group for
Supplier-Related
Journal Entries
(BEGRU_BKPF_BE
K)
● Bank Account
Management
(FCLM_BAM)
● Cost Center
(KOSTL)
Payment Request - Business Catalog A new restriction type The Bank Account ● 1WV (Debt and In
Payments for China was added to the busi Management vestment Man
(SAP_FIN_BC_PYRQ_ ness catalog. (FCLM_BAM) restriction agement - Group
PM_EPIC_CN_PC) type was added to the Ledger US GAAP)
business catalog ena ● 1X1 (Foreign Cur
bling only read access. rency Risk Man
agement - Group
Ledger US GAAP)
● 1X3 (Interest Rate
Derivatives Man
agement - Group
Ledger US GAAP)
● 2NZ (Trade Fi
nance Manage
ment)
● 2UN (Money Mar
ket Mutual Fund
Management)
14.7 France
14.7.1 Finance
With this release, new configuration steps for making settings related to France have been added to Configure
Your Solution in the Manage Your Solution app. In addition, changes have been made to some previously
delivered configuration items or configuration steps.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
New/changed
Configuration configuration ob Leading scope
Type of change for ... ject How to find it What you can do item
SSCUI moved to a Balance of Pay Define Items for Finance Define items for J58 (Accounting
ments Balance of Statutory the corresponding and Financial
different configu-
Payments Forms form for Balance Close)
ration item Reporting
of Payments for
Balance of
your country.
Payments
SSCUI moved to a Balance of Pay Define Rules for Finance Define rules for the J58 (Accounting
ments Items Statutory items of your Bal and Financial
different configu-
ance of Payments Close)
ration item Reporting
form.
Balance of
Payments
Effects on Configuration
Make your entries in Configure Your SolutionManage Your Solution app. In the Realize phase, make changes to
predelivered configuration settings or create new settings if needed. It may be possible to create new settings
by copying existing settings and adapting them. Note that to ensure data consistency, the changes that you
can make to predelivered configuration settings may be limited. In some, but not all cases, you can delete new
records that you have added.
For more information about the settings that are to be made in each configuration step, read the system
documentation. You access this documentation from within the configuration step using the Configuration Help
button.
Related Information
The VAT Return functionality for France has been enhanced by providing the following new features:
● Output: Two new columns, Description of the official box and Tax Type (output or input) have been added
to the output (table view)
● Correction phase: corrections to an already completed VAT return have been enabled by creating a new
correction run phase.
You generate the VAT Return for France using the Run Compliance Reports app.
Type Changed
Additional Details
If you need to create an incident regarding this feature, you can also use component XX-CSC-FR-FI.
Related Information
VAT Return
With this app you can schedule the reversing of bill of exchange liability using the template and scheduling
options provided.
Technical Details
Type New
14.8 Hungary
The eDocument feature has been renamed to Document Compliance. Document Compliance enables you to
create electronic documents (eDocuments) for your source documents and transmit them to external
systems, such as from tax authorities or business partners.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
Effects on Configuration
Related Information
Document Compliance
Document Compliance for Hungary
Document Compliance for Italy
Document Compliance for Mexico
Document Compliance for Taiwan
14.9 India
14.9.1 Finance
Changes to the Identity and Access Management (IAM) objects delivered for India require you to recheck your
business roles and the business catalogs assigned to them. Ensure that the restrictions included in the
business catalogs are set correctly to allow your users to use their business apps as needed.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Use the Business Role Templates app to check the following business role templates or business catalogs and
their restriction types:
Note
You can also see which business catalogs have changed in the Business Catalogs app. Read the description
displayed for each business catalog in the system for more information about the authorizations controlled
by the catalog and its restriction types.
IAM Objects
Globalization - Journal Business Catalog Changes were made to The following restric Not Applicable
Vouchers for India the restriction types. tion type was added to
(SAP_FIN_BC_GLO_G the business catalog
STJV_IN_PC) enabling value help
(F4) and write access:
● Company Code
(BUKRS)
● Chart of Accounts
(KTOPL)
Globalization - Business Catalog Changes were made to The following restric Not Applicable
Inbound Invoices for the restriction types. tion types were added
India to the business catalog
(SAP_FIN_BC_GLO_G enabling only value
STSTO_IN_PC) help (F4) access:
● Authorization
Groups for
Product
(BEGRU_MAT)
● Authorization
Groups for
Product Group
(BEGRU_MATKL)
● Authorization
Groups for
Product Type
(BEGRU_MTART)
● Purchasing
Document Type
(BSART)
● Customer Account
Group (KTOKD)
● Supplier Account
Group (KTOKK)
● Profit Center
(PRCTR)
● Responsible Cost
Center
(PS_FKSTL)
● Project Type
(PS_PRART)
● Number of the
responsible
person (project
manager)
(PS_VERNR)
● BP Role (RLTYP)
Related Information
14.10.1 Finance
Changes to the Identity and Access Management (IAM) objects delivered for Italy require you to recheck your
business roles and the business catalogs assigned to them. Ensure that the restrictions included in the
business catalogs are set correctly to allow your users to use their business apps as needed.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
If you need to create an incident regarding this feature, use component XX-CSC-IT-FI.
Use the Business Role Templates app to check the following business role templates or business catalogs and
their restriction types:
Note
You can also see which business catalogs have changed in the Business Catalogs app. Read the description
displayed for each business catalog in the system for more information about the authorizations controlled
by the catalog and its restriction types.
General Ledger - Business catalog New business catalog A new business cata Not applicable
Reporting for Italy dependency has been log has been added to
(SAP_FIN_BC_GL_RE added to the business the list of the depend
PORTING_IT_PC) catalog. ent business catalogs:
the Master Data -
Customer Display
(SAP_CMD_BC_CUSTO
MER_DSP_PC) busi
ness catalog.
General Ledger - Business catalog New restriction types The following restric Not applicable
Reporting for Italy were added to the tion types were added
(SAP_FIN_BC_GL_RE business catalog. to the business catalog
PORTING_IT_PC) enabling only value
help (F4) access:
● Authorization
Groups for
Product
(BEGRU_MAT)
● Authorization
Groups for
Product Group
(BEGRU_MATKL)
● Authorization
Groups for
Product Type
(BEGRU_MTART)
● Purchasing
Document Type
(BSART)
● Purchasing Group
(EKGRP)
● Purchasing
Organization
(EKORG)
● Storage Location/
Plant
(LGORT_WERKS)
● Profit Center
(PRCTR)
● Responsible Cost
Center
(PS_FKSTL)
● Project Type
(PS_PRART)
● Number of the
responsible
person (project
manager)
(PS_VERNR)
● Plant (WERKS)
With this release, new configuration steps for making settings related to Italy have been added to Configure
Your Solution in the Manage Your Solution app. In addition, changes have been made to some previously
delivered configuration items or configuration steps.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
New/changed
Configuration configuration ob Leading scope
Type of change for ... ject How to find it What you can do item
SSCUI moved to a VAT Registers Assign VAT Finance Assign VAT regis J59 (Accounts Re
Registers to Statutory ters to the relevant
different configu- ceivable)
Accounting accounting docu
ration item Reporting VAT
Document Types ment types for J60 (Accounts
your company co Payable)
des.
SSCUI moved to a VAT Registers Assign VAT Finance Assign VAT regis J59 (Accounts Re
Registers to Tax Statutory ters to the relevant
different configu- ceivable)
Codes tax codes for your
ration item Reporting VAT
company codes. J60 (Accounts
Payable)
New SSCUI Invoice Declaration Classify Document Finance Specify the docu J58 (Accounting
Types Statutory ment types that
and Financial
are included in the
Reporting VAT Close
Invoice Data
Declaration (Italy)
app.
New SSCUI Invoice Declaration Assign Attributes Finance Assign specific at J58 (Accounting
to Tax Codes Statutory tributes to the tax
and Financial
codes that are in
Reporting VAT Close
cluded in the
Invoice Data
Declaration (Italy)
app.
Effects on Configuration
Make your entries in Configure Your Solution, which is part of the Manage Your Solution app. In the Realize
phase, make changes to predelivered configuration settings or create new settings if needed. It may be
possible to create new settings by copying existing settings and adapting them. Note that to ensure data
consistency, the changes that you can make to predelivered configuration settings may be limited. In some, but
not all cases, you can delete new records that you have added.
For more information about the settings that are to be made in each configuration step, read the system
documentation. You access this documentation from within the configuration step using the Configuration Help
button.
Related Information
With this app you can schedule the reversing of bill of exchange liability using the template and scheduling
options provided.
Type New
Related Information
With this feature, you can enter CUP/CIG codes to incoming and outgoing invoices and to journal entries, and
the MGO ID to incoming invoices and journal entries when you use a company code specific to Italy.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
When you enter a company code that is specific to Italy, the following apps display country-specific fields on
their screen where you can enter the codes directly:
After that, you can insert these data into the RIBA and CGI_CT payment formats.
Related Information
The eDocument feature has been renamed to Document Compliance. Document Compliance enables you to
create electronic documents (eDocuments) for your source documents and transmit them to external
systems, such as from tax authorities or business partners.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
Effects on Configuration
Related Information
Document Compliance
Document Compliance for Hungary
Document Compliance for Italy
Document Compliance for Mexico
Document Compliance for Taiwan
14.11 Japan
14.11.1 Finance
Changes to the Identity and Access Management (IAM) objects delivered for Japan require you to recheck your
business roles and the business catalogs assigned to them. Ensure that the restrictions included in the
business catalogs are set correctly to allow your users to use their business apps as needed.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
If you need to create an incident regarding this feature, use component XX-CSC-JP-FI.
Use the Business Role Templates app to check the following business role templates or business catalogs and
their restriction types:
Note
You can also see which business catalogs have changed in the Business Catalogs app. Read the description
displayed for each business catalog in the system for more information about the authorizations controlled
by the catalog and its restriction types.
IAM Objects
General Ledger - Business Catalog A new restriction type The Company Code/ Not applicable
Journal Entry was added to the busi House Bank/Payment
Processing for Japan ness catalog. Method
(SAP_FIN_BC_GL_JE (BUKRS_HBKID_HKTI
_PROC_JP_PC) D_PAYMETH) restric
tion type was added to
the business catalog
enabling only read ac
cess.
Related Information
With this release, new configuration steps for making settings related to Japan have been added to Configure
Your Solution in the Manage Your Solution app. In addition, changes have been made to some previously
delivered configuration items or configuration steps.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
New/changed
Configuration configuration ob Leading scope
Type of change for ... ject How to find it What you can do item
New SSCUI Automatic Incom Maintain Bank Find this configu- You can define the J59 (Accounts Re
ing/Outgoing Pay Charges for Invoice ration under amount of bank ceivable)
ment Summary Finance charges for invoice
Accounts summary.
Receivable
Automatic
Incoming/
Outgoing
Payment
Effects on Configuration
Make your entries in Configure Your Solution, which is part of the Manage Your Solution app. In the Realize
phase, make changes to predelivered configuration settings or create new settings if needed. It may be
possible to create new settings by copying existing settings and adapting them. Note that to ensure data
For more information about the settings that are to be made in each configuration step, read the system
documentation. You access this documentation from within the configuration step using the Configuration Help
button.
Related Information
With this app you can schedule the reversing of bill of exchange liability using the template and scheduling
options provided.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
With this app, you can schedule Machine Learning jobs for automatic clearing using the templates and
scheduling options provided.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
Effects on Configuration
In addition to the VAT detail report, you can use the Run Compliance Reports app to generate the VAT return
summary report that provides the VAT amount by aggregating the fields of company code, tax code, and
purpose of purchase for VAT-purchase (YOTO KUBUN).
Technical Details
Type Changed
Related Information
VAT Return
14.12 Luxembourg
14.12.1 Finance
With this release, new configuration steps for making settings related to Luxembourg have been added to
Configure Your Solution in the Manage Your Solution app. In addition, changes have been made to some
previously delivered configuration items or configuration steps.
Type Changed
Additional Details
New/changed
Configuration configuration ob Leading scope
Type of change for ... ject How to find it What you can do item
SSCUI moved to a Balance of Pay Define Items for Finance Define items for J58 ( Accounting
ments Balance of Statutory the corresponding and Financial
different configu-
Payments Forms form for Balance Close)
ration item Reporting
of Payments for
Balance of
your country.
Payments
SSCUI moved to a Balance of Pay Define Rules for Finance Define rules for the J58 (Accounting
ments Items Statutory items of your Bal and Financial
different configu-
ance of Payments Close)
ration item Reporting
form.
Balance of
Payments
Effects on Configuration
Make your entries in Configure Your Solution, which is part of the Manage Your Solution app. In the Realize
phase, make changes to predelivered configuration settings or create new settings if needed. It may be
possible to create new settings by copying existing settings and adapting them. Note that to ensure data
consistency, the changes that you can make to predelivered configuration settings may be limited. In some, but
not all cases, you can delete new records that you have added.
For more information about the settings that are to be made in each configuration step, read the system
documentation. You access this documentation from within the configuration step using the Configuration Help
button.
14.13 Malaysia
14.13.1 Finance
The Post Tax Payable activity is enabled for the Malaysia GST Return report in the Run Compliance Reports app.
Note
To access the Post Tax Payable activity, in addition to the country-specific roles, make sure that the role
SAP_BR_GL_ACCOUNTANT is assigned to the user.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Related Information
GST Return
The eDocument feature has been renamed to Document Compliance. Document Compliance enables you to
create electronic documents (eDocuments) for your source documents and transmit them to external
systems, such as from tax authorities or business partners.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
Effects on Configuration
Related Information
Document Compliance
Document Compliance for Hungary
Document Compliance for Italy
Document Compliance for Mexico
Document Compliance for Taiwan
14.15 Netherlands
14.15.1 Finance
The NL_BTL91 payment format has been replaced by the NL_CGI_XML_CT payment format.
Technical Details
Type Changed
If you need to create an incident regarding this feature, use component FI-AP-AP-B1.
Effects on Configuration
You can display the details of the payment formats, as well as import, export, edit, check, and release the
formats in the Map Payment Format Data configuration step in Manage Your Solution Configure Your
Solution Finance Accounts Payable Payment Medium Formats Map Payment Format Data .
Related Information
14.16 Norway
14.16.1 Finance
You can use the Run Compliance Reports app to create a list to prepare the VAT return that fulfills the
requirements of the tax authorities in Norway
Technical Details
Type New
If you need to create an incident regarding this feature, you can also use component XX-CSC-NO-FI
Related Information
VAT Return
14.17 Philippines
14.17.1 Finance
The Post Tax Payable activity is enabled for the Philippines VAT Return report in the Run Compliance Reports
app.
Note
To access the Post Tax Payable activity, in addition to the country-specific roles, make sure that the role
SAP_BR_GL_ACCOUNTANT is assigned to the user.
Technical Details
Type Changed
14.18 Poland
14.18.1 Finance
With this feature you can display a list of all account transactions for a selected posting period, save a local file
of the list, and print the list. This activity deals with Compliance Reporting framework reports.
Technical Details
Type New
The SAF-T app for Poland has been enhanced to enable creation of XML reporting files for the (mandatory)
reporting of warehouse movements (JPK_MAG) and bank statements (JPK_WB) that fulfills the requirements
of the tax authorities in Poland.
● JPK_MAG - (from Polish "Magazyn") the JPK_MAG file is aimed at listing movements in a warehouse:
external goods receipts, goods issues, internal goods issues and stock transfers, and categorizes of
movements according to the classification provided by the Polish authorities.
● JPK_WB - (from Polish "Wyciągi bankowe") the JPK_WB file is aimed at reporting information about
business' bank account movements and statements, including the senders' and recipients' account
numbers, amounts and currency of the transactions, description of the payment order and ID data.
Type Changed
Additional Details
If you need to create an incident regarding this feature, use component XX-CSC-PL-FI-SAF
For more information about this app, go to More Program documentation within the app.
Technical Details
Type New
You can use the Run Advanced Compliance Reports app to generate the cash flow statement that fulfill the
requirements of the government in Poland. You can use the direct method and submit it by year to the tax
authorities.
Type New
See Also
Changes to the Identity and Access Management (IAM) objects delivered for Poland require you to recheck
your business roles and the business catalogs assigned to them. Ensure that the restrictions included in the
business catalogs are set correctly to allow your users to use their business apps as needed.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Use the Business Role Templates app to check the following business role templates or business catalogs and
their restriction types:
Note
You can also see which business catalogs have changed in the Business Catalogs app. Read the description
displayed for each business catalog in the system for more information about the authorizations controlled
by the catalog and its restriction types.
IAM Objects
Cash Management - Business Catalog New business catalog These are the related 1J2 (Advance Compli
Cash Flow Reporting restriction types: ance Reporting)
for Poland
● Sales Document
(SAP_FIN_BC_CASH_
Type (AUART)
CF_PL_PC)
● Company Code
(BUKRS)
● Company Code /
Profit Center /
Cost Element
(BUKRS_PRCTR_K
STAR)
● For Authorization
Field: Master Data
Type
(FICSMDTYP)
● Hierarchy Type/ID
for Accounting
(HRYTYPE_HRYID
)
● Report Category
(SRF_REPCAT)
General Ledger - Business Catalog New restriction types The following restric Not applicable
Reporting for Poland were added to the tion types were added
(SAP_FIN_BC_GL_RE business catalog. to the business catalog
PORTING_PL_PC) enabling only Read ac
cess:
● Company Code/
House Bank/
Payment Method
(BUKRS_HBKID_H
KTID_PAYMETH)
● Company Code/
Profit Center /
Cost Element
(BUKRS_PRCTR_K
STAR)
Related Information
14.19 Portugal
Technical Details
Type New
SD
Additional Details
This digital signature software is certified by the tax authorities in Portugal (Direcção Geral dos Impostos,
DGCI). It uses private encryption keys to production systems, each system using its key to automatically
digitally sign the following documents :
● Billing documents including invoices, proforma invoices, debit memos, and credit memos for a Portuguese
sales organization
● Accounting documents including invoices, debit memos, and credit memos created manually for a
Portuguese company code
You also need to include signature information on printed documents. The SAP S/4HANA Cloud Edition allows
you to print billing documents with a digital signature.
Effects on Configuration
As a key user, you set up digital signature for Portugal for accounting and billing documents as described here
Configuration Options for Key Users.
Related Information
With this feature, you can electronically request authorization from the tax authorities before the transport of
goods starts. You can use the eDocument Cockpit app to submit the generated eDocuments to the tax
authorities. You can also track the status of the eDocuments in the app as well as display the response from the
tax authorities.
Type New
The eDocument Cockpit app has been enhanced with the Portugal Transp. Registration process. You use this
process to register your transport electronically at the tax authorities. You can set up your system to create
eDocuments automatically whenever you post a goods issue document in the source application.
Effects on Configuration
In the Manage Your Solution app, under Configure Your Solution, configuration experts can make settings under
Application Platform and Infrastructure Legal Compliance General Settings for eDocuments in the
following new configuration steps:
Related Information
This feature enables you to generate withholding tax report based on the information collected from supplier
documents and customer rebate documents.
Technical Details
Type New
Available In Portugal
Related Information
Changes to the Identity and Access Management (IAM) objects delivered for <your area> require you to
recheck your business roles and the business catalogs assigned to them. Ensure that the restrictions included
in the business catalogs are set correctly to allow your users to use their business apps as needed.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
Use the Business Role Templates app to check the following business role templates or business catalogs and
their restriction types:
Note
You can also see which business catalogs have changed in the Business Catalogs app. Read the description
displayed for each business catalog in the system for more information about the authorizations controlled
by the catalog and its restriction types.
IAM Objects
Accounts Receivable - Business Catalog Use this new Business This business catalog Not applicable
Digital Signatures for
Catalog to digitally has the following re
Portugal
sign documents for strictions:
(SAP_FIN_BC_AR_DI
data submission. For
GI_SIGN_PT_PC) ● Company Code
example, signing itself
(BUKRS)
or maintaining number
● Sales Organiza
gaps for the digital sig
tion for Billing-Re
nature.
lated Documents
When you assign this (VKORG)
business catalog, you
must limit access us
ing the following re
striction types: com
pany code and sales
organization.
Accounts Receivable - Business Catalog Use this new Business This business catalog Not applicable
Digital Signatures for Catalog to perform Ad
has the following re
Portugal vanced Compliance
strictions:
(SAP_FIN_BC_AP_RE Reporting (ACR) for
PORTING_PT_PC) Portugal. For example, ● Company Code
ACR for SAF-T Self-Bill (BUKRS)
ing.
● Report Category
(SRF_REPCAT)
Accounts Payable Business Role Template In addition to the This country-specific Not applicable
Accountant -
SAP_BR_AP_AC role comprises a selec
PortugalSAP_BR_AP_
COUNTANT business tion of tasks that an
ACCOUNTANT_PT)
role template, which accounts payable ac
includes the main ac countant in Portugal
counts payable activi needs to perform for
ties, this new country- related accounts paya
specific role template ble business activities.
is now available for ac
countants doing busi
ness in Portugal.
Accounts Receivable Business Role Template In addition to the This country-specific Not applicable
Accountant -
SAP_BR_AR_AC role comprises a selec
PortugalSAP_BR_AR_
COUNTANT business tion of tasks that an
ACCOUNTANT_PT)
role template, which accounts receivable
includes the main ac accountant in Portugal
counts receivable ac needs to perform for
tivities, this new coun related accounts re
try-specific role tem ceivable business ac
plate is now available tivities.
for accountants doing
business in Portugal.
Related Information
You can use the Create VAT Return (Portugal) app to create an XML file for the monthly or quarterly VAT return
that fulfills the requirements of the tax authorities in Portugal.
Type New
Additional Details
If you need to create an incident regarding this feature, use component XX-CSC-PT-FI
For more information about this app, go to More Program documentation within the app.
You can use the Create VAT Refund (Portugal)app to create a TXT file for VAT refund that fulfills the
requirements of the tax authorities in Portugal. The TXT file can be integrated in the Create VAT Return
(Portugal) app, so that this app generates the required XML for submission to the government.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
If you need to create an incident regarding this feature, use component XX-CSC-PT-FI.
Technical Details
Type New
Technical Details
Type New
You can use the Central Bank Reporting (Portugal) app to create an XML file that contains the necessary data to
submit to the Central Bank in Portugal.
Type New
Additional Details
If you need to create an incident regarding this feature, use component XX-CSC-PT-FI.
For more information about this app, go to More Program documentation within the app.
You can use the PT_CGI_XML_CT, PT_CGI_XML_DD payment formats, and the CAMT.053, MT940 bank
statements for your incoming and outgoing payments.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
If you need to create an incident regarding this feature, use component FI-AP-AP-B1.
You can display the details of the payment formats, as well as import, export, edit, check, and release the
formats in the Map Payment Format Data configuration step in Manage Your Solution Configure Your
Solution Finance Accounts Payable Payment Medium Formats Map Payment Format Data .
Related Information
This feature enables you to block and delete personal data in a simplified way by using SAP Information
Lifecycle Management (ILM).
Personal data collected in business partner master data can be blocked as soon as business activities that use
this data are completed and the residence period for the data has elapsed; after this time, only users with
additional authorizations can access this data.
When the retention period for data expires, personal data can be destroyed completely so that it can no longer
be retrieved. Retention periods must be defined in the customer system.
You can use the FI_CBR_PT archiving object to archive central bank reporting data for Portugal.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
If you need to create an incident regarding this feature, use component XX-CSC-PT-FI .
● Business activity: The relevant data is used in ongoing business, for example, contract creation, delivery,
paymen
● Residence period: The data remains in the database and can be used in case of subsequent processes
related to the original purpose, for example, reporting obligations
● Blocking period: The relevant data needs to be retained for legal reasons. During the blocking period,
business users of SAP applications are prevented from displaying and using this data; it can only be
processed in case of mandatory legal provisions.
● Deletion: The data is deleted and no longer exists on the database.
See Also
For more information about the deletion of personal data in Central Bank Reporting, see
14.19.2.10 SAF-T
The SAF-T app for Portugal has been enhanced to enable creation of XML reporting files for the (mandatory)
reporting of electronic accounting, that fulfills the requirements of the tax authorities in Portugal
Technical Details
Type New
You can now use the Advanced Compliance Reporting framework to execute your SAF-T Billing report.
You can now use the Advanced Compliance Reporting framework to execute your SAF-T MM self-billing report.
Additional Details
If you need to create an incident regarding this feature, use component XX-CSC-PT-FI-SAF.
For more information about this app, go to More Program documentation within the app.
14.20 Romania
14.20.1 Finance
You can use the Run Compliance Reports app to generate the semester financial statements in accordance with
the Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP) in XML file format, which can be imported into the PDF
file downloaded from ANAF software.
Type New
Additional Details
If you need to create an incident regarding this feature, use component XX-CSC-RO-FI.
Effects on Configuration
Related Information
14.21.1 Finance
With this feature, you can use the RU_MT103 payment format and the MT940 bank statement in your payment
processes.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
If you need to create an incident regarding this feature, use component FI-AP-AP-B1.
Note
The RU_MT103 payment format is an example format that contains only legally required specific fields. We
provide maintenance only for these fields.
You can display the details of the payment formats, as well as import, export, edit, check, and release the
formats in the Map Payment Format Data configuration step in Manage Your Solution Configure Your
Solution Finance Accounts Payable Payment Medium Formats Map Payment Format Data .
Related Information
With this feature, you can use the Run Compliance Reports app to generate the VAT return.
Technical Details
Type New
Effects on Configuration
You need to set up your compliance reports in theSetting up Your Compliance Reports configuration step in
Manage Your Solution Configure Your Solution Finance Statutory Reporting Basic Settings .
You can maintain how the system searches for Financial Accounting documents for VAT reporting and how you
report information according to your business processes in theMaintain VAT Subscenarios configuration step in
Manage Your Solution Configure Your Solution Finance Statutory Reporting VAT .
You can maintain your VAT Return versions and assign subscenarios to them in theMaintain Return Versions
configuration step in Manage Your Solution Configure Your Solution Finance Statutory Reporting
VAT .
With this feature, you can use the Run Compliance Reports app to generate the purchase ledger.
Technical Details
Type New
Effects on Configuration
You need to set up your compliance reports in theSetting up Your Compliance Reports configuration step in
Manage Your Solution Configure Your Solution Finance Statutory Reporting Basic Settings .
You can maintain how the system searches for Financial Accounting documents for VAT reporting and how you
report information according to your business processes in theMaintain VAT Subscenarios configuration step in
Manage Your Solution Configure Your Solution Finance Statutory Reporting VAT .
You can maintain your VAT Return versions and assign subscenarios to them in theMaintain Return Versions
configuration step in Manage Your Solution Configure Your Solution Finance Statutory Reporting
VAT .
Related Information
With this feature, you can use the Run Compliance Reports app to generate the sales ledger.
Technical Details
Type New
Effects on Configuration
You need to set up your compliance reports in theSetting up Your Compliance Reports configuration step in
Manage Your Solution Configure Your Solution Finance Statutory Reporting Basic Settings .
You can maintain how the system searches for Financial Accounting documents for VAT reporting and how you
report information according to your business processes in theMaintain VAT Subscenarios configuration step in
Manage Your Solution Configure Your Solution Finance Statutory Reporting VAT .
You can maintain your VAT Return versions and assign subscenarios to them in theMaintain Return Versions
configuration step in Manage Your Solution Configure Your Solution Finance Statutory Reporting
VAT .
Related Information
Type New
Effects on Configuration
You need to set up your compliance reports in theSetting up Your Compliance Reports configuration step in
Manage Your Solution Configure Your Solution Finance Statutory Reporting Basic Settings .
You can maintain how the system searches for Financial Accounting documents for VAT reporting and how you
report information according to your business processes in theMaintain VAT Subscenarios configuration step in
Manage Your Solution Configure Your Solution Finance Statutory Reporting VAT .
You can maintain your VAT Return versions and assign subscenarios to them in theMaintain Return Versions
configuration step in Manage Your Solution Configure Your Solution Finance Statutory Reporting
VAT .
Related Information
With this feature, you can determine offsetting accounts automatically when account clerks post accounting
documents.
Technical Details
Type New
Effects on Configuration
You can group document items by certain fields before the system determines offsetting accounts by doing the
following:
1. Defining which documents will be selected for grouping in theGroup Accounting Document Items
configuration step in Manage Your Solution Configure Your Solution Finance General Ledger
Journal Entry
2. Defining how the system groups document items from the selected documents before performing
offsetting account determination in theGroup Accounting Document Items configuration step in Manage
Your Solution Configure Your Solution Finance General Ledger Journal Entry
You can maintain versions of offsetting account determination rules in theDefine Offsetting Account
Determination Versions configuration step in Manage Your Solution Configure Your Solution Finance
General Ledger Journal Entry .
You need to activate Offsetting Account Determination for specific ledgers and assign versions of offsetting
account determination rules in theActivate Online Offsetting Account Determination configuration step in
Manage Your Solution Configure Your Solution Finance General Ledger Journal Entry .
With this feature, you can prepare reconciliation reports. You use these reports to compare and reconcile, if
necessary, values for all transactions you had with your business partner for a given period.
Technical Details
Type New
Effects on Configuration
You can choose whether to split reconciliation reports by contract or produce them as a single file in theSplit
Reconciliation Reports by Contract configuration step in Manage Your Solution Configure Your Solution
Database and Data Management Business Partner Business Partner .
Related Information
With this feature, you can calculate the average exchange rate before you create the invoice and clear invoices
and down payments after the invoice has been posted.
Technical Details
Type New
Effects on Configuration
You need to enable the solution for Logistics in theEnable Down Payments in FC Function for MM Documents
configuration step in Manage Your Solution Configure Your Solution Sourcing and Procurement Invoice
Processing Incoming Invoice .
You need to enable the solution for Billing in theEnable Down Payments in FC Function for SD Documents
configuration step in Manage Your Solution Configure Your Solution Sales Sales Billing Billing .
Related Information
With this feature, you can use negative posting in clearing entries in Accounting, which ensures that the G/L
transaction figures are calculated correctly in accordance with the legal requirements in Russia to avoid the
problem during clearing of accounts when additional line items can be created in the General Ledger (G/L),
customer, or suppliers accounts, which result in an incorrect increase in the G/L transaction figures.
Type New
Related Information
With this feature, you can output VAT Invoice, corrective VAT Invoice and revision VAT Invoice documents from
Accounting in PDF form with Russian-specific fields.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item DB9, J59, DBQ, BKL, BKJ, 1EZ, 1F1, 1HO, 2EQ, 2ET, BDW
Related Information
Create Correspondence
With this feature, you can output invoices for prepayments in PDF form with Russian-specific fields.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
Create Correspondence
With this feature, you can use Russian-specific fields for Fixed Assets.
Technical Details
Type New
You need to define OKOF codes in theDefine OKOF Codes configuration step in Manage Your Solution
Configure Your Solution Finance Asset Accounting Configure Asset Accounting .
You need to assign depreciation groups to OKOF codes to define the minimum and maximum useful life of the
asset that belongs to the given OKOF code and depreciation group. You can do this in theDefine Depreciation
Group Parameters for OKOF Codes configuration step in Manage Your Solution Configure Your Solution
Finance Asset Accounting Configure Asset Accounting .
14.21.3 Sales
With this feature, you can electronically register contracts that you sign with your business partners according
to Russian law.
Technical Details
Type New
Effects on Configuration
You need to maintain number range 01 for internal numbering of contracts in theDefine Number Ranges for
Contracts configuration step in Manage Your Solution Configure Your Solution Database and Data
Management Business Partner Business Partner .
Contract Maintenance
With this feature, you can output VAT Invoice, corrective VAT Invoice and revision VAT Invoice documents from
Billing in PDF form with Russian-specific fields and use negative posting when canceling billing documents.
Technical Details
Type New
Scope Item DB9, J59, DBQ, BKL, BKJ, 1EZ, 1F1, 1HO, 2EQ, 2ET, BDW
Related Information
With this feature, you can output deliveries in PDF form with Russian-specific fields.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
With this feature, you can prepare a list of stock on hand at the beginning and end of each period. Unlike the
generic stock apps, this app shows the value of the stock as well as its quantity.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
With this feature, you can revaluate fixed assets using Russian-specific accounts according to Russian
legislation.
Type New
With this feature, you can use negative posting in clearing entries in Billing, which ensures that the G/L
transaction figures are calculated correctly in accordance with the legal requirements in Russia to avoid the
problem during clearing of accounts when additional line items can be created in the General Ledger (G/L),
customer, or suppliers accounts, which result in an incorrect increase in the G/L transaction figures.
Technical Details
Type New
Related Information
With this feature, you can use negative posting in clearing entries in Logistics, which ensures that the G/L
transaction figures are calculated correctly in accordance with the legal requirements in Russia to avoid the
Technical Details
Type New
14.22.1 Finance
Changes to the Identity and Access Management (IAM) objects delivered for South Africa require you to
recheck your business roles and the business catalogs assigned to them. Ensure that the restrictions included
in the business catalogs are set correctly to allow your users to use their business apps as needed.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Use the Business Role Templates app to check the following business role templates or business catalogs and
their restriction types:
Note
You can also see which business catalogs have changed in the Business Catalogs app. Read the description
displayed for each business catalog in the system for more information about the authorizations controlled
by the catalog and its restriction types.
IAM Objects
Accounts Payable - Business Catalog New business catalog The following restric Not Applicable
Analytics for South dependency has been tion types were added
Africa added to the business to the business catalog
(SAP_FIN_BC_AP_AN catalog. enabling Read/
ALYTICS_ZA_PC ) Write/F4 access:
● Company Code/
House Bank/
Payment Method
(BUKRS_HBKID_H
KTID_PAYMETH )
General Ledger - Business Catalog New business catalog The following restric Not Applicable
Reporting for South dependency has been tion types were added
Africa added to the business to the business catalog
(SAP_FIN_BC_GL_RE catalog. enabling Read/
PORTING_ZA_PC ) Write/F4 access:
● Company Code/
House Bank/
Payment Method
(BUKRS_HBKID_H
KTID_PAYMETH )
Related Information
14.23.1 Finance
The VAT return functionality for Saudi Arabia has been enhanced by providing the following reporting activities:
● Manage Tax Items: To include or exclude tax items from a reporting period
● Post Tax Payables: To post balances of tax accounts directly to a tax payable account, without any manual
entry
You generate VAT Return for Saudi Arabia using the Run Advanced Compliance Reports app.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Related Information
VAT Return
Changes to the Identity and Access Management (IAM) objects delivered for Saudi Arabia require you to
recheck your business roles and the business catalogs assigned to them. Ensure that the restrictions included
in the business catalogs are set correctly to allow your users to use their business apps as needed.
Type Changed
Use the Business Role Templates app to check the following business role templates or business catalogs and
their restriction types:
Note
You can also see which business catalogs have changed in the Business Catalogs app. Read the description
displayed for each business catalog in the system for more information about the authorizations controlled
by the catalog and its restriction types.
IAM Objects
General Ledger - Business catalog Changes were made to Changes were made to 1J2 (Advance Compli
Reporting for Saudi the restriction types the restriction type ance Reporting
Arabia BUKRS (Company
(SAP_FIN_BC_GL_RE Code)
PORTING_SA_PC)
Related Information
14.24.1 Finance
The Print Document Extract app is enhanced with the Form Template Name field so that you, as accounts
receivable accountant, can choose a customized form template to print letters in which selected customer
items and/or vendor items of a document are listed.
You can create your own customized form templates using the Maintain Form Templates app. To create your
own form templates, download a form template from the app, customize it offline and save it as a new form
template, and then upload the new template to the Maintain Form Template app.
To use your own form template for the document extracts, specify the form template name in the Form
Template Name field.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Two new activities Manage Tax Items and Post Tax Payable are enabled for the Singapore GST Return report in
the Run Compliance Reports app.
Note
To access the Post Tax Payable activity, in addition to the country-specific roles, make sure that the role
SAP_BR_GL_ACCOUNTANT is assigned to the user.
Type Changed
Related Information
GST Return
With this feature, you can consolidate multiple source invoices into a single tax invoice in XML format.
Technical Details
Type New
A new app Create Consolidated eDocuments is available. With this app, you consolidate the eDocuments of the
individual invoices that can belong together into consolidated eDocuments. Through the eDocument Cockpit
app, you can create and send consolidated tax invoices in XML format to the integrated forwarding system by
submitting the consolidated eDocuments. Then the forwarding system forwards them to the National Tax
Service.
With the new app Schedule eDocument Jobs, you can schedule the system to create consolidated eDocuments
automatically, using the job template Create Consolidated eDocuments. With the new app Application Logs for
eDocuments, you can view the logs of these application jobs.
Related Information
Consolidated Processing
Some enhancements have been made to the South Korea e-Tax Invoice process.
Technical Details
Type New
● A new Status (Get Status) button is available. You can use it to get the validation status of a tax invoice
returned by the National Tax Service.
● A new option Display PDF is available under the Display... menu. You can use it to display and print tax
invoices in PDF format.
● A new option Display Revised Documents is available under the Goto... menu. You can use it to check if any
cancelation document, reversal document, or credit memo exists for a tax invoice.
Note
○ This function works for tax invoices that have been validated by the NTS only.
○ The system displays the cancelation document, reversal document, or credit memo that has been
assigned the correct original approval ID only.
With the new app Schedule eDocument Jobs, you can schedule the system to perform actions on eDocuments
in the eDocument Cockpit automatically, using the job template Process eDocuments in the Background. With
the new app Application Logs for eDocuments, you can view the logs of these application jobs.
Related Information
14.25.2 Finance
You can use the Run Advanced Compliance Reports app to generate the trial balance that fulfill the
requirements of the government in South Korea. Apart from the existing file of Trial Balance in the standard
format, you can also generate a new PDF file of Total Trial Balance in the format required by the tax authorities
in South Korea.
Type Changed
See Also
You can use the Run Advanced Compliance Reports app to generate the Value-Added Tax (VAT) reports that
fulfill the requirements of the government in South Korea. Apart from the existing features, the report
generates a new file VAT Base Amount and Tax Amount by Per–Business Unit (Business Place) Taxation in TXT
format. This file classifies the info into the output tax category and input tax category by business place, which
includes net amount, tax amount, penalty tax, deductible tax, and tax payable/tax refundable.
Technical Details
Type Changed
With this release, new configuration steps for making settings related to South Korea have been added to
Configure Your Solution in the Manage Your Solution app. In addition, changes have been made to some
previously delivered configuration items or configuration steps.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
New/changed
Configuration configuration ob Leading scope
Type of change for ... ject How to find it What you can do item
New configuration Tax Define Types of Find this configu- Define the types of J58 (Accounting
step Business ration under business recog and Financial
Finance nized by district Close)
Statutory tax offices.
Reporting
Tax .
New configuration Tax Define Types of In Find this configu- Define the types of J58 (Accounting
step dustry ration under industry recog and Financial
Finance nized by district Close)
Statutory tax offices.
Reporting
Tax .
Effects on Configuration
Make your entries in Configure Your Solution, which is part of the Manage Your Solution app. In the Realize
phase, make changes to predelivered configuration settings or create new settings if needed. It may be
possible to create new settings by copying existing settings and adapting them. Note that to ensure data
consistency, the changes that you can make to predelivered configuration settings may be limited. In some, but
not all cases, you can delete new records that you have added.
For more information about the settings that are to be made in each configuration step, read the system
documentation. You access this documentation from within the configuration step using the Configuration Help
button.
Related Information
14.26 Spain
14.26.1 Finance
With this app you can schedule the reversing of bill of exchange liability using the template and scheduling
options provided.
Type New
Related Information
The eDocument feature has been renamed to Document Compliance. Document Compliance enables you to
create electronic documents (eDocuments) for your source documents and transmit them to external
systems, such as from tax authorities or business partners.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Effects on Configuration
Related Information
Document Compliance
Document Compliance for Hungary
Document Compliance for Italy
Document Compliance for Mexico
Document Compliance for Taiwan
This feature enables you to create and process eDocuments for invoices, credit or debit memos issued to
public entities and submit them to the public entities as acknowledgment as well as a payment request. You
can either submit the eDocuments directly to the public entities (webservice process), or download the XMLs
and submit them manually (download process).
Type New
The eDocument Cockpit app has been enhanced with the following new processes:
Effects on Configuration
To support the new features for eInvoicing to public entities, key users must carry out a number of
configuration steps. For information about the settings required, see Configuration Options for Key Users.
Key users can also extend the solution in the Custom Fields and Logic app using the following new Business
Add-Ins (BAdIs):
Related Information
This feature enables you to use enhanced functions for reporting VAT tax in Spain using the Electronic Tax
Register Books with SII solution.
Technical Details
Type Changed
The eDocument Cockpit app has been enhanced with the following new processes:
Effects on Configuration
In the Manage Your Solution app, under Configure Your Solution, key users can make settings under
Application Platform and Infrastructure Legal Compliance Spain: eDocuments for VAT Register Books
with SII in the following new configuration steps:
Key users can also extend the solution in the Custom Fields and Logic app using the following new Business
Add-Ins (BAdIs):
This feature enables you to prepare, analyze and submit Impuesto General Indirecto de Canarias (IGIC) tax
data to the tax agency in the Canary Islands using the Immediate Supply of Information System (SII).
Technical Details
Type New
The eDocument Cockpit app has been enhanced with the following new processes:
The following apps have been enhanced to support IGIC tax reporting for the Canary Islands:
Effects on Configuration
In the Manage Your Solution app, key users can configure the Document Compliance solution for IGIC tax
reporting by choosing Configure Your Solution and making settings in the following new configuration steps
Key users can also extend the solution in the Custom Fields and Logic app using the following new Business
Add-Ins (BAdIs):
Related Information
14.27 Switzerland
14.27.1 Finance
Changes to the Identity and Access Management (IAM) objects delivered for Switzerland require you to
recheck your business roles and the business catalogs assigned to them. Ensure that the restrictions included
in the business catalogs are set correctly to allow your users to use their business apps as needed.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
If you need to create an incident regarding this feature, use component XX-CSC-CH-FI.
Use the Business Role Templates app to check the following business role templates or business catalogs and
their restriction types:
Note
You can also see which business catalogs have changed in the Business Catalogs app. Read the description
displayed for each business catalog in the system for more information about the authorizations controlled
by the catalog and its restriction types.
IAM Objects
General Ledger - Business catalog New business catalog A new business cata Not applicable
Reporting for dependency has been log has been added to
Switzerland added to the business the list of the depend
(SAP_FIN_BC_GL_RE catalog. ent business catalogs:
PORTING_CH_PC) the Master Data -
Business Partner
Display
(SAP_CMD_BC_BP_DI
SP_PC) business cata
log.
Related Information
With this release, new configuration steps for making settings related to Switzerland have been added to
Configure Your Solution in the Manage Your Solution app. In addition, changes have been made to some
previously delivered configuration items or configuration steps.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
New/changed
Configuration configuration ob Leading scope
Type of change for ... ject How to find it What you can do item
● SSCUI moved Balance of Pay Define Reporting Find this configu- Create subreport J58 (Accounting
ration under
to a different ments Subcategories ing categories that and Financial
configuration Finance are reported in the Close)
Statutory
item foreign trade dec
Reporting laration.
Balance of
Payments <navi
gation path>
● SSCUI moved Balance of Pay Define Criteria for Finance Define how the J58 (Accounting
ments Assigning Statutory system groups
to a different and Financial
Documents to documents into a
configuration Reporting Close)
Reporting given reporting
item Balance of
Category/ category.
Subcategory Payments
Effects on Configuration
Make your entries in Configure Your SolutionManage Your Solution, which is part of the app. In the Realize
phase, make changes to predelivered configuration settings or create new settings if needed. It may be
For more information about the settings that are to be made in each configuration step, read the system
documentation. You access this documentation from within the configuration step using the Configuration Help
button.
Related Information
The VAT return functionality for Switzerland has been enhanced by providing the following reporting activities:
The VAT Return report generates now an XML file to comply with the newest legal requirements.
Furthermore, corrections to an already completed VAT return have been enabled by creating a new correction
run phase.
You generate the VAT Return for Switzerland using the Run Compliance Reports app.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
If you need to create an incident regarding this feature, you can also use component XX-CSC-CH-FI
In order to generate the XML file mentioned above, you have to perform the following configuration:
1. In the Configure Your Solution app, which is part of the Manage Your Solution app, set the country version
Switzerland.
2. Find the Setting up Your Compliance Reports configuration step. You find this step under Finance
Statutory Reporting Basic Settings .
3. In the Set Properties of the Reporting Activity activity, limit the validity of the CH_VAT_DCL_2018_V0_S
activity key. You do this by changing the Use Until date to 31.12.2018.
Note
The CH_VAT_DCL_2018_V0_S activity key corresponds to the old output version with PDF.
4. In the Enter Parameters Specific to Reporting Entity activity, enter a parameter, for example,
CH_VAT_COMPANY_NAME.
Related Information
14.28 Taiwan
14.28.1 Finance
With this release, new configuration steps for making settings related to Taiwan have been added to Configure
Your Solution in the Manage Your Solution app. In addition, changes have been made to some previously
delivered configuration items or configuration steps.
Technical Details
Type New
Additional Details
New/changed
Configuration configuration ob Leading scope
Type of change for ... ject How to find it What you can do item
New configuration Official Document Maintain Number Find this configu- Maintain GUI num J58 (Accounting
step Numbering Ranges ration step under ber range intervals and Financial
Application for each number Close)
Platform and group.
Infrastructure
Legal Compliance
Official
Document
Numbering .
Effects on Configuration
Make your entries in Configure Your Solution, which is part of the Manage Your Solution app. In the Realize
phase, make changes to predelivered configuration settings or create new settings if needed. It may be
possible to create new settings by copying existing settings and adapting them. Note that to ensure data
consistency, the changes that you can make to predelivered configuration settings may be limited. In some, but
not all cases, you can delete new records that you have added.
For more information about the settings that are to be made in each configuration step, read the system
documentation. You access this documentation from within the configuration step using the Configuration Help
button.
Related Information
The eDocument feature has been renamed to Document Compliance. Document Compliance enables you to
create electronic documents (eDocuments) for your source documents and transmit them to external
systems, such as from tax authorities or business partners.
Technical Details
Type Changed
Additional Details
Related Information
Document Compliance
Document Compliance for Hungary
Document Compliance for Italy
Document Compliance for Mexico
Document Compliance for Taiwan
14.29 Turkey
14.29.1 Finance
This feature enables you to electronically generate the ledger report in a TEXT file. You can use the Run
Compliance Reports app to generate the report.
Technical Details
Type New
Available In Turkey
Related Information
E-Ledger Report
With this release, new configuration steps for making settings related to E-Ledger have been added to
Configure Your Solution in the Manage Your Solution app. In addition, changes have been made to some
previously delivered configuration items or configuration steps.
Technical Details
Type New
Available In Turkey
Additional Details
New/changed
Configuration configuration ob Leading scope
Type of change for ... ject How to find it What you can do item
New configuration E-Ledger reporting Specifying the Ex Find this configu- You can specify J58 (Accounting
ration under the external docu
step ternal Document and Financial
Finance ment type and ex
Type Close)
Statutory ternal document
type description.
Reporting
Document
Journal
New configuration E-Ledger reporting Assigning SAP Find this configu- You can create J58 (Accounting
Document Type to ration under new entries to
step and Financial
External Docu Finance specify the SAP
Close)
ment Type Statutory document type,
and external docu
Reporting
ment type to map
Document
the SAP document
Journal type to the exter
nal document
type.
New configuration E-Ledger reporting Maintaining the Find this configu- You can enter the J58 (Accounting
General Ledger ration under chart of accounts,
step and Financial
Account Descrip Finance main account ID (3
Close)
tion Statutory digits), and G/L
account long text
Reporting
to maintain the
Document
general ledger ac
Journal count description.
New configuration E-Ledger reporting Specifying the E- Find this configu- You can enter the J58 (Accounting
Ledger Payment ration under electronic ledger
step and Financial
Method Finance payment method
Close)
Statutory and electronic
ledger payment
Reporting
method descrip
Document
tion.
Journal
New configuration E-Ledger reporting Assigning SAP Find this configu- You can make new J58 (Accounting
Document Type to ration under entries to specify
step and Financial
E-Ledger Payment Finance the document type
Close)
Method Statutory and payment
method. You can
Reporting
also enter the from
Document
G/L account and
Journal to G/L account de
tails.
New configuration E-Ledger reporting Maintaining Initial Find this configu- You can enter the J58 (Accounting
Sequence Number ration under company code,
step and Financial
Finance header sequence
Close)
Statutory counter, and line
sequence counter.
Reporting
Document
Journal
Effects on Configuration
Make your entries in Configure Your Solution, which is part of the Manage Your Solution app. In the Realize
phase, make changes to predelivered configuration settings or create new settings if needed. It may be
possible to create new settings by copying existing settings and adapting them. Note that to ensure data
consistency, the changes that you can make to predelivered configuration settings may be limited. In some, but
not all cases, you can delete new records that you have added.
For more information about the settings that are to be made in each configuration step, read the system
documentation. You access this documentation from within the configuration step using the Configuration Help
button.
Changes to the Identity and Access Management (IAM) objects delivered for Turkey require you to recheck
your business roles and the business catalogs assigned to them. Ensure that the restrictions included in the
business catalogs are set correctly to allow your users to use their business apps as needed.
Technical Details
Type New
Use the Business Role Templates app to check the following business role templates or business catalogs and
their restriction types:
Note
You can also see which business catalogs have changed in the Business Catalogs app. Read the description
displayed for each business catalog in the system for more information about the authorizations controlled
by the catalog and its restriction types.
Globalization - business catalog New business catalog New business catalog Not applicable
Electronic Documents delivered. available for using
for Turkey apps for eDocuments
(SAP_SD_BC_GLO_ED for Turkey.
OC_TR_PC)
Billing Clerk for Turkey business role template The business role tem The business catalog Not applicable
(SAP_BR_BILLING_C plate has been ex SAP_SD_BC_GLO_EDO
LERK_TR) tended to support the C_TR_PC is now as
processing of elec signed to this business
tronic documents in role template.
Turkey.
Related Information
This feature enables you to create and process eDocuments for invoices created in the Sales and Finance
component, or invoices for returns in the Sourcing and Procurement component and transfer them to
recipients through an eInvoicing service provider and the tax authorities (TRA). You can also receive, accept or
reject eInvoices that you receive from your suppliers and view them in the system.
Technical Details
Type New
The Document Compliance solution for Turkey offers the following new or enhanced functions for eInvoicing:
● Using the eDocument Cockpit app, you can process the following types of electronic invoices:
○ Outgoing basic eInvoices, which you can send to your customer through the service provider and TRA
and you do not process the customer's response.
○ Outgoing commercial eInvoices, which you can send to your customer through the service provider
and TRA and you process the customer's response (acceptance or rejection)
○ Incoming basic eInvoices, which you receive from your supplier and create an incoming eDocument in
the system but you do not send a response
○ Incoming commercial eInvoices, which you receive from your supplier, create an incoming eDocument
in the system and you send a response whether you accept or reject the eInvoice
○ Consumer eInvoices, which you issue to your customer who is not a registered eInvoice user
○ Export eInvoices for customers located abroad or in a free zone, which you submit to the Ministry of
Customs and Trade (GTB) for approval through your service provider and the tax authorities
● You can upload customer's responses and incoming eInvoices to the system using the Process eDocument
Inbound Messages app.
● You can identify those of your customers and suppliers who are registered eInvoice users using the
Retrieve eInvoice Users app.
● You can run jobs to process actions on multiple eDocuments at a time using the Process eDocuments in the
Background app.
The eDocument Cockpit app has been enhanced with the following new processes:
The Process eDocument Inbound Messages app has been enhanced to allow the selection of new message
types for Turkey.
The new Retrieve eInvoice Users app is available on the SAP Fiori Launchpad.
The system administrator can schedule jobs to process actions on multiple eDocuments at a time using the
Process eDocuments in the Background app.
In the Manage Your Solution app, key users can configure the eInvoicing solution for Turkey by choosing
Configure Your Solution and making settings in the configuration steps below:
● Application Platform and Infrastructure Legal Compliance General Settings for eDocument :
○ Activate Source Type Documents for Company Code
○ Assign eDocument Type to Accounting Document Type
● Application Platform and Infrastructure Legal Compliance Turkey: eDocuments for Invoicing :
○ Maintain Sender Aliases and Receiver Aliases of My Company
○ Define UniCodes and Number Ranges for eInvoice Numbering
○ Define Number Range Intervals for eInvoice Numbering
○ Define Free-Zone Customers
○ Define eInvoicing Scenario for Customer
○ Define eInvoicing Scenario for Vendor
○ Define VAT Tax Types and Tax Codes
○ Define Number Range Intervals for Consumer Invoice Numbering
○ Define Default Partner Alias for eInvoicing
Key users can also extend the eDocument Cockpit app in the Custom Fields and Logic app using the following
Business Add-Ins (BAdIs):
eDocument Turkey: Determine Relevancy of Material for Ex eDocument Turkey: Determine Relevancy of Material for
port Export
Related Information
This feature enables you to create and process eDocuments for delivery notes created in the Sales or Sourcing
and Procurement component and transfer them to recipients through a service provider and the tax authorities
(TRA). You can also receive, accept or reject electronic delivery notes that you receive from your suppliers and
view them in the system.
Type New
Additional Details
The Document Compliance solution for Turkey offers the following new or enhanced functions for electronic
delivery notes:
● Using the eDocument Cockpit app, you can process the following types of electronic delivery notes:
○ Outgoing delivery notes created for outbound deliveries in Sales (if you are a supplier), or a return
purchase order in Source and Procurement (if you are a customer). You can send these delivery notes
to your customer through the service provider and TRA and you process the customer's response
(acceptance or rejection).
○ Incoming delivery notes, which you receive from your supplier, create an incoming eDocument in the
system and you send a response whether you accept or reject the delivery note
● You can upload customer's responses and incoming delivery notes to the system using the Process
eDocument Inbound Messages app.
● You can identify those of your customers and suppliers who are electronic delivery note users registered
with the TRA using the Retrieve Delivery Note Users app.
● You can run jobs to process actions on multiple eDocuments at a time using the Process eDocuments in the
Background app.
The eDocument Cockpit app has been enhanced with the following new processes:
The Process eDocument Inbound Messages app has been enhanced to allow the selection of new message
types for Turkey.
The new Retrieve Delivery Note Users app is available on the SAP Fiori Launchpad.
The system administrator can schedule jobs to process actions on multiple eDocuments at a time using the
Process eDocuments in the Background app.
Effects on Configuration
In the Manage Your Solution app, key users can configure the electronic delivery note solution for Turkey by
choosing Configure Your Solution and making settings in the configuration steps below:
● Application Platform and Infrastructure Legal Compliance General Settings for eDocument :
○ Activate Source Type Documents for Company Code
○ Assign eDocument Type to Delivery Type
● Application Platform and Infrastructure Legal Compliance Turkey: eDocuments for Invoicing :
○ Maintain Sender and Receiver Aliases for Delivery Notes
○ Define UniCodes and Number Ranges for Delivery Note Numbering
○ Define Number Range Intervals for Delivery Note Numbering
○ Define Default Partner Alias for Delivery Notes
Related Information
14.30.1 Finance
Changes to the Identity and Access Management (IAM) objects delivered for United Arab Emirates require you
to recheck your business roles and the business catalogs assigned to them. Ensure that the restrictions
included in the business catalogs are set correctly to allow your users to use their business apps as needed.
Type Changed
Use the Business Role Templates app to check the following business role templates or business catalogs and
their restriction types:
Note
You can also see which business catalogs have changed in the Business Catalogs app. Read the description
displayed for each business catalog in the system for more information about the authorizations controlled
by the catalog and its restriction types.
IAM Objects
General Ledger - Business catalog Changes were made to Changes were made to 1J2 (Advance Compli
Analytics for United the restriction types the restriction type ance Reporting
Arab Emirates BUKRS (Company
(SAP_FIN_BC_GL_RE Code)
PORTING_AE_PC)
Related Information
14.31.1 Finance
Technical Details
Type New
14.32.1.1 Tax per Document (Max Tax) for the United States
and Canada
With this feature, you can use tax per document so that Max Tax calculation rules are applied across multiple
items of a sales document. In addition, the use of tax per document improves system performance because
the call to the external tax system occurs once for the entire document, instead of numerous times for each
item.
Tax per document is part of the country-specific product assistance for tax calculation in Sales for the United
States and Canada that explains how you can automate the tax calculation for Sales in SAP S/4HANA Cloud
and an external tax system.
To make full use of the tax per document, you must configure pricing in Sales accordingly.
Type New
Scope Item BD9 (Sell from Stock) and all other scope items that include
Price Management
Related Information
With this feature, you can add a unique end-to-end transaction reference (UETR) to your credit transfers to
track the status of your payments. The tracking takes place in the SWIFT global payments innovation (gpi)
tracker enabling the checking and real-time monitoring of payments. You can manually enable the insertion of
the UETR data in the xx_CGI_XML_CT payment formats.
Technical Details
Type New
A key user can activate the function of adding a UETR to the credit transfers in the Create/Assign Selection
Variants (Alternative) configuration step in Manage Your Solution Configure Your Solution Finance
Accounts Payable Payment Medium Formats Create/Assign Selection Variants (Alternative) or in
Manage Your Solution Configure Your Solution Finance Accounts Receivable Automatic Incoming/
Outgoing Payment Create/Assign Selection Variants (Alternative) .
Related Information
Hyperlinks
Some links are classified by an icon and/or a mouseover text. These links provide additional information.
About the icons:
● Links with the icon : You are entering a Web site that is not hosted by SAP. By using such links, you agree (unless expressly stated otherwise in your
agreements with SAP) to this:
● The content of the linked-to site is not SAP documentation. You may not infer any product claims against SAP based on this information.
● SAP does not agree or disagree with the content on the linked-to site, nor does SAP warrant the availability and correctness. SAP shall not be liable for any
damages caused by the use of such content unless damages have been caused by SAP's gross negligence or willful misconduct.
● Links with the icon : You are leaving the documentation for that particular SAP product or service and are entering a SAP-hosted Web site. By using such
links, you agree that (unless expressly stated otherwise in your agreements with SAP) you may not infer any product claims against SAP based on this
information.
Example Code
Any software coding and/or code snippets are examples. They are not for productive use. The example code is only intended to better explain and visualize the syntax
and phrasing rules. SAP does not warrant the correctness and completeness of the example code. SAP shall not be liable for errors or damages caused by the use of
example code unless damages have been caused by SAP's gross negligence or willful misconduct.
Gender-Related Language
We try not to use gender-specific word forms and formulations. As appropriate for context and readability, SAP may use masculine word forms to refer to all genders.
SAP and other SAP products and services mentioned herein as well as
their respective logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of SAP
SE (or an SAP affiliate company) in Germany and other countries. All
other product and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their
respective companies.